Malc 1 11 2 HwInstall

MALC Hardware Installation Guide
MALC 723, MALC 719, and MALC 319
For software version 1.11.2

June 2005
Document Part Number: 830-00989-01
Zhone Technologies
@Zhone Way
7001 Oakport Street
Oakland, CA 94621
USA
510.777.7000
www.zhone.com
info@zhone.com
COPYRIGHT ©2000-2005 Zhone Technologies, Inc. and its licensors. All rights reserved.
This publication is protected by copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or
distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human
or computer language in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, manual
or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission from Zhone
Technologies, Inc.
BAN, GigaMux, MALC, Raptor, SLMS, Z-Edge, Zhone, ZMS, and the Zhone logo are
trademarks of Zhone Technologies, Inc.
Zhone Technologies makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof
and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability, noninfringement, or
fitness for a particular purpose. Further, Zhone Technologies reserves the right to revise this
publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of
Zhone Technologies to notify any person of such revision or changes.
2 MALC Hardware Installation Guide

CONTENTS
What’s new in this release .....................................................................................11

Style and notation conventions............................................................................11
Typographical conventions.....................................................................................12
Related documentation...........................................................................................12
Acronyms....................................................................................................................13
Contacting Global Service and Support.............................................................14
Technical support....................................................................................................14
Service requirements...............................................................................................14
Chapter 1 MALC ..........................................................................................................................15

Overview .....................................................................................................................15
Hardware overview...................................................................................................16
Chassis ....................................................................................................................16
MALC 17- and 21-slot chassis.........................................................................17
MALC 319 chassis ...........................................................................................17
MALC Uplink cards ...............................................................................................18
MALC slot cards.....................................................................................................18
MALC buses ...........................................................................................................19
Control bus .......................................................................................................20
Supervisory bus ................................................................................................20
Metallic test access bus ....................................................................................20
Ring voltage bus...............................................................................................20
TDM bus...........................................................................................................20
Features ......................................................................................................................20
ATM........................................................................................................................21
AAL2-BLES signaling .....................................................................................21
IMA ..................................................................................................................21
ATM cell relay .................................................................................................22
Management PVC ............................................................................................22
ATM-to-TDM interworking ...................................................................................22
T1/E1 circuit emulation ..........................................................................................22
IP and data services.................................................................................................23
GR-303 and V5.2 ....................................................................................................24
GR-303 overview .............................................................................................24
ISDN overview.................................................................................................25
V5.2 overview ..................................................................................................25
MALC Hardware Installation Guide 3

Contents
POTS voice .............................................................................................................26

VoIP ........................................................................................................................27
MGCP overview...............................................................................................27
SIP overview ....................................................................................................28
Voice gateway.........................................................................................................28
Packet voice support ...............................................................................................29
Redundancy.............................................................................................................31
Uplink card redundancy ...................................................................................31
APS...................................................................................................................31
Working card and protection card ....................................................................33
SONET/SDH APS + card redundancy.............................................................33
Management............................................................................................................33
Chapter 2 Preparing for installation ...................................................................................35

General safety precautions....................................................................................35
Safety ......................................................................................................................35
Preventing electrostatic damage .............................................................................37
Power supply safety information ............................................................................37
Tools you need..........................................................................................................37
Selecting the system location...............................................................................38
Installation precautions ..........................................................................................38
Environmental specifications ...............................................................................39
Power requirements and specifications.............................................................41
Cabling rules ...........................................................................................................41
Power specifications ...............................................................................................42
Chassis power consumption....................................................................................42
Grounding and isolation.........................................................................................42
Compliance and certifications ..............................................................................43
Chapter 3 Installing the MALC ..............................................................................................45

Unpacking the system.............................................................................................45
Installing mounting brackets on the MALC.......................................................46
Installing the chassis in a rack .............................................................................47
Wall mounting the MALC 319 chassis ................................................................49
Installing slot cards ................................................................................................50
Installation guidelines .............................................................................................50
Removing slot cards................................................................................................53
Connecting power to the MALC and grounding the chassis........................55
Reading the LEDs.....................................................................................................63
Replacing the air filter .............................................................................................65

Chapter 4 System cables and connectors .......................................................................67
Cabling guidelines....................................................................................................67
Connecting optical ATM trunking cables...........................................................68
Dressing DSL and POTS cables ...........................................................................68
Securing amphenol connectors ...........................................................................72
Cable descriptions ...................................................................................................73
Alarm cable and contacts guidelines..................................................................75
Uplink card pinouts..................................................................................................77
Serial (craft) port pinouts ........................................................................................78
Ethernet port pinouts...............................................................................................78
Fiber optic maintenance and handling ...............................................................79
Laser radiation ........................................................................................................79
Handling optical fibers............................................................................................80
Selecting cleaning materials ...................................................................................81
Chapter 5 Managing the MALC .............................................................................................83

Logging into the serial (craft) port.......................................................................83
Configuring a management interface..................................................................84
Uplink card 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface.........................................................84
ATM management connection................................................................................86
Managing the MALC with ZMS.............................................................................88
Chapter 6 Gigabit Ethernet card (UPLINK-2-GE) ...........................................................91

Overview .....................................................................................................................92
GigE-2 Uplink card configuration.........................................................................94
Small form factor pluggables ................................................................................99
Chapter 7 T1/E1 Uplink card (Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8) ..............................................103

Overview ...................................................................................................................103
T1/E1 ATM/IP card configuration........................................................................105
Configuring DS1/E1 interfaces............................................................................107
Configuring IMA groups .......................................................................................112
Overview...............................................................................................................115
Configuring IMA groups ......................................................................................116
T1/E1 IMA cable and port pinouts ......................................................................117
T1/E1-IMA Uplink port pinouts ...........................................................................117
8-port T1/E1 to dual 50 pin connector cable (T1/E1-IMA-8 Uplink) ..................118
Dual 8-port T1/E1 to dual 50 pin connector cable (T1/E1-IMA-8 Uplink) .........120

Contents
Chapter 8 DS3/E3 Uplink card (Uplink-DS3/E3-ATM/IP) ...........................................125

Overview ...................................................................................................................126
DS3/E3 card configuration ...................................................................................128
DS3/E3 Uplink cable...............................................................................................133
Chapter 9 OC-3C/STM1 Uplink Card (Uplink-OC3C/STM1-ATM/IP) .....................135

Overview ...................................................................................................................136
OC3C/STM1 Uplink card configuration.............................................................138
Configuring OC-3c/STM1 interfaces..................................................................139
APS.............................................................................................................................143
Chapter 10 OC-12c/STM4/GigE cards .................................................................................147

Overview ...................................................................................................................148
OC-12c/STM4/GigE Uplink card configuration ...............................................151
Configuring OC-12c/STM4 interfaces................................................................155
Configuring Ethernet interfaces .........................................................................158
APS.............................................................................................................................163
T1/E1 TDM cables ...................................................................................................166
Redundant T1/E1 TDM cable (OC12/STM4/GE Uplink card)............................166
Non-redundant T1/E1 TDM cable (OC12/STM4/GE Uplink card) .....................169
Chapter 11 TDM/ATM Uplink card (Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP) ..............................173

Overview ...................................................................................................................174
T1/E1 TDM Uplink card configuration ...............................................................176
Overview...............................................................................................................185
T1/E1-ATM/TDM cables .........................................................................................187
Redundant TDM/ATM Uplink cable....................................................................187
Non-redundant TDM/ATM Uplink cable.............................................................190
Chapter 12 System Configuration ........................................................................................193

Adding redundant Uplink cards..........................................................................193
Dual, non-redundant Uplink cards.....................................................................200
Managing the MALC over a non-redundant Uplink.............................................204
System clocking......................................................................................................204

Overview...............................................................................................................204
Chapter 13 ADSL cards ............................................................................................................213

Overview ...................................................................................................................213
Transmission modes..............................................................................................214
G.lite ...............................................................................................................214
Full rate ..........................................................................................................214
G.dmt..............................................................................................................214
Rate adaption ........................................................................................................215
Training.................................................................................................................215
24-port single-slot ADSL card (ADSL-24) ..........................................................216
24-port ADSL+POTS card (ADSL+POTS-24-2S) ..............................................217
32-port ADSL card (ADSL-32A) .........................................................................219
32-port ADSL+POTS card (ADSL+POTS-32A-2S) ...........................................221
32-port ADSL+Splitter card (ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-2S) ..........................223
32-port ADSL+Splitter-UK card (ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S) ............225
48-port ADSL cards (ADSL-48) ..........................................................................226
48-port ADSL card with splitter (ADSL + SPLTR-48A-2S) ...............................228
48 port ADSL+POTS (ADSL+POTS-TDM/PKT-48-2S and AD-
SL+POTS-TDM-48-2S) ................................................................................230
Activating ADSL cards ..........................................................................................232
Configuring ADSL interfaces ..............................................................................239
Overview...............................................................................................................239
Configuring ADSL S=1/2 .....................................................................................248
Overview ........................................................................................................249
Configuring ADSL 2 and ADSL 2+ .....................................................................252
Configuring POTS ports .......................................................................................257
ADSL cable and port pinouts ..............................................................................261
ADSL card port pinouts ........................................................................................261
ADSL 24 port card pinouts ............................................................................261
ADSL 32 port card pinouts ............................................................................262
ADSL 48 card pinouts....................................................................................264
ADSL cable pinouts..............................................................................................267
ADSL-32 to dual-50-pin cable pinouts ..........................................................267
ADSL-32 multi-connector cable pinouts .......................................................270
ADSL-48 to dual 50-pin connector cable ......................................................278
Chapter 14 SHDSL cards .........................................................................................................285

Overview ...................................................................................................................285
24-port SHDSL card (G.SHDSL-24)....................................................................286
SHDSL-24 card (SHDSL-24-LP) ..................................................................287
SHDSL 4-wire card (G.SHDSL-4W-12)..............................................................289
Activating SHDSL cards .......................................................................................289
Configuring SDSL interfaces...............................................................................292
Automatic baud rate adaption and fixed rate settings...........................................292

Contents
Configuration restrictions .....................................................................................293

Configuring SHDSL interfaces............................................................................297
SHDSL pinouts ........................................................................................................303
SDHSL-LP connector ...........................................................................................303
SHDSL-LP IN connector......................................................................................304
G.SHDSL 4-Wire pinouts.....................................................................................306
SHDSL-24 pinouts................................................................................................307
Delivering power and data to a Raptor 100 SHDSL-LP ................................308
Chapter 15 POTS cards ............................................................................................................311

Overview ...................................................................................................................311
24-port POTS card (POTS-24 and POTS-900-24) ..............................................312
48-port POTS card (POTS-TDM-48 and POTS-TDM/PKT-48) .........................313
Configuring POTS cards.......................................................................................314
Configuring POTS ports .......................................................................................317
Chapter 16 Voice Gateway Card (VG-T1/E1-32-2S) ......................................................323

Overview ...................................................................................................................323
Adding a voice gateway card ..............................................................................325
Adding a redundant voice gateway card .........................................................326
Pinouts ......................................................................................................................327
Voice gateway non-redundant TDM cable ...........................................................328
Voice gateway redundant TDM cable............................................................333
Chapter 17 VDSL Card (VDSL-16) ........................................................................................339

Overview ...................................................................................................................339
Configuring VDSL interfaces...............................................................................342
VDSL-16 and VDSL-16+Splitter pinouts ...........................................................343
Chapter 18 T1/E1 ATM 32 card (T1/E1-ATM-32) .............................................................345

Overview ...................................................................................................................346
Overview...............................................................................................................357
T1/E1 32 port TDM cable.......................................................................................359

Chapter 19 T1/E1 CES 12-port card .....................................................................................365
Overview ...................................................................................................................365
CES card configuration.........................................................................................366
Pinouts ......................................................................................................................368
Chapter 20 Universal Line Card (ULC-ISDN-12) .............................................................371

Overview ...................................................................................................................372
Viewing ULC card configuration profiles.........................................................375
ULC card pinouts....................................................................................................376
Chapter 21 PON Card (PON-OLT) .........................................................................................379

Overview ...................................................................................................................379
Configuring a PON interface................................................................................382
Chapter 22 Metallic Test Access card (MTAC/RING, MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk and

MTAC-FC) 387
Overview ...................................................................................................................388
Ringing generator..................................................................................................389
External test access ...............................................................................................389
Connecting the MTAC/Ring card........................................................................393
Testing a line............................................................................................................393
Connecting external alarms.................................................................................395
Connecting an external clock .............................................................................395
Connecting an external ring source ..................................................................396
MTAC/Ring and MTAC-FC card pinouts...........................................................398
External ring generator .........................................................................................398
External alarm pinouts ..........................................................................................399
External test access ...............................................................................................401
External test control ..............................................................................................401
External clock pinouts (MTAC/Ring card)...........................................................401
External clock pinouts (MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk card).........................................402
Index ....................................................................................................................................................403

Contents

ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide is intended for use by installation technicians, system

administrators, network administrators. It explains how to install the MALC
chassis and cards and how to provision the physical interfaces. For
information on configuring voice, data, and video services on the MALC,
refer to the MALC Configuration Guide.
What’s new in this release

The following information is new in this release:
• Packet voice support on page 29 describes the cards supported in VOIP
applications.
• T1/E1 Uplink card (Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8) on page 103 describes the
GigaBit Ethernet card hardware and explains how to install it.
• ADSL cards on page 213 describes the following new ADSL cards:
– ADSL 48 port card with Splitter (ADSL + SPLTR-48A-2S)
– ADSL 48 port card with TDM POTS support
(ADSL+POTS-TDM-48-2S)
– ADSL 48 port card with TDM POTS and packet voice support
(ADSL+POTS-TDM/PKT-48-2S)
• ADSL cards on page 213 describes the 48-port ADSL+POTS cards
explains how to install them.
• POTS cards on page 311 describes the 48-port POTS cards explains how
to install them.
• Voice Gateway Card (VG-T1/E1-32-2S) on page 323 describes the Voice
Gateway card hardware and explains how to install it.
Style and notation conventions

The following conventions are used in this document to alert users to
information that is instructional, warns of potential damage to system

About This Guide
equipment or data, and warns of potential injury or death. Carefully read and
follow the instructions included in this document.
Caution: A caution alerts users to conditions or actions that could

damage equipment or data.
Note: A note provides important supplemental or amplified

information.
Tip: A tip provides additional information that enables users to more

readily complete their tasks.
WARNING! A warning alerts users to conditions or actions that

could lead to injury or death.
WARNING! A warning with this icon alerts users to conditions or

actions that could lead to injury caused by a laser.
Typographical conventions
The following typographical styles are used in this guide to represent specific
types of information.
Bold Used for names of buttons, dialog boxes, icons, menus,

profiles when placed in body text, and property pages (or
sheets). Also used for commands, options, parameters in
body text, and user input in body text.
Fixed Used in code examples for computer output, file names, path
names, and the contents of online files or directories.
Fixed Bold Used in code examples for text typed by users.
Fixed Bold Used in code examples for variable text typed by users.
Italic
Italic Used for book titles, chapter titles, file path names, notes in
body text requiring special attention, section titles,
emphasized terms, and variables.
PLAIN UPPER Used for environment variables.
CASE
Related documentation
Refer to the following publication for additional information:
MALC Configuration Guide—explains how to configure voice, data, and
video services on the MALC.

Acronyms
Zhone CLI Reference Guide—explains how to use the Zhone command line
interface (CLI) and describes the system commands and parameters.
Refer to the release notes for software installation information and for
changes in features and functionality of the product (if any).
Acronyms
The following acronyms are related to Zhone products and may appear
throughout this manual:
Table 1: Acronyms and their descriptions
Acronym Description
ADSL Asymmetrical digital subscriber line
ARP Address resolution protocol
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BAN Broadband Access Node
CID Channel identifier
DSL Digital subscriber line
SHDSL Symmetric high-bit-rate digital subscriber line
IAD Integrated access device
MALC Multi-access line concentrator
MIB Management information bases
MTAC Metallic Test Access Card

MTAC-FC Metallic Test Access Card with fan controller
PBX Private branch exchange
POTS Plain old telephone service
RIP Routing Information Protocol
SDSL Symmetric digital subscriber line
SHDSL Symmetric high-bit-rate digital subscriber line

SLMS Single Line Multi-Service
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
VCI Virtual channel identifier
VCL Virtual channel link

About This Guide
Table 1: Acronyms and their descriptions
Acronym Description
VPI Virtual path identifier

ZMS Zhone Management System
Contacting Global Service and Support

Contact Global Service and Support (GSS) if you have any questions about
this or other Zhone products. Before contacting GSS, make sure you have the
following information:
• Zhone product you are using
• System configuration
• Software version running on the system
• Description of the issue
Technical support
If you require assistance with the installation or operation of your product, or

if you want to return a product for repair under warranty, contact GSS. The
contact information is as follows:
E-mail support@zhone.com
Telephone (North America) 877-ZHONE20
Telephone (International) 510-777-7133
Internet www.zhone.com/support
If you purchased the product from an authorized dealer, distributor, Value

Added Reseller (VAR), or third party, contact that supplier for technical
assistance and warranty support.
Service requirements
If the product malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by the

manufacturer or a Zhone-authorized agent. It is the responsibility of users
requiring service to report the need for service to GSS.

1
MALC
This chapter provides an overview of the MALC. It includes the following

sections:
• Overview, page 15
• Hardware overview, page 16
• Features, page 20
Overview
The Multi-Access Line Concentrator (MALC) platform provides low-cost,
high-density subscriber access concentration in the Zhone Single Line
Multi-Service (SLMS) architecture.
The MALC is a next generation design that carries voice and data services
over Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), Time-division multiplexing
(TDM) uplinks, or Internet Protocol (IP) uplinks. The MALC uplinks are the
primary communication channel between subscribers and upstream
networking devices. The MALC aggregates local loop traffic from a variety
of media and sends it to an upstream device, such as ATM switch, PSTN
switch, or IP router.
The MALC can be deployed in Central Office environments, outdoor
cabinets, or controlled environmental vaults for remote terminal applications.
The MALC is intended for restricted access locations only.
The single uplink from the MALC enables network providers to provision all
classes of services in a single platform and leverage the existing copper
infrastructure going to the Digital Loop Carrier (DLC) locations.
MALC cards are divided into the following general types:
• Uplink cards provide ATM, TDM or IP uplinks
• Access cards provide customer interfaces such as Plain Old Telephone
Service (POTS) and Digital Subscriber Line (DSL).
• System services cards such as the Metallic Test Access (MTAC) cards
provide services to the MALC
The MALC supports the following types of uplinks:
• DS3/E3 UNI mode

MALC
• Ethernet
• GR-303 or V5.2
• OC-3c/STM1
• OC12/STM4
• T1/E1 Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA)
• T1/E1 User-Network Interface (UNI) mode
Figure 1 shows the different types of network configurations supported by the
MALC.
Figure 1: MALC configurations
ATM Uplink
(All Uplink cards) ATM
AAL2/AAL5
POTS PSTN
GR-303 or V5.2 TDM Uplink
(TDM Uplink card)
Hardware overview
This sections describes the MALC hardware, including:
• Chassis on page 16
• MALC Uplink cards on page 18
• MALC slot cards on page 18
• MALC buses on page 19
Chassis
There are three types of MALC chassis:

• a 23-inch wide, 7U high unit containing 21 slots (MALC 723)
• a 19-inch wide 7U high unit contains 17 slots (MALC 719)
• a 19-inch wide 3U high unit contains 10 slots (MALC 319)

Hardware overview
MALC 17- and 21-slot chassis

The 17-slot unit and the 21-slot unit are functionally equivalent, the only
difference is the number of slots supported.
The far left slot (slot 1) is for Uplink cards only. Any other type of card can be
installed in slots 2 through 21. Cables and connectors are accessed from the
front of the chassis. Power is supplied by dual –48V DC input power. At the
top of the unit is a removable fan tray. Airflow through the unit is from front
bottom to top rear. The chassis is Network Equipment Building System
(NEBS) level 3-compliant. (See Figure 2).
The Uplink cards, the primary control and management functions for the
system, can be installed in a redundant pair to provide card-level redundancy.
Figure 2: MALC 21-slot chassis
MALC 319 chassis

The MALC 319 supports all the same slot cards as the MALC with the
exception of the MTAC-FC card. The MTAC-FC card is only supported in the
MALC 319 and each MALC 319 must contain an MTAC-FC card.
The following guidelines must be observed when installing slot cards into the
MALC 319 chassis:
• The top left slot (slot 1) is reserved for Uplink cards. Uplink cards can
only be installed in one of these slots.
• The MTAC-FC card must be installed in the bottom right slot (slot 10).
• Any other type of card can be installed in slots 2 through 9.
Cables and connectors (except for power cables) are accessed from the front
of the chassis. Power cables enter the device at the lower right rear of the unit.
Power is supplied by dual –48V DC input power. Airflow through the unit is
from left to right. The chassis is Network Equipment Building System
(NEBS) level 3-compliant. (See Figure 3).

MALC
Figure 3: MALC 319 chassis
MALC Uplink cards
Note: Only one type of Uplink interface can be active in the system
at a time.
The MALC supports the following Uplink cards:

• Uplink-2-GE
• Uplink-DS3/E3-ATM/IP
• Uplink-OC3C/STM1-ATM/IP
• Uplink-O12/S4/GE/TDM-ATM/IP
• High peformance OC12/STM-4 card with single GigE LX port
• High peformance OC12/STM-4 card with single GigE SX port
• Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/IP
• Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP
MALC slot cards
The MALC supports the following slot cards:

• ADSL-24 (single-slot, 24-port ADSL card)
• ADSL+POTS-24-2S (2-slot, 24-port ADSL card with POTS)
• ADSL-32A (single-slot, 32-port ADSL card)
• ADSL+POTS-32A-2S (2-slot, 32-port ADSL card with POTS)
• ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-2S (2-slot, 32-port ADSL card with splitter)
• ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S (2-slot, 32-port ADSL card with
splitter that complies with UK standards)
• ADSL-48A (single-slot, 48-port ADSL Annex A card)
• ADSL-48B (single-slot, 48-port ADSL Annex B card)

Hardware overview
• ADSL+SPLTR-48A-2S (single-slot, 48-port ADSL Annex A card with

splitters)
• ADSL+POTS-TDM-48-2S (2-slot, 48-port ADSL card with TDM POTS
support)
• ADSL+POTS-TDM/PKT-48-2S (2-slot, 48-port ADSL card with TDM
POTS and packet voice support)
• G.SHDSL-24 (24-port G.SHDSL card)
• G.SHDSL-4W-12 (12-port G.SHDSL 4-wire card)
• MTAC/RING (Metallic Test Access card with ringing generator)
• MTAC/RING-2Mhz-Clk (Metallic Test Access card with ringing
generator and 2.048 clock reference port)
• MTAC-FC (Metallic Test Access card with fan controller and ringing
generator). Supported on the MALC 319 only.
• PON-OLT (Passive optical networking card)
• POTS-24 (24-port POTS only card)
• POTS-900-24 (24-port 900 ohm POTS card)
• POTS-TDM-48 (48-port POTS card with TDM POTS support)
• POTS-TDM/PKT-48 (48-port POTS card with TDM POTS and packet
voice support)
• SHDSL-24-LP (24 port SHDSL card with line power capabilities for
Raptor 100 devices)
• T1/E1-ATM-32 (32 port T1/E1 card)
• T1/E1-CES-12 (12 port T1/E1 Circuit Emulation Service card)
• ULC-ISDN-12 (Universal Line Card)
• VDSL-16 (16 port VDSL card)
• VG-T1/E1 (2-slot voice gateway card with 4, 8, 16, or 32 ports)
MALC buses
The MALC chassis contains the following buses.

• Control bus
• Supervisory bus
• Metallic test access bus
• Ring voltage bus
• TDM bus

MALC
Control bus
This bus is used for program loading and high-level message transfer between
MALC cards.
Supervisory bus
This bus is used by the active Uplink cards for low-level control and
monitoring of the other cards.
Metallic test access bus

The metallic test access bus is used by the MTAC card to gain access to cards
and the buses in the system.
Ring voltage bus

The ring voltage bus provides ringing voltage to the cards, such as the POTS
card, that require it. The MTAC card generates the ringing voltage and
controls access to the ring voltage bus.
TDM bus
The TDM bus is used by the POTS cards to send pulse code modulation
(PCM)-encoded voice traffic to the Uplink card. The Uplink card performs
the TDM-to-ATM conversion to send the TDM data to the ATM network.
Each TDM channel on the bus is assigned to a fixed channel on a POTS card.
Features
This section describes some key features of the MALC, including:
• ATM on page 21
• ATM-to-TDM interworking on page 22
• T1/E1 circuit emulation on page 22
• IP and data services on page 23
• GR-303 and V5.2 on page 24
• POTS voice on page 26
• VoIP on page 27
• Voice gateway on page 28
• Packet voice support on page 29
• Redundancy on page 31
• Management on page 33

Features
ATM
The MALC provides the following ATM support:

• AAL2 termination and Broadband Loop Emulation Service (BLES)
signaling for all POTS cards, provided by the Uplink card.
• ATM cell relay functions between an ATM switch and ATM-based IADs.
The MALC provides the Customer Premises Interworking Function
(CP-IWF) functions of the AAL2 BLES specification.
• Unspecified bit rate (UBR), real-time variable bit rate-(rt-VBR), non
real-time variable bit rate (nrt-VBR), and constant bit rate (CBR) traffic.
• Connection admission control (CAC) and provisioning of
oversubscription factors on a per port and per service category basis. The
CAC functions on the Uplink card will not accept new connections if they
exceed the remaining virtual bandwidth.
• Policing to enforce the service contracts specified in the ATM traffic
descriptors.
• ATM User-Network Interface (UNI) 3.0 and 3.1, and portions of 4.0
• IMA functions to concentrate ATM traffic from up to T1/E1 lines on the
Uplink card or T1/E1 32 card to an ATM switch. The MALC supports
multiple IMA groups, depending on the type of card installed in the
system.
• Administrative Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) for management and
control.
AAL2-BLES signaling
AAL2 is specified in ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union)
recommendations I.363.2, I.366.1, and I.366.2. AAL2 is designed to support
voice applications using higher layer requirements such as voice compression,
silence detection/suppression, and idle channel removal. AAL2 uses four
bytes of the forty-eight byte ATM payload, leaving forty-four bytes for data.
Broadband Loop Emulation Service (BLES) is a DSL forum specification
(DSL Forum TR-039 Annex A) that enables ATM-based IADs to offer
Class 5 calling features and high-speed data services over a single DSL
connection.
BLES provides management signaling for POTS interfaces using inband
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS).
IMA
The T1/E1 Uplink card and the T1/E1 32 port card provides T1/E1 IMA
support for inverse-multiplexing multiple ATM cells from a number of links
into a single large, virtual connection. The MALC supports IMA version 1.1,
including support for fallback to version 1.0.

MALC
ATM cell relay

In a cell relay application, the MALC switches ATM cells from the uplink
interface to the subscriber-side DSL interface, and vice-versa. On the network
side, the Uplink card connects to upstream ATM devices. On the
subscriber-side, it connects to a standards-based IAD or modem. The MALC
supports both VP and VC switching.
Management PVC
The Uplink card provides an ATM PVC interface for in-band management of
the MALC. This PVC is terminated on the Uplink card and can be used to
route management traffic over the Uplink card’s Ethernet port. This enables
the MALC to provide a management interface other devices in the same
location that have an Ethernet interface.
ATM-to-TDM interworking
The MALC provides an interface between TDM-based networks and ATM

networks. It supports standard POTS interfaces on the subscriber side to
provide traditional voice services. Ring voltage for the line is provided by the
MALC ring voltage bus.
On the network side, The Uplink card performs AAL2 Segmentation and
Reassembly (SAR) and terminates the AAL2 LES traffic destined for the
POTS cards. The Uplink card then encodes the voice traffic in G.711, and puts
it on the appropriate timeslot on the TDM bus to send it to the subscriber port.
Each POTS channel is uniquely addressed by a shelf-slot-port and has an
associated AAL2 LES channel identifier (CID).
The MALC can also concentrate voice traffic and send it over an uplink
interface to a voice gateway such as a Zhone Sechtor 100ATM.
T1/E1 circuit emulation
Circuit Emulation Service (CES) allows T1/E1 circuits to be transparently

extended across an ATM network. CES is based on the ATM Forum standard
AF VTOA 0078.0000. Using constant bit rate (CBR) ATM permanent virtual
circuits (PVCs), CES allows communication between non-ATM CBR circuits
(such as T1, E1, E3, and T3) and ATM UNI interfaces.
There two types of CES: structured and unstructured. In unstructured
emulation (also known as clear channel emulation) the entire services
bandwidth is emulated and reproduced at the target port. Structured emulation
service (also called channelized emulation) emulates a point-to-point
fractional T1/E1 (less than a full T1/E1 line) connections. The frame structure
is maintained. Individual streams are visible and are byte aligned. This allows
the T1/E1 trunks using the structured emulation service to break into multiple
DS-0 channels towards different destinations.

Features
IP and data services
The MALC provides an access and aggregation routing functions to connect

subscribers to the Internet or other large networks. The following MALC
interfaces support IP traffic:
• One Ethernet interface on the Uplink card for management or data traffic.
• High speed IP Uplink interfaces on the Uplink cards. These include T1/
E1, DS3/E3, Gigabit Ethernet, OC-3c/STM1, and OC-12c/STM4
interfaces. The ATM/IP Uplink card terminates the IP traffic and routes it
to its destination. Note that the Uplink card must be an ATM/IP card in
order for it to support IP services. Contact your Zhone sales
representative or GSS for further information.
• DSL or T1/E1 subscriber interfaces. IP on subscriber interfaces runs over
ATM PVCs using RFC 1483 encapsulation.
After terminating the ATM traffic, the MALC routes the IP traffic over its
Ethernet interface to provide a connection to an IP network.
The MALC provides the following key data services:
• IP forwarding and routing—incoming packets from an interface are
forwarded to the appropriate output interface using the routing table rules.
• Routed or bridged encapsulation.
• Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) video. IGMP is used by IP
hosts to register dynamic multicast group membership. For example, all
members of one multicast group would view the same of video content.
• DHCP servers to simplify user IP address configuration.
• IP filtering. IP filtering is typically performed to enhance network
security by limiting access between two networks.
• Numbered or unnumbered interfaces.
• VLAN bridging.
The MALC hardware supports the following standards:
• Multicast (IGMPv1 / v2)
• RIP v1 (RFC 1058) RIPv2 (RFC 2453)
• RFC 1483/2684 encapsulation (Bridged and routed)
• DHCP server (RFC 2131, 2132)
• Bridging 802.1D support
• VLAN 802.1Q support

MALC
GR-303 and V5.2
The MALC TDM Uplink card supports GR-303 or V5.2 interfaces to a PSTN
switch. The MALC can connect ATM or POTS subscriber interfaces to the
PSTN.
GR-303 overview
GR-303 is a Bellcore-defined protocol that describes an Integrated Digital
Loop Carrier System (IDLC) that operates on DS1 (T1) circuits. The GR-303
specification describes T1 circuits exiting an Integrated Digital Terminal
(IDT) and going to remote digital terminal (RDT) equipment. Zhone products
that support GR-303 act as RDTs.
GR-303 allows concentration from 1:1 to 44:1, a timeslot management
channel (TMC) data link that uses messages for call setup and tear down, the
use of signaling bits to indicate call control, and a separate embedded
operations channel (EOC) data link.
The GR-303 specification also provides for redundancy on the circuits that
carry the data links. The primary and secondary T1 circuits each carry the
TMC and EOC for redundancy.
Figure 4 shows how T1 (DS1) circuits leaving the local switch toward the
MALC are grouped into an interface group (IG). The primary DS1 channel
carries the first TMC on DS0 24 and the first EOC on DS0 12. The secondary
DS1 is a mirror image of the first, carrying the secondary TMC and EOC
channels.

Features
Figure 4: GR-303 circuits, channels, and CRVs
GR-303 IG
Primary DS1
Must be first DS1
TMC #1 on channel/DS0 24
EOC #1 on channel/DS0 12
IDT
Integrated Digital 2048
Terminal
Call Reference IAD
Values
LDS
Local Digital CRV
Switch
Secondary
DS1
Can be any other DS1

TMC #2 on channel/DS0 24
EOC #2 on channel/DS0 12
ISDN overview
ISDN BRI service provides a 144kbps line rate divided between two 64kbps
B (or bearer) channels, which can carry voice calls or high-speed data, and
one 16kbps D (or data) channel, which carries call-setup information and
signaling. ISDN BRI is often called 2B+D because of its three duplex
channels. ISDN networks include terminal equipment (TE) such as phones
and faxes; network terminators (NT), such as routers and IADS at the
customer premises, which connect the four-wire subscriber wiring to the
conventional two-wire local loop; terminal adapters (TA), which allow
non-ISDN devices to access the ISDN network; and line termination (LT)
equipment, which terminates the ISDN line at the local switch.
An NT1, or Network Termination-1, is required to connect ISDN terminal
equipment to an ISDN line. The NT1 connects to customers’ phones with a
two-wire line. This two-wire interface is referred to as the U interface or U
reference point, and is accessible via a modular RJ-11or miniature 8-position
(ISO 8877) jack. The connection point between the NT1 and terminal
equipment is the S/T interface, which defines a four-wire line with separate
transmit and receive pairs (and additional pairs for powering when required).
The S/T interface is accessible through ISO 8877 jacks on the NT1 and
terminal equipment.
V5.2 overview
The MALC supports the V5.2 European Telecommunications Standards
Institute (ETSI) standards G.965 and ETSI EN 300 347-1 V2.2.2. These

MALC
specify a set of electrical, physical, procedural, and protocol requirements for

connecting an Access Node (AN) to a Local Exchange (LE). In this context
the MALC acts as an AN.
The MALC system uses V5.2 for analog telephone (POTS) access and ISDN
basic rate (BRI) access.
V5.2 services are supported by combinations of 64 Kbps V5 bearer channels,
communication, and control protocols.
Each 2.048 Mbps E1 interface uses 32 timeslots. Timeslot 0 (zero) is used for
frame alignment. Timeslot 16 of the first E1 link is used by the V5.2 control
protocol.
C-paths (communications paths) are carried over C-channels
(communications channels). C-channels are used to carry signaling traffic. A
V5.2 interface may contain up to 44 C-channels. C-channels are restricted to
timeslots 15, 16, and 31 in accordance with the ETSI specification.
Figure 5 illustrates the relationship between links, C-channels, and C-paths.
Figure 5: V5.2 links, C-channels, and C-paths
POTS voice
The MALC supports standard POTS and ISDN interfaces to provide

traditional voice services. Ring voltage for the line is provided by the MALC
ring voltage bus. The POTS cards support dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF)
dialing only. Pulse dialing is not supported.
To support POTS functionality in the MALC chassis, an ATM voice gateway,
is required in order for the MALC to connect to a Class 5 switch.

Features
VoIP
Voice over IP, also known as Internet Telephony, supports full duplex
transmission of voice traffic over IP networks. The MALC supports Media
gateway control protocol (MGCP) and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP).
MGCP overview
Media gateway control protocol (MGCP) provides the means to interconnect
a large number of IP telephony gateways. MGCP assumes that a call agent
(CA) performs the intelligence of all call-control operations and that a media
gateway (MG) carries out all media processing and conversion.
MGCP provides an internetworking control system to control telephony
gateways from external call control elements are referred to as call agents. A
telephony gateway is a network element that provides conversion between the
audio signals carried on telephone circuits and data packets carried over the
Internet or over other packet networks.
MGCP assumes a call control architecture in which the call control
“intelligence” is outside the gateways and handled by external call control
elements. The MGCP assumes that these call control elements, or Call
Agents, will synchronize with each other to send coherent commands to the
gateways under their control. MGCP does not define a mechanism for
synchronizing Call Agents. MGCP is, in essence, a master/slave protocol,
where the gateways are expected to execute commands sent by the Call
Agents.
MGCP assumes a connection model constructed of endpoints and
connections. Endpoints are sources or sinks of data and could be physical or
virtual.
Examples of physical endpoints are:
• An interface on a gateway that terminates a trunk connected to PSTN
switch (for example, a Class 5 or Class 4 switch). A gateway that
terminates trunks is called a trunk gateway.
• An interface on a gateway that terminates an analog POTS connection to
a phone, key system, PBX, etc. A gateway that terminates residential
POTS lines (to phones) is called a residential gateway.
• An example of a virtual endpoint is an audio source in an audio-content
(media) server.
Creation of physical endpoints requires hardware installation, while creation
of virtual endpoints can be done in software.
Connections may be either point-to-point or multipoint. A point-to-point
connection is an association between two endpoints with the purpose of
transmitting data between these endpoints. Once this association is
established for both endpoints, data transfer between these endpoints can take
place.

MALC
SIP overview
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) is a signaling protocol that provides a
mechanism for:
• call establishment
• call teardown
• call control
• other supplementary services in an IP network.
There are two major architectural components within SIP: the SIP user agent
(UA) and the SIP network server. The UA is the end system component
responsible to initiate and answer calls. The SIP server is the network device
that handles the signaling associated with multiple calls.
The UA itself has a client element, the User Agent Client (UAC) and a server
element, the User Agent Server (UAS). The client element initiates the calls
and the server element answers the calls. This allows peer-to-peer calls to be
made using a client-server protocol.
The main function of the SIP server is to provide name resolution and user
location, since the caller is unlikely to know the IP address or host name of the
called party, and to pass on messages to other servers or SIP endpoints. Other
functions performed by the SIP servers are redirecting, forking, and
registration.
Together these components make up a basic SIP infrastructure. Application
servers can sit above these components delivering SIP supplementary services
to end users.
Voice gateway
The MALC voice gateway card (VG-T1/E1-32-2S) enables voice connections

from an ATM and IP voice network to a TDM local exchange switch using
GR-303 or V5.2 protocols.
The following connection types are supported.
• Voice over ATM:
– BLES to GR-303 or V5.2
– ELCP to V5.2
• Voice over IP: SIP-PLAR to GR-303 or V5.2

Features
Figure 6: Voice gateway overview
TDM
GR303
V5.2
Local Exchange
Switch
Packet MALC with
voice gateway
The MALC voice gateway card can also serve as an aggregation point for
multiple downstream MALC or IAD systems aggregating multiple services
(PON, SHDSL, T1/E1 ATM) or multiple voice lines on residential services
(ADSL, ADSL2+, VDSL) over a single uplink connection.
Figure 7: Voice gateway aggregation point
IAD
IP Network
MALC with Local Exchange

voice gateway Switch
Packet voice support
For VOIP applications, the MALC supports packetizing voice traffic on

POTS cards and sending it out the MALC voice gateway card. Table 2
describes VOIP support on the MALC POTS-capable cards.

MALC
Table 2: MALC POTS cards support
MALC egress Cards POTS TDM POTS TDM Traffic path

only cards and packet
cards
TDM Uplink UP-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP-16 TDM > TDM TDM > TDM Traffic from TDM bus
Trunk UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-LX/T-E1 out TDM interface on
uplink.
UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-SX/T-E1
UP-O12/S4/GE/TDM-ATM/IP
UPLINK-2-GE
VoATM UPLINK-DS3/E3-ATM/IP Supported Supported Traffic from card to
(AAL2) on UPLINK-OC3C/STM1-ATM/IP TDM bus to uplink
ATM Uplink then converted to
Trunk UP-O12/S4/GE/TDM-ATM/IP AAL2 on uplink out
UP-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP-16 ATM trunk on uplink.
UPLINK-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8
VoIP on UPLINK-DS3/E3-ATM/IP Not supported Supported Traffic from the line

Non-Network UPLINK-OC3C/STM1-ATM/IP card is packetized on
Processor the line card and routed
Based Uplinks UP-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP-16 to the uplink out an IP
UP-O12/S4/GE/TDM-ATM/IP port.
UPLINK-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8
VoIP on UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-LX/T-E1 Not supported Supported Traffic from the line

Network UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-SX/T-E1 card is packetized on
Processor the line card and routed
Based Uplinks UPLINK-2-GE to the uplink out an IP
port.
VoIP (SIP UPLINK-DS3/E3-ATM/IP Not supported Supported Traffic from the line
PLAR) to Voice UPLINK-OC3C/STM1-ATM/IP card is packetized on
Gateway Local the line card and routed
UP-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP-16 to the uplink then is
UPLINK-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8 routed back down the
UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-LX/T-E1 blackplane to a voice
gateway card.
UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-SX/T-E1
UPLINK-2-GE
VoATM UPLINK-DS3/E3-ATM/IP Not supported Supported Traffic from card to

(AAL2) to UPLINK-OC3C/STM1-ATM/IP TDM bus to uplink
Voice gateway then converted to
Local UP-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP-16 AAL2 on uplink then
UP-O12/S4/GE/TDM-ATM/IP cell switched back
UPLINK-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8 down the packet bus to
the voice gateway card.
The following POTS cards only support TDM:

• ADSL+POTS-24-2S

Features
• ADSL+POTS-32A-2S
• ADSL/POTS-24-2S
• POTS-24
• POTS-900-24
• ADSL+POTS-TDM-48-2S
• POTS-TDM-48
The following POTS cards support TDM and packet voice:
• ADSL+POTS-TDM/PKT-48-2S
• POTS-TDM/PKT-48
Redundancy
The MALC supports the following types of redundancy:

• Uplink card
• APS for the OC-3c/STM1 Uplink and OC-12c/S4/GE/TDM Uplink cards
Uplink card redundancy

The MALC supports Uplink and MTAC/Ring card redundancy. Cards in a
redundancy group share the same card-group-id. When you install a single
card that supports redundancy, the system assigns that card to a default
redundancy group.
To configure redundancy, assign a second card of the same type to the same
card group and optionally assign each a weight. Weights are used to specify a
preference for a particular card to become active. By default, all cards have
the same weight.
When the cards boot up, they elect an active and a standby card based on their
respective weights. If the weights are equal, the card in the lower numbered
slot becomes active.
If an active card fails, the standby takes over and becomes active. Note that
redundancy is non-revertive. That is, a previously active card does not
become active when it starts up again.
When the standby card comes up, the active card copies over the
configuration database, routing tables, and software binaries to the standby
card. As configuration changes are made to the active card, the standby card is
automatically updated.
APS
The OC-3c/STM1 and OC-12c/S4/GE/TDM cards provide Automatic
Protection Switch (APS) on their ports. APS allows the primary card to be
backed up by the second card, and hence reduces the risk of loss of data due to

MALC
cable cuts, degradation of signal, and card failure. APS also allows the far-end
equipment to request for switch-over via the use of APS command.
The OC-3c/STM1 card supports APS 1:1 protection. The OC-12c/STM4 card
supports both APS 1:1 protection and APS 1+1 protection.
In the 1:1 protection scheme, a working channel on one card carries the full
traffic, while a protect channel on another card is either idle or reserved for
low priority traffic. When a failure occurs on the working fiber, the
destination switch moves the data from the working fiber to the protect fiber.
In the 1+1 protection scheme, a working card transmits the same data in one
direction on the working channel while a protect card simultaneously
transmits the same data in the opposite direction on the protect channel. When
both transmissions reach the destination switch, the data on the protection
channel is ignored. When a failure occurs on the working channel, the
destination switch uses the transmission from the protect channel.
MALC-OC-3c/STM1 and OC-12c/STM4 card supports the following APS
features:
• Failures such as LOS, LOF, AIS-L, and hardware failure.
• APS 1:1 configuration, with far-end configured as 1+1 or 1:1. OC-12c/
STM4 APS 1+1 configuration.
• Linear APS mode.
• Uni-directional and bidirectional with non-revertive mode.
Note: Two Uplink cards are required for APS.
Overview of SONET/SDH APS

Due to the high speed nature of SONET/SDH, APS is designed as a high
speed switching protocol to minimize the risk of out of service in the event of
hardware failure or a cable cut. APS uses the SONET/SDH K1K2 byte to
signal between the local and far-end equipment. Only the protection line
exchanges the K1K2 byte between the local and far-end equipment.
To ensure interoperability with other vendor’s equipment, the MALC APS
implementation conforms to the Bellcore GR-253-CORE and ITU-T G.783
specifications.
SONET/SDH APS supports the following modes:
• Linear APS: Linear mode supports both APS 1:1 and 1+1 architecture.
The architecture must be consistent between local and far-end equipment.
Otherwise, an architecture mismatch will occur.
• Bi-directional mode: APS bi-directional mode allows negotiation
between local and far-end equipment. The action performs by APS is
based on event priority and acknowledgement from far-end.

Features
• Uni-directional mode: APS uni-directional mode allows fast switching by

eliminating the acknowledgement from far-end.
• Non-revertive modes: Only a manual switch-over or a fail-over will cause
traffic to switch from one port to another. Switching does not take place
based on restoring of the working port.
Working card and protection card

The MALC defines the Uplink card in slot 1 as the working card, and the
Uplink card in slot 2 as the protection card. The working card always has the
APS working ports. The protection card always has the APS protection ports.
The exchange of K1K2 byte takes place only on the protection card.
SONET/SDH APS + card redundancy

In APS + card redundancy, a line failure will cause the whole card to fail-over
to another card. However, switching will not take place on the standby card.
The following features are supported by APS + card redundancy:
• Switching on loss of transmit/receive line (LOS, LOF, AIS-L)
• Switching on hot-swap card removal
• Switching on far-end APS command
• Switching on hardware failure
Management
The MALC has two primary management interfaces: an ATM Virtual Channel
(VC) which carries only Simple Network Management (SNMP) traffic, and a
1483-routed IP connection. Both connections are terminated on the Uplink
card.
After establishing a connection to the MALC, administrators can manage the
device using the Command Line Interface (CLI), SNMP, or the ZMS.
The Uplink card also contains a serial (craft) session for local management.

MALC

2
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION
This chapter describes how to prepare your site for the installation of the
MALC. It includes the following topics:
• General safety precautions, page 35
• Tools you need, page 37
• Selecting the system location, page 38
• Installation precautions, page 38
• Environmental specifications, page 39
• Power requirements and specifications, page 41
• Cabling rules, page 41
• Power specifications, page 42
• Grounding and isolation, page 42
• Compliance and certifications, page 43
General safety precautions

The equipment is designed and manufactured in compliance with the
following safety standards: UL 60950, EN 60950, IEC 60950, ACA TS001.
However, the following additional precautions should be observed to ensure
personal safety during installation or service, and to prevent damage to the
equipment or equipment to which it is connected.
Safety
The precautions to take before installing or servicing the product are as

follows:
WARNING!
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to
manufacturer’s instructions.

Preparing for installation
WARNING! Do not stare into the optical interface laser beam or

view it directly with optical instruments.
Caution: Current limiting protectors

The MALC is intended to be protected by 3-mil carbon blocks and
current limiting protectors with a continuous carry current rating of
350 milliamperes. The current limiting protectors must be applied on
the equipment side of the voltage limiting protector.
• Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the
product or included in this guide.
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install this product in a wet location.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are
specifically designed for this purpose only.
• Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has first been disconnected at the network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
• Never attempt to service this product unless you are an authorized service
technician. Doing so can expose you to dangerous high-voltage points or
other risks and may result in injury or damage to the unit and void all
warranties.
• The MALC system chassis requires a dedicated ground connection to the
building ground. If more than one MALC chassis is to be installed on a
rack, each one requires its own direct connection to the building ground.
• Slots and openings in the product are provided for ventilation. To ensure
reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these
slots and openings must not be blocked or covered.
• DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the
product where anyone could step or walk on the power cord.
• Special cables, which may be required by the regulatory inspection
authority for the installation site, are the responsibility of the buyer.
• When installed in the final configuration, the product must comply with
the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the
country in which it is installed. If necessary, consult with the appropriate
regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance.
• A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth
grounds of two or more buildings. If products installed in separate
buildings are interconnected, the voltage potential may cause a hazardous
condition. Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether
or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary, implement corrective
action prior to interconnecting the product.

Tools you need
• Install the MALC in accordance with national and local electric codes to
meet central office requirements. Consult a qualified electrical consultant.
• Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the optical ports of the
MALC when no cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not stare into
open apertures.
Preventing electrostatic damage
The system slot cards are susceptible to electrostatic discharge (ESD). ESD
can cause component failure and degraded system performance. Take
adequate precautions to prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) with these
cards. Always wear a properly-grounded wrist strap or equivalent protection
when handling system cards.
Handle each card by its front panel or stiffener. Never touch the solder side,
connector pins, or components on a printed circuit card, and do not allow
cards to come into contact with one another.
To prevent damage to system cards when not in use, store and handle the
cards in their original antistatic bags. Keep the cards in their original packing
cartons to prevent damage caused by dust or dirt. Be sure to store the cards in
areas that are free from excessive humidity and temperatures.
Power supply safety information
Install an equipment grounding conductor not smaller in size than the

ungrounded branch-circuit supply conductors as part of the circuit that
supplies the product or system. Bare, covered, or insulated grounding
conductors are acceptable. Individually covered or insulated equipment
grounding conductors should have a continuous outer finish that is either
green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. Connect the
equipment-grounding conductor to ground at the service equipment.
Tools you need

The required equipment listed in Table 3 should be available before beginning
the installation of the MALC system.
Table 3: Equipment required to install the MALC system
Qty Equipment Details Use
1 Mounting shelf or rack, Powered as indicated in attached MALC chassis mounting

19 or 23 inch width as specifications.
required.
1 VT-100-compatible Connected to the MALC through RJ45 Commission and configuration

terminal or PC used as a craft port.
VT-100 terminal emulator

Table 3: Equipment required to install the MALC system
Qty Equipment Details Use
1 11/32-inch nutdriver For ground stud hex nuts. General installation

1 Pliers General installation
1 Cable prep tools Pressfit and crimpers Cable installation
- Cables System connections
2 #1 and #2 Phillips-head N/A Locking and unlocking cards,

and 1/8-inch flat-blade front panels and chassis
screwdrivers brackets
2 Antistatic wrist strap N/A Static electricity prevention
Selecting the system location

Ensure that the environment is free of dust and excessive moisture, not
exposed to the elements or temperature extremes, and has sufficient
ventilation.
Install the system in reasonable proximity to all equipment with which it will
connect. Ensure that proper cable grades are used for all system and network
connections. For best results, use the cables and connectors recommended in
this document.
Installation precautions
Avoid creating a hazardous condition by maintaining even weight distribution
within the chassis.
WARNING! Two people are required to lift the MALC 719 or

MALC 723 systems because they weigh too much for one person
to lift. Do not attempt to lift the system chassis without assistance
or personal injury can result.
Maximum operating temperature should not exceed 550C (1310F). The

temperature of the rack environment may be greater than ambient room
temperature when the system is installed in a closed or multiunit rack
assembly. Observe the maximum recommended operating temperature as
indicated here.
Do not block system air vents; this will deprive the system of the airflow
required for proper cooling. Sufficient clearance must exist on all sides of the
rack to permit equipment access.
Zhone recommends using cabling ducts for cable routing in rack mounts.

Environmental specifications
To facilitate proper cooling, cover unpopulated slots with a blank front panel.
All slots must have a card or a blank panel installed at all times for EMC,
safety and cooling requirements.
The system ships with mounting brackets. To avoid overloading the mounting
brackets, and damaging the system, do not use the MALC chassis to support
other equipment after it is mounted in the rack.
Connect the system to the power supply circuit as described in this document.
Do not overload the system or power supply circuit.
Ensure that proper system grounding is performed and maintained. Use power
supply connections for grounding instead of branch circuitry (such as power
strips).
Environmental specifications
Table 4 describes the MALC chassis environmental specifications.
Table 4: MALC chassis environmental specifications
Description Specification
Chassis dimensions MALC 723

23 in. (58.42 cm) wide by 12.25 in. (31.12 cm) high
(7U) by 11.625 in. (29.53 cm) deep.
MALC 719
(7U) by 11.625 in. (29.53 cm) deep.
MALC 319
(3U) by 11.30 in. (28.70 cm) deep.
Weight 80 lbs. (36.29 kg) fully loaded
Operating temperature -400C to +700C (-400F to +1580F).
Storage temperature –400C to +850C (–400F to +1850F)
Operating relative 5% to 95% noncondensing

humidity
Storage relative Up to 95% noncondensing

humidity
Altitude Operating altitude: Up to 4,000 m (13,123 ft.)
Airflow MALC 319: Left to right

MALC 719 and MALC 723: Bottom front to top rear.

Figure 8 on page 40 and Figure 9 on page 40 show the MALC chassis

dimensions.
Figure 8: MALC 19-inch chassis dimensions
Figure 9: MALC 23-inch chassis dimensions

Power requirements and specifications
Figure 10: MALC 319 chassis dimensions
Power requirements and specifications

Separate A and B power feeds allow two individual –48V DC power sources
to be connected to the MALC system. The Return (+) terminals are
common.For the 19- and 23-inch MALC chassis, the power wiring is
field-terminated inside the lower front of the chassis. The MALC 319 chassis
is provided with factory-terminated power cables.
Note: The installation site must include overcurrent protection, such

as fuses or circuit breakers, that will limit current at the A and B
power inputs.
Cabling rules
Following are power cabling rules applicable to the MALC system.

• Provide an appropriate disconnect device as part of the building
installation for systems such as the MALC that receive power from an
external, auxiliary, or emergency source. When power is routed from a
power distribution frame, the disconnect device can be used as a power
cutoff (for example, an ON/OFF switch or breaker).
• Connect all disconnect devices so that they disconnect all ungrounded
conductors of a DC power circuit when placed in the OFF position.
• All power cables must be rated VW-1 or higher.
• Use power cabling of 10 AWG for applications of 25 feet (7.62 m) or less
from the central power distribution bus.

Power specifications
Table 5 describes the MALC power specifications.
Table 5: MALC power supply specifications
Description Specification
Rated voltage -41.75V to -60.0V DC

Separate A/B power feeds for –48V DC protection
Rated power MALC: 1,200 watts, maximum

MALC 319: 700 watts, maximum
Rated current MALC: 28A maximum

MALC 319: 16A maximum
DC-input cable AWG 10 (5.27 mm2) maximum
Listed circuit breaker or MALC: 35 A maximum

fuse MALC 319: 20 A maximum
A listed circuit breaker or fuse must be installed from a
central DC power source and wired in accordance with
NEC, ANSI/NFPA 70 and Canadian electrical code,
Part 1, C22.1.
Chassis power consumption
Table 6 describes the power consumption of the MALC system components.
Table 6: MALC power consumption
Component Specification
19 inch chassis 110 W
23 inch chassis 132 W
MALC 319 chassis With an MTAC-FC card installed, the

chassis draws 31 watts maximum with no
ringing, 45 watts maximum at full
ringing load.
Grounding and isolation

The MALC system cards and subassemblies use an integrated frame and logic
ground system as follows:
• The MALC system chassis and logic ground are bonded.
• The two-wire power supply feed is not connected to the chassis.

Compliance and certifications
• Cable shielding is terminated on the MALC system chassis ground.
Compliance and certifications

Table 7: Compliance and certifications
NEBS Specification
Safety ACA TS001

AS/NZS 3260
CB Report
CSA 22.2 No. 950
EN 60950
IEC 60950
UL 60950
EMC emissions FCC Part 15 Class A

GR-1089-Core Level 3
CE EN55022A
EMC immunity GR-1089-Core Level 3

CE EN55024
CE EN 50082
Environmental GR-63-Core Level 3

ETS 300 019-2-x
ISTA Transportation and Handling
Network FCC Part 68

CTR-12
CTR-13
DOC CS-03
NTR-4
TSO-16


3
INSTALLING THE MALC
This chapter explains how to install the MALC hardware. It includes the
following sections:
• Unpacking the system, page 45
• Installing mounting brackets on the MALC, page 46
• Installing the chassis in a rack, page 47
• Wall mounting the MALC 319 chassis, page 49
• Installing slot cards, page 50
• Removing slot cards, page 53
• Connecting power to the MALC and grounding the chassis, page 55
• Reading the LEDs, page 63
• Replacing the air filter, page 65
Note: Before installing the MALC, read General safety precautions

on page 35 for important safety and power information.
Unpacking the system

Use the following procedure to unpack the MALC system components from
the shipping cartons.
• On system receipt, check the shipping cartons for physical damage.
• Unpack the shipping cartons, and check the contents for physical damage.
• If the equipment appears damaged, immediately contact the shipping
company to file a claim.
The shipping company representative will give instructions on how to submit
a claim, where to send the unit, and any special instructions that may be
required.
If you need to return the equipment, pack the equipment in its original
packing materials and send it by prepaid freight to the address given by the
claims representative. If the original packing materials are unavailable, ship
the equipment in a sturdy carton, wrapping it with shock-absorbing material.

Installing the MALC
Installing mounting brackets on the MALC

Note: Units are shipped with the rack ears installed and secured to
shipping pallet. When unpacking the unit, remove the bottom two
screws that secure the shipping bracket to the rack ears and replace
them with the correct rack ear screws from the accessory kit.
This section contains the following information:

• Installing the mounting brackets onto the MALC system chassis on
page 46
• Installing the mounting brackets onto the MALC 319 system chassis on
page 46
Installing the mounting brackets onto the MALC system

chassis
The MALC mounting brackets are designed for use in a 19-inch or 23-inch
rack. Use the following procedure to install the mounting brackets onto the
system chassis:
1 Carefully place the system chassis right side up and facing forward on a
clean, flat, sturdy work surface.
2 Align the bracket so that the rack mount flange is toward the front,
centered vertically on the chassis and the 4 screw holes in the chassis
align with the 4 screw holes in the bracket.
Note: Use an 8-32 flathead UNC x 0.25 screw when attaching

the brackets to the unit. Using the wrong screw type will result in
a poorly-secured system. These screws are provided in the
installation kit.
3 Secure the two brackets to both sides of the system chassis with the
screws provided in the installation kit. See Figure 11 on page 48.
Caution: To prevent damage to the system, use only the screws

provided in the installation kit.
Installing the mounting brackets onto the MALC 319 system

chassis
The MALC 319 mounting brackets are designed for use in a 19-inch rack.
Use the following procedure to install the mounting brackets onto the system
chassis:
1 Carefully place the system chassis right side up and facing forward on a
clean, flat, sturdy work surface.

Installing the chassis in a rack
2 Align the bracket so that the rack mount flange is toward the front,
centered vertically on the chassis and the 4 screw holes in the chassis
align with the 4 screw holes in the bracket.
Note: Use a 6-32 flathead UNC x 0.25 screw when attaching the
brackets to the unit. Using the wrong screw type will result in a
poorly-secured system. These screws are provided in the
installation kit.

Installing the chassis in a rack

• Mounting the MALC system chassis in a rack on page 47
• Mounting the MALC 319 system chassis in a rack on page 48
Mounting the MALC system chassis in a rack

The system chassis can be mounted in a 19-inch or 23-inch rack that is
connected to an earth ground.
WARNING! Two people are required to pick up the system

because it weighs too much for one person to lift. Do not attempt
to lift the system chassis without assistance or personal injury can
result.
Use the following procedure to mount the system chassis in a rack:

1 Choose a rack position for the system chassis.
2 Carefully lift the system chassis into the rack with the front of the system
facing outward.
3 Secure the system chassis to the mounting rack with the screws provided
in the installation kit.
Note: Use a 12-24 UNC x 0.5-inch screw when mounting the

system to the rack. Using the wrong screw type will result in a
installation kit.

Installing the MALC
Figure 11: Installing the MALC in a rack
Mounting the MALC 319 system chassis in a rack

The system chassis can be mounted in a 19-inch rack that is connected to an
earth ground. Use the following procedure to mount the system chassis in a
rack:
1 Choose a rack position for the system chassis.
2 Carefully lift the system chassis into the rack with the front of the system
facing outward.
3 Secure the system chassis to the mounting rack with the screws provided
in the installation kit.
Note: Use a 12-24 UNC x 0.5-inch screw when mounting the

system to the rack. Using the wrong screw type will result in a
installation kit.

Wall mounting the MALC 319 chassis
Figure 12: Installing the MALC 319 in a rack

WARNING! Two people are required to pick up the system
because it weighs too much for one person to lift. Do not attempt
to lift the system chassis without assistance or personal injury can
result.
Use the following procedure to wall mount the system chassis.

1 Choose a position for the system chassis.
2 Remove the rack ears from the front of the unit.
3 Align the bracket so that the rack mount flange is in the middle of the unit
and the 2 screw holes in the chassis align with the 2 screw holes in the
bracket nearest the flange.
Note: Use a 6-32 flathead UNC x 0.25 screw when attaching the
brackets to the unit. Using the wrong screw type will result in a
installation kit.

5 Orient the unit with the power cables facing up. See Figure 13

Installing the MALC
Figure 13: Wall mounting the MALC 319 chassis
6 Secure the system chassis to the wall with the screws provided in the
installation kit.
Installing slot cards

• Installation guidelines on page 50
• Installing a slot card in the MALC chassis on page 51
• Installing a slot card in the MALC 319 chassis on page 52
Installation guidelines
Observe the following rules when handling MALC slot cards:

• Handle each card by its front panel or stiffener. Never touch the solder
side, connector pins, or components on a printed circuit card, and do not
allow cards to come into contact with one another.
• To prevent damage to slot cards when not in use, store and handle the
cards in their original containers. Keep the cards in their original packing
cartons to prevent damage caused by dust or dirt. Be sure to store the
cards in areas that are free from excessive humidity and temperatures.

Installing slot cards
Caution: The MALC system slot cards are susceptible to

electrostatic discharge (ESD). ESD can cause component failure and
degraded system performance. Take adequate precautions to prevent
electrostatic discharge with these cards. Always wear a properly
grounded wrist strap, or equivalent protection, when handling system
cards.
Note: MALC and MALC 319 use the same slot cards with the
exception of the MTAC/Ring-FC card, which is only used in the
MALC 319.
Installing a slot card in the MALC chassis
Note: You must install the Uplink card in slot 1 or slot 2 (the 2
left-most slots).
1 Put on an antistatic wrist strap that touches the skin. Make sure it is
properly grounded to the ESD jack on the front of the unit.
2 Carefully remove the card from its antistatic packaging.
3 Visually inspect the card for damage. Check the label and part number on
the card to verify the type of card being installed is the type needed for the
particular application.
4 Holding the card by its faceplate, carefully insert the card into a slot. Hold
the bottom ejector open and slowly slide the card onto the backplane pins.
5 Close the bottom ejector to firmly seat the card.
Caution: To prevent damage to the backplane pins, do not force

cards onto the backplane pins when seating the cards. If you have
trouble seating a card, check that it is in the correct slot, pull the
card out, and try seating it again by pressing gently.
6 Slide the card lock down.

The card will not boot if the card lock is not in the down position.
7 Tighten the top and bottom screws to seat the card in the backplane.
Figure 14 illustrates installing slot cards.

Installing the MALC
Figure 14: Installing slot cards in the MALC
Installing a slot card in the MALC 319 chassis
Note: You must install the MTAC/Ring card in the bottom right slot.
2 Carefully remove the card from its antistatic packaging.
3 Visually inspect the card for damage. Check the label and part number on
the card to verify the type of card being installed is the type needed for the
particular application.
4 Holding the card by its faceplate, carefully insert the card into a slot. Hold
the bottom ejector open and slowly slide the card onto the backplane pins.
5 Close the bottom ejector to firmly seat the card.
Caution: To prevent damage to the backplane pins, do not force

cards onto the backplane pins when seating the cards. If you have
trouble seating a card, check that it is in the correct slot, pull the
card out, and try seating it again by pressing gently.
6 Slide the card lock to the left.

The card will not boot if the card lock is not in the down position.
7 Tighten the top and bottom screws to seat the card in the backplane.
Figure 14 illustrates installing slot cards.

Removing slot cards
Figure 15: Installing slot cards in the MALC 319
Removing slot cards

• Removing a slot card from the MALC chassis on page 53
• Removing a slot card from the MALC 319 chassis on page 54
Removing a slot card from the MALC chassis

2 Loosen the top and bottom screws of the slot card.
3 Unscrew the top and bottom screws from the card.
4 Push the slide lock on the bottom of the card up.
5 Lift the top and bottom ejectors.
6 Slide the card out.
Figure 16 illustrates removing slot cards.

Installing the MALC
Figure 16: Removing slot cards
Removing a slot card from the MALC 319 chassis

2 Loosen the top and bottom screws of the slot card.
3 Unscrew the top and bottom screws from the card.
4 Push the slide lock on the bottom of the card to the center of the unit.
5 Lift the top and bottom ejectors.
6 Slide the card out.
Figure 17 illustrates removing slot cards.

Connecting power to the MALC and grounding the chassis
Figure 17: Removing slot cards from the MALC 319 chassis

• Grounding requirements on page 56
• Connecting power to the MALC and grounding the chassis on page 57
• Connecting power to the MALC 319 and grounding the chassis on
page 61
Note: Bare, covered, or insulated grounding conductors must comply

with Underwriters Laboratory (UL) standards. Individually covered
or insulated grounding conductors shall have a continuous outer
finish that is either green or green with one or more yellow stripes.
The equipment grounding conductor should be connected to the
ground at the service equipment. The grounding cable must be rated
at VW-1 or higher.
Zhone recommends grounding the MALC using minimum 10 gauge
copper wire and NRTL-listed two hole compression-type connectors
(such as Amphenol part number 1527272-3).

Installing the MALC
Grounding requirements
Use the guidelines in this section to provide a system ground for the
MALC.
Before concluding a MALC installation and applying DC power, measure
the impedance of the building ground reference and ensure that it is less
than 25 ohms, for safety. Use an ECOS 1023 POW-R-MATE or an EMC
Instrument Model 3710 or similar meter to do this. Zhone recommends
that the impedance be 5 ohms or less for proper equipment operation.
If the ground path connected to the MALC has an impedance of more
than 5 ohms, make improvements to the grounding system before
installing the MALC equipment.
Other grounding requirements are as follows:
– The earth ground rod is normally buried in the ground at the site.
Observe local electrical codes for buried grounding techniques and
requirements. Ensure that the ground rod has been installed per local,
telco, and NEC code requirements.
– Use a dedicated power source that is only shared with other isolated
bonding network (IBN)-configured equipment to provide power to
the MALC and all other related equipment. This prevents interference
from possible high surge or noise currents present in some industrial
buildings. Otherwise, you must ensure a proper grounding path of
less than 5 ohms to the building ground.
– Use the ground bus of a dedicated AC service panel as the location/
site ground of the MALC equipment. This ground bus must already
be connected to the main service panel ground or main building
ground reference.
– The impedance of the link between the ground terminal of the MALC
and the location/site ground to which it is connected must be less than
0.25 ohms.
– The rack the MALC is installed in must be properly grounded.
– Never connect a single-point-ground conductor from the MALC to
structural steel members or electrical conduits. Specifically, never tie
this conductor to a ground source or grounded electrode that is not
hard-wired to the building ground reference conductor.
– It is recommended to avoid running in-building cabling near
fluorescent lights and other sources of high frequency radiation such
as transformers.
– Avoid spliced conductors. Use continuous conductors, which have
lower impedance and are more reliable than spliced ones.
– Terminate all conductors in a permanent manner. Ensure all
terminations are easily visible and accessible for maintenance
purposes.

– Tag ground connections clearly with a message such as “CRITICAL

CONNECTION: DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT.”
– Although some electrical codes permit the use of a conduit as the sole
ground conductor between equipment, it is still recommended to use a
separate insulated ground conductor through the same conduit. The
separate insulated ground conductor maintains the safety ground
connection if the conduit is corroded or disconnected.
– Avoid a ground path via serial craft interface RS-232C. The MALC
RS-232C local craft interface has pins referenced to ground. To
prevent undesirable ground path via an attached computer, it is
recommended that you only use a portable computer. If only a
desktop computer or VT-100 type monitoring equipment is available,
use it in conjunction with a UL/CSA Certified RS-232 Opto-Isolator.
Ground conductors for the MALC must meet the following requirements:
– No smaller than 10 AWG at any point.
– Does not carry current under normal operating conditions.
– Must be tied to the +48V battery return at the main power
Distribution Center
– Should be hardwired to the main ground reference.

Use the following procedure to connect the wiring between the MALC
terminal block and the power supplies.
1 Remove the MALC lower bezel.
2 Remove the air filter.
Figure 18: Removing the front bezel and air filter
3 Locate the terminal block in the lower portion of the chassis.

4 Loosen the screws that attach the terminal block to the chassis.
5 Carefully remove the terminal block from the chassis.

Installing the MALC
Caution: Use care when removing the terminal block from the
chassis so as not to detach the wires connecting the terminal
block to the chassis.
6 Thread the wires (minimum 10 AWG) through the hole on the right side
of the chassis.
Figure 19: Removing terminal block
Note: Some MALC terminal blocks have a quarter-turn screw.

For these units, turn the screw 1/4 turn counterclockwise to
loosen.
Note: If the MALC is installed so that the thread hole on the side
of the unit is inaccessible, thread the power supply and grounding
cables behind the front bezel as illustrated in Figure 20.
Figure 20: Threading the power and grounding cables behind the front bezel
ma0220
7 Connect the negative wire from power supply A to the terminal marked
–VA.
8 Connect the positive wire from power supply A to the terminal marked
VA+.

9 Connect the negative wire from power supply B to the terminal marked
–VB.
10 Connect the positive wire from power supply B to the terminal marked
VB+.
Note: If using a single power source, place jumpers between

terminals –VA and –VB.
11 Reinstall the terminal block into the chassis.
Figure 21: Connecting power cables
12 Secure the terminal block to the chassis.

13 Route a 10 AWG conductor from each chassis to a common 2 AWG
frame ground collector that connects to the single point building ground
in an IBN. Ensure that there are no sharp bends in the conductors and that
they touch bare metal. Do not connect the cables to the single point
building ground at this time.
14 Strip the 10 AWG conductor and crimp a grounding lug to the end of the
conductor.
13 mm (0.5 in.)
FW-10119
Crimp-type 2-hole lug
15 Attach the ground lug with two hex bolts to the grounding lugs, as shown
in Figure 22 on page 60.
16 Secure the hex bolts to the chassis.
17 If you suspect that there are grounding issues, it may be necessary to
verify the ground by performing the following steps.

Installing the MALC
Caution: This procedure is service affecting and requires that

ground be isolated from the equipment. Perform this procedure
during a maintenance window.
a To verify the ground, connect one lead of the insulation tester to a

known good ground point and the other lead to a grounding cable
from the frames you have just installed. The polarity of the leads is
not important for this test.
b Set the test voltage to 500 V dc and measure the leakage current
between the frame ground cable and the known good ground. The
leakage current should be less than 1.5 mA (or better than 2 megohms
if you are using an instrument that provides an output reading in
ohms).
c If the leakage current is greater than 1.5 mA (or the resistance is less
than 2 megohms) check the installation of the isolation shims and
repair as necessary.
d Repeat the test on the grounding cable from each frame until you
have tested all frame ground cables.
18 Connect the ground cable(s) routed in Step 13 and tighten the bolt. Use a
minimum torque of 12 inch-lbs to ensure that the grounding cable is
securely fastened.
Figure 22: Securing the terminal block and grounding the chassis
-B
+B

For these units, turn the screw 1/4 turn clockwise to tighten.
19 Reinstall the air filter.

20 Replace the lower bezel.

Figure 23: Replacing the air filter and bezel
21 Turn on the power to power supply A (and to power supply B, if present).

The system is now live and ready to initialize the slot cards as they are
installed. In the absence of any slot cards, there is no activity on the system.
The Power A and Power B LEDs on the front panel of the unit should be solid
green, indicating power is normal. For information on the chassis LEDs, see
Reading the LEDs on page 63.
Connecting power to the MALC 319 and grounding the

chassis
The MALC 319 comes with 10 AWG power cables pre-installed. To connect
the MALC 319 power cables:
1 Connect the wire marked - 48 A to the power supply A negative terminal.
2 Connect the wire marked + RTN A to the power supply A positive
terminal.
3 Connect the wire marked - 48 B to the power supply B negative terminal.
4 Connect the wire marked + RTN B to the power supply B positive
terminal.
5 Route a 10 AWG conductor from each chassis to a common 2 AWG
frame ground collector that connects to the single point building ground
in an IBN. Ensure that there are no sharp bends in the conductors and that
they touch bare metal. Do not connect the cables to the single point
building ground at this time.
6 Remove the screw from the grounding connector and secure a
compression-type connector. See Figure 24.
7 If you suspect that there are grounding issues, it may be necessary to
verify the ground by performing the following steps.
Caution: This procedure is service affecting and requires that

ground be isolated from the equipment. Perform this procedure
during a maintenance window.

Installing the MALC
a To verify the ground, connect one lead of the insulation tester to a

known good ground point and the other lead to a grounding cable
from the frames you have just installed. The polarity of the leads is
not important for this test.
b Set the test voltage to 500 V dc and measure the leakage current
between the frame ground cable and the known good ground. The
leakage current should be less than 1.5 mA (or better than 2 megohms
if you are using an instrument that provides an output reading in
ohms).
c If the leakage current is greater than 1.5 mA (or the resistance is less
than 2 megohms) check the installation of the isolation shims and
repair as necessary.
d Repeat the test on the grounding cable from each frame until you
have tested all frame ground cables.
8 Connect the ground cable(s) routed in Step 5 and tighten the bolt. Use a
minimum torque of 12 inch-lbs to ensure that the grounding cable is
securely fastened.

For these units, turn the screw 1/4 turn clockwise to tighten.
9 Tighten the nut on the chassis ground lug to secure the cable in place. Use
a minimum torque of 12 inch-lbs to ensure that the grounding cable is
securely fastened.
Figure 24: Grounding the MALC 319
10 Turn on the power to power supply A (and to power supply B, if present).

The system is now live and ready to initialize the slot cards as they are
installed.

Reading the LEDs
Reading the LEDs

The MALC 719 and MALC 721 system LEDs are located on the front bezel
(see Figure 25 on page 63).
The MALC 319 LEDs are located on the MTAC-FC card (see Figure 26 on
page 63).
Figure 25: MALC 719 and MALC 721 LEDs
Figure 26: MALC 319 LEDs
These LEDs illuminate to reflect the most significant alarm in the system. For
example, if there were five major alarms and one critical alarm in the system,
only the critical LED would be lit.
Table 8 describes the MALC system LEDs.
Table 8: MALC system LED descriptions
LED Description
Power A (green) ON: battery “A” voltage is within tolerance.

Bat OK A (green) (MALC 319) OFF: battery “A” is not operational.
Power B (green) ON: battery “B” voltage is within tolerance.
Bat OK B (green) (MALC 319) OFF: battery “B” is not operational.

Installing the MALC
Table 8: MALC system LED descriptions (Continued)
LED Description
Fan fault yellow) ON: fan tray fault has been detected.
OFF: fan is operating normally.
Minor (yellow) ON: the highest alarm being reported by one or

more slot cards is a minor alarm.
OFF: no alarm conditions.
Major (yellow) ON: the highest alarm being reported by one or

more slot cards is a major alarm.
Critical (yellow) ON: the highest alarm being reported by one or

more slot cards is a critical alarm.
Uplink cards and MTAC/Ring card each have Active LEDs which illuminate
to indicate their redundancy status. A solid green LED indicates the card is
active, a blinking green LED indicates the card is standby.
Table 8 describes the MALC system LEDs.
Table 9: MALC card LED descriptions
LED Description
Active (Green) ON: the card has booted properly.

BLINKING: The card is booting.
Each Uplink card and MTAC/Ring card have
Active LEDs which illuminate to indicate their
redundancy status. A solid green LED indicates
the card is active, a blinking green LED
indicates the card is standby.
For Uplink cards, the Active LED should blink
during POST and then remain ON after it has
booted up. The LED should stop blinking after
approximately 5 minutes
Fault (Yellow) ON: The card detected a hardware failure or the

card is not provisioned.
If the LED in ON for a provisioned card, the
card need to be repaired.
Pwr Fail ON: The card has detected a local on-board

power failure. While the card may operate
properly, it needs repair as soon as possible.
For System power status, refer to the
appropriate chassis LEDs.

Replacing the air filter
Replacing the air filter

Replacing the air filter requires you to temporarily remove the cable
management bracket (if installed). Before performing this procedure, make
sure the MALC connectors are securely fastened.
Removing the air filter with the cable management bracket

installed
2 Carefully unscrew the cable management bracket, leaving the cables
secured to the bracket.
3 Gently lift the bracket up and out until there is enough free space to
remove the air filter.
Figure 27: Lifting the cable management bracket
4 Remove the bezel from the bottom of the MALC chassis by grasping both
ends and gently pulling straight out.

Installing the MALC
Figure 28: Removing the front bezel
5 Remove the air filter by carefully sliding it out.
Figure 29: Removing the air filter
6 Replace the air filter.

7 Replace the front bezel.
8 Secure the cable management bracket to the installation rack.

4
SYSTEM CABLES AND CONNECTORS
This chapter explains how to connect the MALC cables and connectors. It
contains the following sections:
• Cabling guidelines, page 67
• Connecting optical ATM trunking cables, page 68
• Dressing DSL and POTS cables, page 68
• Securing amphenol connectors, page 72
• Cable descriptions, page 73
• Alarm cable and contacts guidelines, page 75
• Uplink card pinouts, page 77
• Fiber optic maintenance and handling, page 79
Cabling guidelines
To be in compliance with NEC article 800, ensure that the power lines are
placed at least two inches away from the communication cables. This can be
accomplished by tie-wrapping and routing the power lines behind the rack
(route the communication cables in front of the rack).
Note: To comply with FCC regulations, cables and connectors must

be shielded. If you intend to install cable covers, the maximum height
of the connector head and cable should be two inches.
If the MALC is going to be installed in an inside plant, the cables
must be shielded and grounded at both ends.
MALC system connectors are located in the front of the chassis. No
cables are included with the installation kit. You must order any
cables that are required.

System cables and connectors
Connecting optical ATM trunking cables

WARNING! The single-mode fiber optic interfaces on the OC-3c/
STM1 and OC-12c/STM4 Uplink cards emit invisible laser
radiation that may cause harm. When an optical cable is
connected to the card, the radiation is confined to the cable and
does not present a hazard. However, if you are servicing the
OC-3c/STM1 Uplink or OC-12c/STM4 Uplink cards, always use
the following precautions:
• Disconnect the card from the MALC before installing or
removing cables
• Ensure that the protective rubber tips cover the SC connectors
when not in use
• Never look directly into the optical ports
1. Disengage the OC-3c/STM1 Uplink card from the MALC backplane to
ensure that the optic interface is not emitting laser radiation.
2. Remove the protective rubber tips from the SC connectors on one end of
the fiber optic cable or cables.
3. Remove the protective rubber tips from the SC connectors on the OC-3c/
STM1 Uplink card.
4. Gently insert the SC on the cable into the Tx and Rx ports on the Uplink
card.
5. Connect the other end of the cable that is connected to the Uplink card Tx
connector to the Rx port on the ATM device.
6. Connect the other end of the cable that is connected to the Uplink card Rx
connector into the Tx port on the ATM device.
Dressing DSL and POTS cables

Use 50-pin connectors to connect the DSL and POTS cards. Dress the cables
to the side of the unit and either up or down. See Figure 30.

Figure 30: Dressing MALC cables
The optional cable management bracket can be installed to facilitate installing

and managing cables. See Figure 31 on page 70.

Figure 31: Installing the cable management bracket
The cable management bracket installation kit also includes mounting clips
intended to secure cable connectors to the card. See Figure 32.

Figure 32: Installing bracket clip
To remove the connectors from a card, remove the top portion of the
connector, then gently rock the bottom portion of the connector until it’s freed
from the clip. See Figure 33.
Figure 33: Removing connectors

Securing amphenol connectors

The MALC accessory kit contains tie-wraps, tie-wrap holders, and screws
that can be optionally used to secure Amphenol connectors to MALC cards.
See Figure 34 on page 72.
Securing the Amphenol connectors

1 Remove one of the hexagonal standoffs from the slot card connector.
2 Install the tie-wrap holder into the space where the hexagonal standoff has
been removed.
3 Attach the male end of the Amphenol connector into slot card connector.
4 Hand-tighten the Amphenol connector hold-down screw.
5 Once the Amphenol connector is firmly seated, secure the connector by
looping a tie-wrap through the tie-wrap holder and around the Amphenol
connector.
6 Fasten the tie-wrap.
Figure 34: Securing 50-pin Amphenol connectors

Cable descriptions
Cable descriptions
Table 10 lists specifications for the cables used with the MALC system. For
pinout information for these cables, refer to the chapters for each card, later in
this manual.
Table 10: Summary of cable specifications
Cable description Interfaces the MALC to Cable type Connector type
ADSL subscriber ADSL-32 cards 32-pair Category 2, 3, 4 Female 64-pin amphenol.

or 5
ADSL subscriber Three ADSL-32 cards 96-pair Category 2, 3, 4 Three Female 64-pin
multi-connector or 5 amphenol.
Chassis alarms Alarm relay contact on chassis 20 AWG minimum (0.8 Blank wire in to screw
(MALC 723 or MALC 719) mm) terminals.
Alarm relay contact on MTAC/ 24 AWG (0.5 mm)
Ring-FC card recommended
DSL, POTS, or DSL, POTS, or ISDN connectors 25 pair Category 2, 3, 4 Male 50-pin amphenol.
ISDN subscriber on line cards or 5
E3/DS3 ATM trunk E3/DS3 port on DS3/E3 Uplink Coax RG Series 59 Female BNC
circuits card.
Ethernet data 1000BaseT connector on OC12/ 4 pair Category 5 RJ45 plug

S4/GE/TDM Uplink card
Management (IP) Ethernet port on Uplink card. 4 pair Category 5 RJ45 plug
Management (serial RS-232D connector on Uplink 4-wire minimum RJ45 plug

craft port) card. 26 AWG (0.4 mm)
MTAC/Ring BITS External BITS clock Standard T1 4-wire RJ48C

cable
MTAC/Ring External alarm connector on 20 AWG minimum (0.8 26 pin D-Sub

external alarms MTAC/Ring card mm)
24 AWG (0.5 mm)
recommended
MTAC/Ring External ring generator on MTAC/ 22 AWG (0.6 mm) Screw terminals
external ringer Ring card
MTAC/Ring External test access connector on 2-wire or 4-wire RJ45 plug

external test access MTAC/Ring card (depending on the test
being run). Minimum
26 AWG (0.4 mm)

Table 10: Summary of cable specifications (Continued)
Optical trunk OC-3c/STM1 connector on Pair of Single mode 8/ Square Connector (SC)
circuits OC3C/STM1 Uplink card 125
OC-12c/STM4 connector on Pair of Single mode 9/ Square Connector (SC)
OC12/S4/GE/TDM Uplink card 125
1000BaseT connector on OC12/ Pair of Single mode 9/ Dual fiber LC connectors

S4/GE/TDM Uplink card 125 (Tx and Rx)
T1/E1 ATM circuits T1/E1-IMA-8 Uplink card 8-pair Category 2, 3, 4 Amphenol 36-pin
(non-redundant) or 5 connector to two 50-pin
Amphenol
Note that a split cable is
included from this
custom connector toward
2 50-pin female
amphenol RJ-21X.
T1/E1-IMA-8 Uplink card 8-pair Category 2, 3, 4 Two Amphenol 36-pin

(redundant) or 5 connectors to two 50-pin
Amphenol
included from this
2 50-pin female
amphenol RJ-21X.
T1/E1 ATM/TDM TDM T1/E1 Uplink card 16-pair Category 2, 3, 4 Molex 96-pin connector
circuits or 5 to 4 50-pin connectors
included from this
4 50-pin female
amphenol RJ-21X.
A patch panel, such as
the Ortronics
OR-808004339, can be
used to separate out the
16 lines from the ATM/
TDM Uplink card.
T1/E1 TDM circuits TDM T1/E1 connector on OC12/ 8-pair Category 2, 3, 4 Amphenol 44 pin
S4/GE/TDM card or 5 connector.
(non-redundant)
TDM T1/E1 connector on OC12/ 8-pair Category 2, 3, 4 Amphenol 44 pin

S4/GE/TDM card or 5 connector.
(redundant)

Alarm cable and contacts guidelines
Table 10: Summary of cable specifications (Continued)
T1/E1 TDM circuits TDM T1/E1 connector on the 32-pair Category 2, 3, 4 128 pin telco connector.
Voice Gateway card or 5
(non-redundant)
TDM T1/E1 connector on the 32-pair Category 2, 3, 4 128 pin telco connector.
Voice Gateway card or 5
(redundant)
Alarm cable and contacts guidelines

The MALC 719 and MALC 723 chassis alarms are located in the lower left of
the chassis, behind the bezel. See Figure 35.
MALC 319 chassis alarms are located on the MTAC-FC card.
Figure 35: MALC chassis alarms
The specifications and requirements for the MALC chassis alarm cable and
alarm relay contacts are as follows:
• The alarm cable must be rated at VW-1 or higher. To comply with Part 15
of FCC regulations, all cables to DB connectors must be foiled with
braided shielding.
• One cable is required to interface to the alarms connector. The minimum
gauge for this cable is 20 AWG (24 AWG recommended). To limit alarm
cable signal losses, its length should not exceed 60 feet.
• Alarm relay contacts are rated at 62.5 VA (defined as being capable of
switching 1 amp at 62.5 volts). The maximum switching current of the
relay is 1 amp.
The following tables describe the MALC chassis alarms.

Table 11: System alarms
Event Type of alarm
Fan Tray up/down Critical
Power A/B up/down Critical (if nonredundant)

Minor (if redundant)
System control bus error Critical
Power Threshold (power Minor

out of acceptable range)
Thermal threshold Minor
Table 12: Card alarms
Event Type of alarm
Card Up/Down Major

For Uplink and MTAC/Ring card:
Critical (if nonredundant)
Table 13: Interface alarms
Event Type of alarm
Frames too long Minor
Physical line up/down Major
Table 14: Uplink card alarms
Event Type of alarm
BER threshold Critical
Card up/down Critical (if nonredundant)

IMA up/down Critical
Network clocking fault Critical (if no fallback provided)

Minor (if fallback provided by internal clock)
Flash memory threshold Minor

Uplink card pinouts
Table 14: Uplink card alarms
Event Type of alarm
Internal BITS clock fault Minor (if fallback to line clocking is

provisioned, or if the clock source is currently
provisioned as secondary source)
T1/E1 threshold Minor
Table 15: POTS card alarms
Event Type of alarm
Continuity test fault Minor
Ground fault Minor

Loop resistance fault Minor
Power cross test fault Minor

(polarity reversal failure)
Table 16: MTAC/Ring alarms
Event Type of alarm
Ring Generator Up/Down Critical (if nonredundant)

BITS clock Up/Down Minor

(only if provisioned
active)
External Ring Generator Minor

Up/Down (only if
provisioned active)
Uplink card pinouts

This section lists the pinouts for the following interfaces that are common on
all the Uplink cards:
• Serial (craft) port pinouts
• Ethernet port pinouts
For information about other port pinouts for Uplink cards, refer to the
chapters for each type of card, later in this manual.

Serial (craft) port pinouts
Table 17 lists the Uplink cards’ serial (craft) port pinouts. The serial (craft)
port is an RS232 D type configured as DTE.
Table 17: Uplink card serial (craft) port pinouts
Pin Function
1 DCE Ready, Ring Indicator

(DSR/RI)
2 Received Line Signal Detector (DCD)
3 DTE Ready (DTR)
4 Signal Ground (SGND)
5 Received Data (RD)
6 Transmitted Data (TD)
7 Clear To Send (CTS)
8 Request To Send (RTS)
Table 18 lists the pinouts to connect a DB9 connector to the MALC RJ45
serial craft port.
Table 18: RJ45 to DB9 adapter pinouts
RJ-45 pin Color Function DB-9 pin
1 N/A DCE Ready, Ring Indicator not used

(DSR/RI)
2 N/A Received Line Signal Detector not used

(DCD)
3 N/A DTE Ready (DTR) not used
4 Red Signal Ground (SGND) 5
5 Green Received Data (RD) 2

6 Yellow Transmitted Data (TD) 3
7 N/A Clear To Send (CTS) Looped to pin 8
8 N/A Request To Send (RTS) Looped to pin 7
Ethernet port pinouts
Table 19 lists the Ethernet port pinouts on the Uplink cards.

Fiber optic maintenance and handling
Table 19: Uplink card Ethernet port pinouts
Pin Function
1 Tx +
2 Tx -
3 Rx +
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 Rx -
7 Not used
8 Not used

This section describes how to clean the optical connectors and receptacles
used with Zhone Technologies equipment. These processes should be applied
to optical components only in instances where degraded performance is
evidence that the connection is contaminated.
• Laser radiation on page 79
• Handling optical fibers on page 80
• Selecting cleaning materials on page 81
• Cleaning a connector on page 81
• Cleaning a receptacle on page 81
• Repairing optical fibers on page 82
Laser radiation
Zhone equipment and associated optical test sets use laser sources that emit
light energy into fiber cables. This energy is within the red (visible) and
infrared (invisible) regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Laser products are subject to federal and state or provincial regulations, and
local practices. Regulation 21 CFR 1040 of the U.S. Bureau of Radiological
Health requires manufacturers to certify each laser product as Class I, II, III,
or IV, depending upon the characteristics of the laser radiation emitted. In
terms of health and safety, Class I products present the least hazard (none at
all), while Class IV products present the greatest hazard.

Read and observe the following precautions to decrease the risk of exposure
to laser radiation.
WARNING! Risk of eye damage. At all times when handling

optical fibers, follow the safety procedures recommended by your
company.
Although Zhone optical products have a Class I certification, hazardous

exposure to laser radiation can occur when fibers connecting system
components are disconnected or broken. Certain procedures carried out
during testing require the handling of optical fibers without dust caps and
therefore increase the risk of exposure. Exposure to either visible or invisible
laser light can damage your eyes under certain conditions.
During service, maintenance, repair, or removal of cables or equipment,
follow these rules:
• Avoid direct exposure to fiber ends or optical connector ends. Laser
radiation may be present and can damage your eyes.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions when using an optical test set.
Incorrect calibration or control settings can result in hazardous levels of
radiation.
Handling optical fibers
When you work with optical fibers, you must take these precautions:
• Wear safety glasses when you install optical fibers.
• Clean your hands after you handle optical fibers. Small pieces of glass are
not always visible and can damage your eyes. If you have a piece of a
glass in your eye, get medical assistance immediately.
• Never look into an active optical fiber or a optical fiber connector opening
of an active or powered-up unit.
• Prevent direct exposure to optical fiber ends or optical connector ends
where you can directly access the laser signal. Do not handle pieces of
optical fiber with your fingers. Use tweezers or adhesive tape to lift and
discard any loose optical fiber ends.
• Wear rubber gloves when you clean optical connectors. The gloves
prevent direct contact with the isopropyl alcohol and prevent
contamination of the ferrules with skin oils.
• Place all optical fiber clippings in a plastic container provided for that
purpose.
• Handle optical fibers with caution. Place the optical fibers in a safe
location during installation.
• Protect all optical fiber connectors with clean dust caps at all times.

• Follow the manufacturer instructions when you use an optical test set.
Incorrect calibration or control settings can create hazardous levels of
radiation.
Selecting cleaning materials
Materials used for cleaning Zhone Technologies equipment should be high

quality and suitable for the purpose.
• Disconnect the cable end to be cleaned.
• Using inert dusting gas, blow accumulated dust and debris off the
cylindrical and end-face surfaces of the connector.
• Apply optical-grade isopropyl alcohol to a cleaning tissue.
• Gently wipe the tissue over the cylindrical and end face surfaces of the
connector perpendicular to the cable, then fold the cloth and repeat the
operation. Always use a clean tissue. Reusing the same portion of the
tissue may result in recontamination.
• Dry the connector by blowing it with inert dusting gas for two seconds,
holding the nozzle approximately inch from the end of the connector.
• Recap or reconnect the connector promptly to avoid contamination.
Check for proper system function.
Optical cleaning kits are available from optical supply sources.
Cleaning a connector
1 Disconnect the cable end to be cleaned.
2 Using inert dusting gas, blow accumulated dust and debris off the
cylindrical and end-face surfaces of the connector.
3 Apply optical-grade isopropyl alcohol to a cleaning tissue.
4 Gently wipe the tissue over the cylindrical and end face surfaces of the
connector perpendicular to the cable, then fold the cloth and repeat the
operation. Always use a clean tissue. Reusing the same portion of the
tissue may result in recontamination.
5 Dry the connector by blowing it with inert dusting gas for two seconds,
holding the nozzle approximately inch from the end of the connector.
6 Recap or reconnect the connector promptly to avoid contamination.
Cleaning a receptacle
Clean the optical ports on modules only if there is evidence of contamination
or reduced performance. To minimize contamination and cleaning, keep all
optical ports securely covered with a connector or a dust cap.

1 Using the extension tube supplied with the inert dusting gas, blow into the
optical port to remove any accumulated dust and debris. Do not allow the
tube to touch the bottom of the optical port.
2 Using a swab with a small head, such as TexWipe Microswab, and
optical-grade isopropyl alcohol, wipe out the optical port.
3 Recap or reconnect the receptacle promptly to avoid contamination.
Repairing optical fibers

When an accidental break in the fiber feeder cable occurs, take the following
steps:
1 Notify both central-office and field-repair personnel of the problem.
2 Identify to central-office personnel what fibers are damaged.
3 Power off all laser sources related to the damaged fibers (whether located
at the central office, subscriber premises, or remote location).

5
MANAGING THE MALC
This chapter describes how to log into the MALC and add a remote
management channel. It includes the following sections:
• Logging into the serial (craft) port, page 83
• Configuring a management interface, page 84
Logging into the serial (craft) port

Note: Do not use the serial craft port of a standby card to modify its
configuration.
The MALC unit provides an out-of-band RS232 D serial (craft) interface for
managing the unit. To access the serial port, configure your terminal interface
software with the following settings:
• 9600bps
• 8 data bits
• No parity
• 1 stop bit
• No flow control
Tip: The serial (craft) port settings can be changed by modifying the
rs232-profile.
You must perform the initial configuration of the system using the serial
(craft) interface. After you have completed the initial configuration, you can
manage the MALC unit over the network through a telnet session over the
Ethernet interface or over the management PVC.
Note: The MALC supports 6 concurrent management sessions, 5

telnet sessions and a single local session through the serial (craft)
port.
Logging in and out of the system

Log into the system (the default user name is admin, the default password
is zhone):

Managing the MALC
login:admin
password:
zSH>
To log out of the system, enter the logout command:

zSh> logout
Tip: The system automatically logs you out after a period of

inactivity. The default logout time is 10 minutes, but can be changed
with the timeout command. Refer to the Zhone CLI Reference Guide
for information on the timeout command.
Enabling and disabling logging

By default logging is enabled on the serial craft port and disabled over
telnet sessions. To enable or disable logging for the session, using the
following command:
zSh> log session on | off
The log session command only applies to the current session. You can
also enable or disable logging for all serial craft port sessions using the
following command:
zSh> log serial on | off
This command setting persists across system reboots.
Configuring a management interface

This section describes how to configure the following interfaces to remotely
manage the MALC:
• Uplink card 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface on page 84
• ATM management connection on page 86
• Managing the MALC with ZMS on page 88
Note: If you want to manage the MALC over an ATM PVC, first
configure the Uplink ATM interface as described later in this manual.
Uplink card 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface
The MALC has a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface on the Uplink card. The
ip-interface-record for the Uplink card is named ethernet1. This interface is
shared between the two Ethernet ports on redundant Uplink cards (if they
exist). The system can be reached using the address configured in the
ethernet1 ip-interface-record, no matter which card is active.

Caution: The Uplink card Ethernet interface must be configured

before any other interfaces on the system, even if you do not intend to
manage the unit over the Ethernet.
Configuring the Ethernet IP interface

The following example configures the IP address for the system:
zSH> interface add 1-1-1-0/ethernetcsmacd static 192.168.8.21 255.255.255.0
Created ip-interface-record ethernet1/ip
Note: If you have problems with IP interfaces not automatically

binding, refer to for more information.
Verifying the interface

Use the interface show command to verify that the Ethernet interface was
configured correctly:
zSH> interface show
Interface Status Rd/Address Media/Dest Address IfName
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1/1/0/ip UP 1 192.168.8.21/24 00:01:47:65:02:f2 1-1-1-0
Creating a default route

The following example creates a default route using the gateway
192.168.8.1 with a cost of 1 (one):
route add default 192.168.8.1 1
Verifying the route

Use the route show command to verify that the routes were added:
zSH> route show
Dest Nexthop Cost Owner
------------------------------------------------------------
0.0.0.0/0 192.168.8.1 1 STATICLOW
192.168.8.0/24 1/1/1/0/ip 1 LOCAL
Use the ping command to verify connectivity to the default gateway:

zSH> ping 192.168.8.1
PING 192.168.8.1: 64 data bytes
!!!!!
----192.168.8.1 PING Statistics----
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received
round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/0/0
To stop the ping, press CTRL+C.

Managing the MALC
Adding a route to the remote LAN

After creating the IP interface, you might need to create a route to the
remote device’s LAN interface using the route add command. The
command uses the following syntax:
route add destination mask next-hop cost
For example, in the following configuration, add a route to the

192.168.10.0 network using the MALC Uplink interface as the gateway.
Figure 36: Adding a remote route to LAN
ATM
192.168.8.21 192.168.8.1
192.168.10.0
route add 192.168.10.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.8.1 1
ATM management connection
The MALC can terminate an ATM PVC and route it over an Ethernet
interface for management traffic.
The following table summarizes the configuration tasks for creating an ATM
management connection.
Task Command
Create a traffic descriptor. See new atm-traf-descr index

Creating the ATM traffic descriptor Multiple connections can use the same traffic descriptors and a single VCL
on page 86. must use the same traffic descriptor for both transmit and receive.
Create the VCL. See Creating the interface add interface/atm vc vpi/vci td td_index
ATM management VCL on page 87. static IpAddress Netmask
This command creates the ATM VCL and the IP interface for the
management PVC.
Add a route to the Ethernet route add destination netmask nexthop cost
interface. See Adding a default This enables the MALC to route from the IP management interface to the
route to the ATM network on Ethernet interface
page 87.
Creating the ATM traffic descriptor

Create a new atm-traf-descr profile and specify a unique index:
zSH> new atm-traf-descr 200

Please provide the following: [q]uit.

td_type: ------------- {atmNoClpNoScr}: enter traffic descriptor type
td_param1: ----------- {0}: enter PCR
td_param2: ----------- {0}: enter PCR (for CLP=0 traffic) or SCR
td_param3: ----------- {0}: enter MBS
td_param4: ----------- {0}: enter CDVT
td_param5: ----------- {0}:
cac-divider: -------------> {1}:
td_service_category: - {ubr}: rtvbr | nrtvbr | ubr | cbr
td_frame_discard: --------> {false}:
usage-parameter-control: -> {true}:
....................
Save new record? [s]ave, [c]hange or [q]uit: s
New record saved.
Creating the ATM management VCL

The following example configures an ATM connection with a VPI/VCI of
0/35 that uses the atm-traf-descr profile you just configured (with an
index of 200). The VCL uses the Uplink interface:
zSH> interface add uplink1/atm vc 0/35 td 200 static 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
Created ip-interface-record uplink1-0-35/ip
This command creates the ip-interface-record and the associated VCL:

zSH> list ip-interface-record
ip-interface-record ethernet1/ip
ip-interface-record uplink1-0-35/ip
2 entries found.
zSH> list atm-vcl

atm-vcl uplink1/atm/0/35
1 entry found.
Adding a default route to the ATM network

After adding the IP interface for management, create a default route to the
ATM network:
route add default 192.168.1.254 1

Use the interface show command to verify that the interfaces are active:
zSH> interface show
Interface Status Rd/Address Media/Dest Address IfName
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1/1/0/ip UP 1 192.168.8.21/24 08:00:3e:03:02:01 1-1-1-0
1/1/2/0/ip UP 1 192.168.1.1/24 0/35 uplink1-0-35
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 interfaces

Managing the MALC
Managing the MALC with ZMS
Note: For details on using ZMS, refer to the ZMS Administrator's

Guide and the NetHorizhon User's Guide.
The system profile contains parameters that configure the system contact
information for the MALC and connection information for the ZMS. This
profile does not need to be modified in order to manage the MALC with ZMS.
CLI provisioning and ZMS

CLI configuration of a device being managed by the ZMS is disabled by
default. Attempting to configure the device results in an error:
zSH> update system 0
Provisioning via CLI is currently not available.
If you need to configure the device from the CLI, use the resetcliprov
command.
If you plan to use a script to provision the device from the CLI while it is
being managed by the ZMS:
1 Update the system profile to disable partial config syncs to ZMS:
syscontact: ----------> {Zhone Global Services and Support 7001 Oakport
Road Oakland Ca. (877) Zhone20 (946-6320) Fax (510)777-7113
support@zhone.com}:
sysname: -------------> {Zhone MALC}:
syslocation: ---------> {Oakland}:
enableauthtraps: -----> {disabled}:
setserialno: ---------> {0}:
zmsexists: -----------> {true}: false
zmsconnectionstatus: -> {inactive}:
zmsipaddress: --------> {192.168.210.28}:
configsyncexists: ----> {false}:
configsyncoverflow: --> {false}:
configsyncpriority: --> {high}:
configsyncaction: ----> {noaction}:
configsyncfilename: --> {192.168.8.21_4_1014067321329}:
configsyncstatus: ----> {synccomplete}:
configsyncuser: ------> {cfgsync}:
configsyncpasswd: ----> {}: ** private **
numshelves: ----------> {1}:
shelvesarray: --------> {}:
numcards: ------------> {3}:
ipaddress: -----------> {192.168.8.21}:
alternateipaddress: --> {0.0.0.0}:
countryregion: -------> {us}:
primaryclocksource: --> {0/0/0/0/0}:
ringsource: ----------> {internalringsourcelabel}:
revertiveclocksource: -> {true}

voicebandwidthcheck: --> {false}

....................
Save changes? [s]ave, [c]hange or [q]uit: s
Record updated.
2 After the provisioning is complete, perform a full config sync from ZMS.

Managing the MALC

6
GIGABIT ETHERNET CARD (UPLINK-2-GE)
This chapter describes the MALC 2 port GigaBit Ethernet Uplink card and
explains how to configure it. It includes:
• GigE-2 Uplink card configuration, page 94
• Small form factor pluggables, page 99
Note: Uplink cards must be installed in slot 1 or slot 2 of the MALC

chassis.

Gigabit Ethernet card (UPLINK-2-GE)
Overview
The MALC 2-GE Uplink cards provide high-speed

GigaBit Ethernet interfaces for resilient packet ring (RPR)
networks. They include the following interfaces:
One 10/100 Ethernet interface for management or data.
Two Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. These interfaces can be
used for RPR or high speed data applications. The
interfaces support a number of small form factor
pluggables (SFPs) that enable the card to interface with a
variety of media types. (For more information see Small
form factor pluggables on page 99.)
Eight T1/E1 TDM ports that support either GR-303 or
V5.2.
Table 20: Uplink-2-GE specifications
Specification Description
Size 1 slot
Density 8 ports TDM T1/E1

Overview
Table 20: Uplink-2-GE specifications (Continued)
Physical TDM T1/E1: Amphenol 44 pin connector

interfaces Two Gigabit Ethernet ports with SFPs. The SFPs can be twisted
pair 1000baseT or fiber (SX, LX or ZX). See Small form factor
pluggables on page 99.
The optical interfaces are class 1 Laser International Safety
Standard IEC 825 compliant
RJ45 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet interface for management
RS232D serial craft interface
Standards AF-PHY-0086.001
supported GR-303-CORE
G.965 and ETSI EN 300 347-1 V2.2.2 (V5.2)
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) IEEE 802.3
TDM line Supervisory signaling is Extended Superframe (ESF) – CAS

characteristics signaling
TDM capacity 2 GR-303 interface groups (IGs)
8 channelized T1s per card
4096 maximum GR-303 call reference values (CRVs) per
system
Voice AAL2 SAR for converting TDM bus voice traffic to

processing ATMG.711 encoding only
ATMF Loop Emulation Standard
Management RS-232D serial craft port

interface AAL5 Management VC termination (RFC 1483 routed) for
ATM in-band management
Management Ethernet 10/100 port routable for connecting to
other Ethernet devices
SNMP
Redundancy Card redundancy
1+1 TDM T1/E1 interface redundancy (with Y cable).
APS 1:1 bi-directional and 1+1 (with Y cable).
Power 50 W
consumption

GigE-2 Uplink card configuration

This section describes configuration procedures for the GigE-2 Uplink card. If
these procedures are required, they should be done before provisioning the
system. This section includes:
• Configuring redundant Uplink cards on page 94
• Adding GigE-2 cards to the primary Uplink node on page 95
• Adding redundant Uplink cards to RPR nodes on page 97
• Adding GigE-2 Uplink cards in linear mode on page 97
• Configuring redundant Uplink cards in linear mode on page 97
• Changing the RPR line type on page 98
Note: For information about creating an RPR ring, refer to the

MALC Configuration Guide.
Configuring redundant Uplink cards
Caution: When adding redundant Uplink cards, note the following:

You must configure redundant physical interfaces on both the active
and standby cards. This applies to all Uplink cards. In addition, you
must manually keep the configuration of the physical interfaces on
the active and standby cards in sync.
Each card must be running the same software version and have the
same size flash card.
Note: When configuring the redundant Uplink card, the settings in

the card-profile for the both cards must be identical.
To add a redundant Uplink card to the system:

1 Verify that active card has been configured with the same card-group-id
that is to be used for the standby card.
2 Install a second Uplink card in slot 2.
3 Create a card-profile for the second Uplink card:
By default, the GigE-2 card is configured to carry data-only traffic. You
can modify the GigE-2 card to specify that the RPR ring carry voice and
data traffic by modifying the card-line-type in the card-profile. The
following line types are supported for RPR nodes:
– rpr: RPR data-only mode (default)
– rpr-t1-gr303: RPR with data and GR-303 voice
– rpr-e1-v52: RPR with data and V5.2 voice
– rpr-t1cas: RPR with data and T1 CAS voice

zSH> new card-profile 1/2/5041 shelf/slot/type

sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcrprgige.bin
admin-status: ---------> {operational}:
upgrade-sw-file-name: -> {}:
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
admin-status-enable: --> {operational}:
sw-upgrade-admin: -----> {reloadcurrrev}:
sw-enable: ------------> {false}: true
sw-upgrade-enable: ----> {false}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}: enter the same redundancy group ID as the working Uplink card
hold-active: ----------> {false}:
weight: ---------------> {nopreference}: assign a weight, if desired
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: rpr
card-atm-configuration: -> {notapplicable}
....................
New record saved.
4 Connect the redundant cables.

Once the card-profile has been saved, the standby card comes up and the
configuration and routing tables from the primary card are copied over.
Adding GigE-2 cards to the primary Uplink node

RPR requires two Uplink cards in the MALC functioning as the primary
Uplink node. Each of these Uplink cards in the primary Uplink node must use
the same card-group-id and the same card-line-type:
1 Update the card profile for the Uplink card:
zSH> update card-profile 1/1/5041 shelf/slot/type
sw-file-name: -----------> {malcrprgige.bin}:
admin-status: -----------> {operational}:
upgrade-sw-file-name: ---> {}:
upgrade-vers: -----------> {}:
admin-status-enable: ----> {enable}:
sw-upgrade-admin: -------> {reloadcurrrev}:
sw-enable: --------------> {true}:
sw-upgrade-enable: ------> {false}:
card-group-id: ----------> {0}: 1
hold-active: ------------> {false}:
weight: -----------------> {nopreference}:
card-line-type: ---------> {rpr}: rpr|rpr-t1-gr303|rpr-e1-v52|rpr-t1cas
card-atm-configuration: -> {notapplicable}:
....................
card redundancy group ID change to 1

This will cause the removal of all associated profiles and a slotreboot to
create new if-translate profilesbased on "uplinkx-y" names.
Continue? [y]es or [n]o: y

Record updated.
After saving the Uplink card-profile, the system will reboot.

2 Add a second uplink card to the primary Uplink node.
Set the second Uplink card to the same card-group-id and line type as the
first Uplink card.
zSH> new card-profile 1/2/5041shelf/slot/type
sw-file-name: -----------> {}: malcrprgige.bin
upgrade-vers: -----------> {}:
sw-enable: --------------> {false}: true
card-group-id: ----------> {0}: 1
card-line-type: ---------> {unknowntype}:rpr|rpr-t1-gr303|rpr-e1-v52|
rpr-t1cas
....................

This will cause the removal of all associated profiles and a slotreboot to
create new if-translate profilesbased on "uplinkx-y" names.
Record updated.
3 Connect the Uplink card RDNT ports with the RPR redundant cable.
4 Modify the rpr-config profile to specify how the RPR ring should handle
redundancy switches. See the MALC Configuration Guide for a detailed
explanation of these protection settings.
zSH> new rpr-config 1-1-2-0/ethernetcsmacd
reversion-mode: --------> {true}:
protection-wtr: --------> {10}:
protection-fast-timer: -> {10}:
protection-slow-timer: -> {100}:
wrap-config: -----------> {false}:
....................
Record updated.
5 Repeat these steps to add GigE -2 cards to the RPR ring nodes.

Adding redundant Uplink cards to RPR nodes

To add a redundant Uplink card into an RPR (non-Uplink) node:
1 Assign both cards to card-group-id 1.
2 Connect the cards with an intercard connector.
3 Do not connect the GigE port 2 to the ring.
Adding GigE-2 Uplink cards in linear mode

To add a GigE-2 Uplink card to the system:
1 Install the Uplink card in slot 1.
2 Create a card-profile for the Uplink card:
Note: The card line type for GigE-2 cards in a linear topology is
ds1.

upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: ds1
....................
New record saved.
3 Connect the cables.
Configuring redundant Uplink cards in linear mode
Caution: When adding redundant Uplink cards, note the following

You must configure redundant physical interfaces on both the active
and standby cards. This applies to all Uplink cards. In addition, you
must manually keep the configuration of the physical interfaces on
the active and standby cards in sync.
Each card must be running the same software version and have the
same size flash card.



Note: The card line type for GigE-2 cards in a linear topology is
ds1.

upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
....................
New record saved.
4 Connect the redundant cables.

Changing the RPR line type

If, after configuring the line type for a GigE-2 card, you need to change the
line type, delete the Uplink card-profile and recreate it.
Caution: Changing the line type for the Uplink card requires a
system reboot and deletes the system configuration.
Back up your configuration using the dump command before
changing the line type.
By default, the GigE-2 card is configured to carry data only. You can modify
the GigE-2 card so that the T1/E1 TDM ports can be configured to carry voice

Small form factor pluggables
traffic. To do this, modify the card-line-type in the card-profile. The

following line types are supported for RPR nodes:
• rpr: RPR data-only mode (default)
• rpr-t1-gr303: RPR with data and GR-303 voice
• rpr-e1-v52: RPR with data and V5.2 voice
• rpr-t1cas: RPR with data and T1 CAS voice
1 Delete the card-profile for the Uplink card:
zSH> delete card-profile 1/1/5041 shelf/slot/type
2 Create the Uplink card-profile and change the card-line-type:

zSH> update card-profile 1/1/5041shelf/slot/type
sw-file-name: -----------> {}: malcrprgige.bin
upgrade-vers: -----------> {}:
sw-enable: --------------> {true}:
card-group-id: ----------> {0}: 1
card-line-type: ---------> {rpr}: rpr|rpr-t1-gr303|rpr-e1-v52|rpr-t1cas
....................
Record updated.
After saving the Uplink card-profile, the system will reboot.

Zhone Technologies supports a variety of small form factor pluggables (SFPs)
which you select depending on the protocol, fiber type and distance
requirements.
These SFPs (optical transceivers) are high performance integrated duplex data
links for bi-directional communication over multimode or single mode optical
fiber. All Zhone Technologies SFPs are equipped with LC receptacles, which
are compatible with the industry standard LC connector. These SFP
transceivers measure 0.532 inches in width and provide double port densities
by fitting twice the number of transceivers into the same board space as a 1x9
transceiver. They also operate at +3.3V. All supported SFPs are
hot-swappable, therefore enabling SFPs to be easily changed regardless of
whether the power is on. In addition, if an incorrect SFP is plugged in the user
will receive a “mismatch”error in their management software.

Furthermore, this opto-electronic transceiver module is a class 1 laser product

compliant with FDA Radiation Performance Standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J.
This component is also class 1 laser compliant according to International
Safety Standard IEC-825-1.
Figure 37: Small form factor pluggable.
Zhone Technologies supports 4 types of Gigabit Ethernet SFPs:

• GE-SFP-SX: This is a 850 nm, multimode SFP, used in applications that
are up to 5 km.
• GE-SFP-LX: This is a 1310 nm, singlemode SFP, used in applications
that are up to 10km.
• GE-SFP-ZX: This is a 1550 nm, singlemode SFP, used in applications
that are up to 80 km.
• GE-SFP-TP: This is a twisted pair SFP for access to a twisted pair
GigaBit Ethernet network. It supports data rates of up to 1.25 Gbps over
distances of 100 m (per IEEE 802.3).
Table 21 describes the optical SFP specifications.
Table 21: SFP specifications
Specification SX LX ZX
Data rate 1.062 to 1.25 Gbps 1.062 to 1.25 Gbps 1.062 to 1.25 Gbps
Fiber Interface G.652 G.652 G.652
Operating wavelength range 830-860 nm 1274-1360 nm 1535-1565 nm
Maximum distance supported 500 meters 10 km 80 km
Transmitter
Source type multimode singlemode singlemode
Power -9.5 (minimum) -9 dB (minimum) 2 dB (typical)

0 dB (maximum) -3 dB (maximum)

Table 21: SFP specifications (Continued)
Specification SX LX ZX
Spectral characteristics: max. –20 dB 0.85 nm 4 nm 1 nm

width
Minimum extinction ratio 9 dB 9 dB 9 dB
Relative intensity noise (RIN) (max.) -117 dB -120 dB -120 dB
Optical Rise/Fall Time 300 ps 260 ps 260 ps

Deterministic jitter (max.) 85 ps 80 ps —
Total Jitter Output (pk-pk) (max.) 251 ps 227 ps 200 ps
Receiver
Sensitivity -17 dB (minimum) -20 dB (minimum) -24 dB (minimum)

0 dB (maximum) -3 dB (maximum) 0 dB to -3 dB
(maximum) with
damage threshold at 6
dB
Reflectance at the receiving point — -14 dB -14 dB
Deterministic jitter (max.) 113 ps 170 ps —
Total Jitter Output (pk-pk) (max.) 266 ps 266 ps —


7
T1/E1 UPLINK CARD (UPLINK-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8)
This chapter describes the MALC T1/E1 Uplink card and explains how to
configure it. It includes:
• Configuring DS1/E1 interfaces, page 107
• Configuring IMA groups, page 112
• T1/E1 IMA cable and port pinouts, page 117
Overview
IMA provides multiplexing and demultiplexing of ATM

traffic on the cell level as described in the ATM forum
AF-PHY-0086.001. On the subscriber side, the Uplink card
provides ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2) termination for
POTS cards. The Uplink card also provides system
management services such as software and configuration
database storage, management, and monitoring.
The T1/E1 Uplink card supports both IMA and UNI mode.
The Uplink card contains an Ethernet port for local
management, local LAN connectivity, or IP uplink; a T1/
E1 IMA interface for user traffic; and a serial (craft) port
for local management.

T1/E1 Uplink card (Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8)
Table 22: Uplink-T1/E1 ATM/IP specifications
Size 1 slot
Density 8 ports
Physical Custom 36-pin amphenol connector

interface Provided cable breaking out to 2 50-pin telco connectors
ATM support MALC performs ATM cell relay functions between cell based
line cards (such as ADSL or SHDSL) and the Uplink card. The
Uplink card performs cell relay function for the ATM traffic on
the backplane.
ATM Quality of Service types supported:
• CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR
• Fair Weighted Queuing
• Per VC and per QoS buffering
ATM Forum specifications:
• UNI 3.0, UNI 3.1 compliant. Note that ILMI, SVCs,
point-to-multipoint are currently not supported.
• UNI 4.0 compliant for PVC features only. Note that ABR,
SVCs, SPVCs, Multicast, and Anycast are not currently
supported.
8 IMA groups are supported, as described in the ATM forum
AF-PHY-0086.001. Note that UNI and IMA mode are not
currently supported on the same card.
• Partial support for Traffic Management 4.0 including:
– QOS levels described above
– Connection Admission Control
– Traffic descriptor specification
VPI/VCI ranges:
• VPI: 0 to 3
• VCI: 32 to 511
AAL2 and AAL5 termination:
• AAL2 SAR for MALC POTS lines
• AAL5 SAR for in-band management VC termination
• RFC 1483 routed termination supported
Voice AAL2 SAR for subscriber lines on POTS cards

processing Supports AAL2 BLES standard, compatible with standards based
Voice Gateways
G.711 encoding of voice calls on the MALC TDM bus

T1/E1 ATM/IP card configuration
Table 22: Uplink-T1/E1 ATM/IP specifications (Continued)

interfaces AAL5 Management VC termination (RFC 1483 routed) for ATM
in-band management
SNMP
Redundancy 1+1 card redundancy (with Y cable).
Uplink-T1/ 30 W
E1-IMA-8
T1/E1 ATM/IP card configuration

This section describes optional configuration procedures for the T1/E1 ATM/
IP card. These procedures should be done before provisioning the system.
Configuring ATM settings for T1/E1 ATM/IP Uplink cards

To configure T1/E1 IP Uplink cards:
zSH> update card-profile 1/1/5101 shelf/slot/type (type is 5101 for T1/E1 IP Uplink cards)
sw-file-name: ---------> {malct1imaf.bin}:
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
sw-enable: ------------> {true}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
weight: ---------------> {nopreference}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}:
card-atm-configuration: -> {vbnrt65rt30} change the bandwidth allocation, if desired
....................
Changing atm configuration will result in a system reboot.
Atm configuration changed system is rebooting ...Record updated.
Changing the T1/E1 IMA Uplink card line type

If, after configuring the line type for a T1/E1 Uplink card, you need to change
the line type, delete the Uplink card-profile and recreate it.

1 Save the device configuration. For example:

a Verify you are at the root of the flash card:
zSH> cd /card1
zSH> pwd
/card1/
b Back up the current configuration file to the flash card and store it in
the onreboot directory:
zSH> mkdir onreboot
zSH> cd onreboot
zSH> dump file restore
This file will be used to restore the system configuration or revert to a

previous release, if desired.
c If desired, save the configuration file to a host on the network. For
example:
zSH> dump network 192.168.8.21 malc.cfg
d Change directories to the root of the flash card:
zSH> cd /card1
zSH> pwd
/card1/

3 Create the Uplink card-profile and change the card-line-type and

specify the ATM bandwidth allocation:
zSH> new card-profile 1/1/5101
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malct1imaf.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: e1 | e1-ima | ds1 | ds1-ima

Configuring DS1/E1 interfaces
card-atm-configuration: -> {notapplicable} enter the bandwidth allocation

....................
New record saved.
After saving the Uplink card-profile, the system will reboot and restore the
configuration saved to the onreboot directory.
Connecting redundant T1/E1 Uplink cards

The T1/E1 ATM/IP Uplink card has a redundant Y cable to provide card
redundancy. To connect the redundant cables:
1 Attach each 36-pin connector to the uplink connector on the Uplink card.
2 Attach the 50-pin connectors to the appropriate network interface. (See
Figure 38.)
Figure 38: Connecting redundant T1/E1 Uplink cards
For pinout information about the redundant T1/E1 IMA cable, see T1/E1 IMA
cable and port pinouts, page 117.

This section explains how to configure DS1/E1 interfaces. It applies to the
TDM Uplink card (ports 9 through 16) the T1/E1 IMA card, and the T1/E1 32
port card.
Note: For redundant systems, configure the DS1 interfaces on both

the active and standby cards.

The following table summarizes the commands required to configure DS1

uplink interfaces on the MALC:
Action Command
Update the DS1 interfaces, which specify the basic update ds1-profile 1-1-port-0/ds1
parameters of the DS1 line, including framing, where port is from 1 to 8 (for the IMA Uplink card)
encoding, and clocking. See Configuring a DS1
interface on page 111. 9 to 16 (for the TDM Uplink card)
1 to 32 (for the T1/E1 32 card)
If your system is redundant, configure the DS1
interfaces on both the active and standby cards.
Activate the DS1 interfaces in the if-translate and update if-translate 1-1-port-0/ds1
line-group profiles. See Activating a DS1 interface on where port is from
page 111.
1 to 8 for the T1/E1 IMA Uplink card or
1 to 16 for the T1/E1 TDM Uplink card
The ds1-profile configures both T1 and E1 interfaces.

T1 interfaces on the MALC have the following defaults:
• ESF framing
• B8ZS coding
• Robbed bit signaling
• CSU mode
• Line build out of 0 feet
E1 interfaces on the MALC have the following defaults:
• E1-CRCMF line type
• HDB3 coding

The following table describes the supported ds1-profile parameters.
Parameter Options
line-type The type of DS1 circuit.

Values:
esf Extended Super Frame.
e1Mf : G.704, table 4a, with TS16 multiframing
enabled for E1 circuits.
e1CrcMf : G.704, table 4b, with TS16 multiframing
Default: esf for T1
e1 for E1
line-code The type of Zero Code Suppression used on the

interface.
b8zs: a specific pattern of normal bits and bipolar
violations used to replace a sequence of eight zero bits.
hdb3: High Density Bipolar of order 3. A code used
for E1.
Default: b8zs for T1
hdb3 for E1
send-code This parameter is used for bit error rate (BER) testing.
For information, see the MALC Configuration Guide.
circuit-id Enter a circuit identifier for the interface, up to 36

characters.
loopback-config This parameter is used for loopback testing. For

information, see the MALC Configuration Guide.
dsx-line-length The length of the DSX WAN interface in feet. This

parameter provides information for line build out
circuitry.
Values:
Dsx0 0 feet for the line build out (LBO) setting.
Dsx133 133 feet for the LBO.
Default: 0

Parameter Options
line-status-change-trap Specifies whether a trap is generated whenever the line

-enable state changes.
Values:
enabled
disabled
Default: enabled
ds1-mode Type of interface.

Values:
dsx DS1 interface is DSX
csu DS1 interface is CSU
other Interface is neither CSU nor DSX
Default: csu
csu-line-length This parameter provides information for line build out

circuitry.
Values:
csu00 0 dB line build out.
csu75 -7.5 dB line build out.
Default: csu00
transmit-clock-source Specifies the clock source for the interface.
cell-scramble Indicates whether ATM cell scrambling is enabled for

this interface. Both sides of the connection must agree
on whether scrambling is enabled.
Values:
true Cell scrambling enabled.
false Cell scrambling disabled.
Default: true
coset-polynomial Indicates whether the coset polynomial is used to
calculate the ATM header error control (HEC) value.
Both sides of the connection must agree on the method
of calculating the HEC value.
Values:
true The coset polynomial is used to calculate the
HEC value.
false The coset polynomial is not used to calculate the
HEC value.
Default: true

Configuring a DS1 interface

The default values are appropriate for most applications. If you need to
change them, update the ds1-profile for the interface:
zSH> update ds1-profile 1-1-1-0/ds1
line-type: ----------------------> {esf}:
line-code: ----------------------> {b8zs}:
send-code: ----------------------> {sendnocode}:
circuit-id: ---------------------> {ds1}:
loopback-config: ----------------> {noloop}:
signal-mode: --------------------> {none}:
fdl: ----------------------------> {fdlnone}:
dsx-line-length: ----------------> {dsx0}:
line-status_change-trap-enable: -> {enabled}:
channelization: -----------------> {disabled}:
ds1-mode: -----------------------> {other}:
csu-line-length: ----------------> {csu00}:
clock-source-eligible: ----------> {eligible}:
transmit-clock-source: ----------> {throughtiming}:
cell-scramble: ------------------> {true}:
coset-polynomial: ---------------> {true}:
protocol-emulation: -------------> {network}signal-type:
--------------------> {loopstart}
Record updated.
Activating a DS1 interface

Activate each DS1 interface by updating its if-translate profile:
zSH> update if-translate 1-1-1-0/ds1
ifindex: -----> {1}: .
shelf: -------> {1}:
slot: --------> {1}:
port: --------> {1}:
subport: -----> {0}:
type: --------> {ds1}:
adminstatus: -> {down}: up
physical-flag: ----> {true}:
iftype-extension: -> {0}:
ifName: -----------> {1-1-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.
After you update the profile, a log message appears indicating the line is
active:
1/1: alarm_mgr: : l=167: 01:01:01 Major T1 Up Line
1:1:1:0

Continue updating each DS1 interface. When all the interfaces are active,
proceed to configuring the IMA groups.
Configuring IMA groups

Note: For redundant systems, configure the IMA interfaces on both
For more information about IMA, refer to the ATM Forum Inverse
Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Specification Version 1.1 (AF-PHY-0086.001).
The following table summarizes the commands required to configure IMA
groups on the MALC:
Action Command
(Optional) Update the ima-group-profile, which update ima-group-profile 1/slot/1

specifies the basic settings of the IMA group, where slot the slot that contains the card).
including the number of transmit and receive links
and the clocking. See Configuring IMA groups on If your system is redundant, configure the IMA group on
page 116. both the active and standby cards.
(Optional) Move the default IMA links to different imalink move SourceIMAGroup
groups. See Moving IMA links on page 116. DestinationIMAGroup ds1Interface

The following table describes the supported parameters in the

ima-group-profile.
Parameter Description
groupSymmetry The symmetry of the Inverse Multiplexing over ATM

(IMA) group. Symmetry determines whether the transmit
and receive sides of the IMA link must be configured and
how traffic is sent over the links.
Values:
symmetricOperation Both transmit and receive IMA
links must be configured and the system can transmit and
receive traffic only if both sides of the connection are
active.
asymmetricOperation Both transmit and receive IMA
links must be configured, but the system can transmit and
receive traffic even if both sides of the connection are not
active.
asymmetricConfiguration Transmit and receive links
do not have to be configured and the system can transmit
and receive traffic even if both sides of the connection are
not active.
Default: symmetricOperation
minNumTxLinks Minimum number of transmit links required to be Active

for the IMA group to be in the Operational state. If the
number of active links falls below this value, the link
drops and the redundant link (if any) takes over.
Values:
1 to 8
Default: 1
minNumRxLinks Minimum number of receive links required to be active

for the IMA group to be in the operational state. If the
Values:
1 to 8
Default: 1
txClkMode Transmit clocking mode used by the near-end IMA
group.
Values:
itc Independent Transmit Clock. Indicates that IMA links
do not all use the same transmit clock. Each IMA link
derives clock from its associated DS1 interface.
ctc Common Transmit Clock. Indicates the transmit
clock of all IMA links are derived from the same source.
When set to ctc, the MALC derives the IMA clocking
from the system clock.
Default: ctc

txImaId The IMA ID currently in use by the near-end IMA

interface.
Values:
0 to 255
Default: 1
txFramLength The frame length to be used by the IMA group in the

transmit direction. Can only be set when the IMA group
is startup.
Values:
m32 32 cells
m64 64 cells
m128 128 cells
m256 256 cells
Default: m128
diffDelayMax The maximum number of milliseconds of differential

delay among the links that can be tolerated on this
interface.
Values:
0 to 100
Default: 25
alphaValue The number of consecutive invalid ICP cells allowed

before the system changes from a Sync state to a Hunt
state.
Values:
1 or 2
Default: 2
betaValue The number of consecutive errored ICP cells allowed

state.
Values:
1 to 5
Default: 2
gammaValue The number of consecutive valid ICP cells allowed before

the system changes from a PreSync state to the Sync
state.
Values:
1 to 5
Default: 1
testLinkIfIndex This parameter is used for testing the IMA link.
testPattern This parameter is used for testing the IMA link.
testProcStatus This parameter is used for testing the IMA link.

Overview
The following MALC cards support IMA groups:

• T1/E1 IMA Uplink
• T1/E1-ATM-32
Each card supports 16 IMA groups. The MALC T1/E1-ATM-32 card
provides 32 T1/E1 UNI or IMA ports. All ports must be configured as either
UNI or IMA. When these cards boot up, the system creates the IMA groups
and assigns the T1/E1 links to the following groups:
Links IMA group
1-4 1
5-8 2
9 - 12 3
13 - 16 4
Empty 5
Empty 6
Empty 7
Empty 8
17 - 20 9
21 - 24 10
25 - 28 11
29 -32 12
Empty 13
Empty 14
Empty 15
Empty 16
Note: (T1/E1 32 card only) IMA links 1-16 can only belong to IMA
groups 1-8 and links 17-32 can only belong to IMA groups 9-16.
Note the following about multiple IMA groups:

• In a redundant Uplink configuration, you must configure IMA groups on
both the active and standby cards

• Before moving IMA links to another group, the system performs a CAC
calculation to determine whether moving the links will violate ATM QoS
settings. If so, the link will not be moved.
• If you do not want a link to belong to any IMA group, it is recommended
that you admin down the interface in the if-translate profile. Do not use
the imalink remove command unless requested to by Zhone GSS.
The following example updates an IMA group to change the minimum

number of links in the group:
zSH> update ima-group-profile 1/1/1 shelf/slot/port
groupSymmetry: ---> {symmetricoperation}:
minNumTxLinks: ---> {1}: 4
minNumRxLinks: ---> {1}: 4
txClkMode: -------> {ctc}:
txImaId: ---------> {1}:
txFrameLength: ---> {m128}:
diffDelayMax: ----> {75}:
alphaValue: ------> {2}:
betaValue: -------> {2}:
gammaValue: ------> {1}:
testLinkIfIndex: -> {0/0/0/0/0}:
testPattern: -----> {-1}:
testProcStatus: --> {disabled}:
txTimingRefLink: -> {0}:
rxTimingRefLink: -> {0}:
....................
Record updated.
Moving IMA links

To move IMA links from one group to another, use the imalink move
command. For example:
zSH> imalink move 1-1-1-0/atmima 1-1-2-0/atmima 1-1-1-0/ds1
Stack unbind successful.
Link moved successfully.
This command moves the DS1 interface 1-1-1-0/ds1 from IMA group
1-1-1-0/atm to IMA group 1-1-2-0/atmima.
If this is a redundant configuration, also move the IMA link on the
standby card:

T1/E1 IMA cable and port pinouts
After moving the links, you can use the imalink show command to view
the links in the group:
zSH> imalink show 1-3-1-0/atmima
DS1 Links for IMA Group 1-3-1-0/atmima:
If Index If Name
--------- ---------------
000736 1-3-1-0
000737 1-3-2-0
000738 1-3-3-0
000739 1-3-4-0

This section describes the T1/E1 IMA cables available from Zhone
Technologies and the T1/E1 IMA port pinouts:
• T1/E1-IMA Uplink port pinouts on page 117
• 8-port T1/E1 to dual 50 pin connector cable (T1/E1-IMA-8 Uplink) on
page 118
• Dual 8-port T1/E1 to dual 50 pin connector cable (T1/E1-IMA-8 Uplink)
on page 120
T1/E1-IMA Uplink port pinouts
Figure 39 shows the location of pin 1 on the T1/E1-IMA Uplink connector.
Figure 39: T1/E1 Uplink connector pin 1
Pin 1
Table 23 lists the T1/E1 uplink port pinouts.
Table 23: Uplink-T1/E1-IMA-8 uplink port pinouts
Function Pin Function Pin
Tx ring 1 1 Rx ring 1 19
Tx tip 1 10 Rx tip 1 28

Table 23: Uplink-T1/E1-IMA-8 uplink port pinouts (Continued)
Function Pin Function Pin
8-port T1/E1 to dual 50 pin connector cable (T1/E1-IMA-8 Uplink)
Figure 40 shows the 8 port T1/E1 to dual 50-pin connector cable. This cable is
used with the T1/E1 IMA Uplink card. Table 24 lists the pinouts.

Figure 40: 8-port T1 to dual 50 pin connector cable
Table 24: 8-port T1/E1 to dual 50 pin connector cable pinouts
Pair Signal Color From To
1 TX 1 (tip) White/Blue P1-10 P2-26
TX 1 (ring) Blue/White P1-1 P2-1
2 RX 1 (tip) White/Orange P1-28 P2-2
RX 1 (ring) Orange/White P1-19 P2-27

3 TX 2 (tip) White/Green P1-11 P2-30
TX 2 (ring) Green/White P1-2 P2-5
4 RX 2 (tip) White/Brown P1-29 P2-6

RX 2 (ring) Brown/White P1-20 P2-31
5 TX 3 (tip) White/Slate P1-12 P2-34
TX 3 (ring) Slate/White P1-3 P2-9
6 RX 3 (tip) Red/Blue P1-30 P2-10
RX 3 (ring) Blue/Red P1-21 P2-35
7 TX 4 (tip) Red/Orange P1-13 P2-38

TX 4 (ring) Orange/Red P1-4 P2-13

Table 24: 8-port T1/E1 to dual 50 pin connector cable pinouts (Continued)
8 RX 4 (tip) Red/Green P1-31 P2-14

RX 4 (ring) Green/Red P1-22 P2-39
9 TX 5 (tip) Red/Brown P1-14 P2-42
TX 5 (ring) Brown/Red P1-5 P2-17

10 RX 5 (tip) Red/Slate P1-32 P2-18
RX 5 (ring) Slate/Red P1-23 P2-43
11 TX 6 (tip) Black/Blue P1-15 P2-46
TX 6 (ring) Blue/Black P1-6 P2-21

12 RX 6 (tip) Black/Orange P1-33 P2-22
RX 6 (ring) Orange/Black P1-24 P2-47
13 TX 7 (tip) Black/Green P1-16 P3-26
TX 7 (ring) Green/Black P1-7 P3-1
14 RX 7 (tip) Black/Brown P1-34 P3-2
RX 7 (ring) Brown/Black P1-25 P3-27

15 TX 8 (tip) Black/Slate P1-17 P3-30
TX 8 (ring) Slate/Black P1-8 P3-5
16 RX 8 (tip) Yellow/Blue P1-35 P3-6
RX 8 (ring) Blue/Yellow P1-26 P3-31
17 not used not used not used not used

Dual 8-port T1/E1 to dual 50 pin connector cable (T1/E1-IMA-8 Uplink)
There are two cables used for redundant T1/E1 Uplink cards. Figure 40 shows
the dual 8-port T1/E1 to dual 50-pin connector cable. Figure 42 shows the 50

foot dual 8-port cable. Both cables have the same pinouts. Table 25 lists the
pinouts.
Figure 41: Dual 8-port T1/E1 to dual 50-pin connector cable
Figure 42: 50 foot dual 8-port T1/E1 cable
Table 25: Cable 1: P1 to P2 pinouts

Table 25: Cable 1: P1 to P2 pinouts (Continued)












8
DS3/E3 UPLINK CARD (UPLINK-DS3/E3-ATM/
IP)
This chapter describes the MALC DS3/E3 Uplink card and explains how to
• DS3/E3 card configuration, page 128
• DS3/E3 Uplink cable, page 133

DS3/E3 Uplink card (Uplink-DS3/E3-ATM/IP)
Overview
The MALC Uplink-DS3/E3 card has two active DS3/E3

interfaces (with an option to activate up to 4 interfaces). It
provides similar services and functionality as the T1/E1
Uplink card, but with a higher capacity interface.
Note that the DS3/E3 Uplink card is unchannelized that is, it
does not support separate DS1 connections.
The DS3/E3 Uplink card contains an Ethernet port for local
management, local LAN connectivity, or IP uplinks; a DS3/
E3 interface for user traffic; and a serial (craft) port for local
management.
Table 29: Uplink-DS3/E3 specifications
Size 1 slot
Density 4 ports
Physical Custom high density connector

interface Provided cable breaking out to 4 pairs BNC Coax connectors

Overview
Table 29: Uplink-DS3/E3 specifications (Continued)

line cards (such as ADSL or G.SHDSL) and the Uplink card. The
the backplane.
supported.
Default VPI/VCI ranges:
• VPI: 0 to 3
• VCI: 32 to 1023
Voice AAL2 SAR for subscriber lines on POTS cards

processing Supports AAL2 BLES standard, compatible with standards based
Voice Gateways
G.711 encoding of voice calls on the MALC TDM bus

interfaces AAL5 Management VC termination (RFC 1483 routed) for ATM
in-band management
SNMP
Power 30 W

DS3/E3 card configuration

This section describes optional configuration procedures for the DS3/E3 card.
If these procedures are required, they should be done before provisioning the
system.
Configuring ATM settings for DS3/E3 Uplink cards

To configure DS3/E3 IP Uplink cards:
zSH> update card-profile 1/1/5109 shelf/slot/type (type is 5109 for DS3/E3 IP Uplink cards)
sw-file-name: ---------> {malcds3f.bin}:
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
sw-enable: ------------> {true}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
card-line-type: -------> {ds3}:
....................
Changing the DS3 Uplink card line type

If, after configuring the line type for a DS3/E3 Uplink card, you need to
change the line type, delete the Uplink card-profile and recreate it.

zSH> cd /card1
zSH> pwd
/card1/
zSH> mkdir onreboot

DS3/E3 card configuration
zSH> cd onreboot

example:
zSH> cd /card1
zSH> pwd
/card1/
2 Delete the card-profile for the DS3/E3 Uplink card:

zSH> delete card-profile 1/1/5109
3 Create the Uplink card-profile and change the card-line-type to ds3 or

e3:
zSH> new card-profile 1/1/5109 shelf/slot/type (5109 for DS3 Uplink cards)
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcds3f.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: ds3 | e3
....................
New record saved.
After saving the Uplink card-profile, the system will reboot and restore
the configuration saved to the onreboot directory.
Connecting redundant DS3/E3 cards

1 Attach the 6-inch MALC DS3/E3 redundant cable to each of the DS3/E3
Uplink cards.
2 Connect the individual BNC connectors from each card using a
T-connector. (See Figure 43.)

Note: Redundant DS3/E3 connections are only supported with

the 6-inch redundant DS3/E3 cable. Do not attempt to connect
redundant cards with the 6-foot DS3/E3 cable.
Figure 43: Connecting redundant DS3/E3 Uplink cards

Note: For redundant systems, configure the DS3/E3 interfaces on
both the active and standby cards.

Action Command
Update the DS3/E3 interfaces, which specify the basic update ds3-profile 1-1-port-0/ds3
parameters of the DS3 line, including line type, where port is from 1 to 4
encoding, and clocking. See Configuring DS3/E3
interfaces on page 130. If your system is redundant, configure the DS3/E3
Activate the DS1 interfaces in the if-translate profile. update if-translate 1-1-port-0/ds3
See Activating the DS3 interface on page 132. where port is from 1 to 4
When the DS3 card starts up, it creates four ds3-profiles. To view the DS3s
on the system, use the list command:
zSH> list ds3-profile
ds3-profile 1-1-2-0/ds3

4 entries found.
The ds3-profile specifies the basic operating parameters of the interface. The
following table describes the supported ds3-profile parameters.
line-type Specifies the line type.

dsx3cbitparity (C-bit parity).
dsx3m23 (M23)
Default: dsx3cbitparity
line-coding dsx3b3zs is the only supported value.
circuit-id A description of the circuit.
line-length-meters The length of the DS3 line in meters. Valid values

are 0 - 137 m. One meters is equal to 3.28 feet.
Default: 0

information, see the MALC Configuration Guide.
medium-scramble-config True: payload scramble is on.
False: payload scramble is off.
Default: True
transmit-clock-source Specifies the clock source for the interface. See for
information about configuring the system clock.
medium-frame-config The E3 framing mode.

Values:
e3FrameOther An option other than
e3FrameG832 or e3FrameG751.
e3FrameG832 E3 framing format will be G832.
e3FrameG751 E3 framing format will be G751.
Default: e3FrameG832
medium-atmframe-config Specifies the type of ATM framing.

Values:
dsx3atmframingplcp Uses PLCP framing.
dsx3AtmFramingDirectCellMapped Uses direct
cell mapping.
Default: dsx3AtmFramingDirectCellMapped

line-type: ---------------> {dsx3cbitparity}

line-coding: -------------> {dsx3b3zs}

send-code: ---------------> {dsx3sendnocode}
circuit-id: --------------> {}
loopback-config: ---------> {dsx3noloop}
transmit-clock-source: ---> {looptiming} throughtiming
line-length-meters: ------> {0}
line-status-trap-enable: -> {enabled}
channelization: ----------> {disabled}
ds1-for-remote-loop: -----> {0}
far-end-equip-code: ------> {}
far-end-loc-id-code: -----> {}
far-end-frame-id-code: ---> {}
far-end-unit-code: -------> {}
far-end-fac-id-code: -----> {}
medium-scramble-config: --> {true}
medium-frame-config: -----> {e3frameg832}
medium-atmframe-config: --> {dsx3atmframingdirectcellmapped}
....................
Record updated.
Activating the DS3 interface

Update the if-translate record for the DS3 interface to enable the line.
The if-translate record uses an index in the form shelf-slot-port-subport/
type.
The following example activates the first DS3 interface on the slot card
located in shelf 1 slot 1:
ifIndex: ----------> {154}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {1}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {ds3}:
adminstatus: ------> {down}: up
ifName: -----------> {1-1-1-0}:
redundancy-param1: -> {0}:
....................
Record updated.

DS3/E3 Uplink cable
DS3/E3 Uplink cable

Figure 44 shows the 6-foot DS3 Uplink cable. Table 30 lists the pinouts.
Note: Redundant DS3/E3 connections are only supported with the

6-inch redundant DS3/E3 cable. Do not attempt to connect redundant
cards with the 6-foot DS3/E3 cable.
Figure 44: DS3 Uplink cable
Table 30: DS3/E3 Uplink cable pinouts
BNC Function
1 TX 1
2 RX 1
3 TX 2
4 RX 2
5 TX 3
6 RX 3
7 TX 4
8 RX 4


9
OC-3C/STM1 UPLINK CARD (UPLINK-OC3C/
STM1-ATM/IP)
This chapter describes the MALC OC3C/STM1 Uplink card and explains
how to configure it. It includes:
• OC3C/STM1 Uplink card configuration, page 138
• Configuring OC-3c/STM1 interfaces, page 139
• Configuring APS, page 143

OC-3C/STM1 Uplink Card (Uplink-OC3C/STM1-ATM/IP)
Overview
The MALC OC3C/STM1 card provides two single-mode

optical interfaces, as well as a serial craft port and an
Ethernet port for management or IP uplinks. The MALC
supports Automatic Protection Switching (APS) when 2
cards are installed in the system to provide card-level
redundancy for the optical interfaces.

Overview
Table 31: Uplink-OC-3c/STM1-ATM/IP specifications
Size 1 slot
Density 2 ports
Physical SC connector (Class 1 Laser International Safety Standard IEC

interface 825 compliant)
• Single mode fiber
• Intermediate Reach IR-1optics
• 1300 nM
• SC connector
• Tx min: -15 dBM, max: -8 dBM
RJ45 Management 10/100 Ethernet Interface
the backplane.
supported.
• VPI: 0 to 7
• VCI: 32 to 1023

Table 31: Uplink-OC-3c/STM1-ATM/IP specifications (Continued)
Voice AAL2 SAR for converting TDM bus voice traffic to ATMG.711
processing encoding only

interface AAL5 Management VC termination (RFC 1483 routed) for ATM
in-band management
SNMP
Redundancy Card and link redundancy with separate fiber uplink to standby
card
APS 1:1 bi-directional, compatible with 1+1 APS switches
Power 33 W
consumption
OC3C/STM1 Uplink card configuration

This section describes optional configuration procedures for the OC3C/STM1
Uplink card. If these procedures are required, they should be done before
provisioning the system.
Configuring ATM settings for OC3C/STM1 uplink cards

To configure OC3C/STM1 IP Uplink cards:
zSH> update card-profile 1/1/5111 shelf/slot/type (type is 5111 for OC3C/STM1 IP Uplink cards)
sw-file-name: ---------> {malcoc3f.bin}:
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
sw-enable: ------------> {true}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
....................

Configuring OC-3c/STM1 interfaces

Note: For systems configured for APS, configure the OC-3c/STM1
Note: Ensure that the APS working and protection configuration is

consistent between the MALC and the far end OC-3/cSTM1
interface. This may require manual intervention on the MALC so that
both sides agree on which interface is working and which is
protection.
The following table summarizes the commands required to configure OC3C/

STM1 uplink interfaces on the MALC:
Action Command
Configure the OC-3c3/STM1 interfaces, which specify update sonet-profile 1-1-port-0/sonet

the basic parameters of the interface, including line where port is from 1 to 2
coding, and clocking. See Configuring the OC-3c/
STM1 interface on page 142. If your system is redundant, configure the OC-3c/STM1
Activate the interfaces in the if-translate profile. See update if-translate 1-1-port-0/sonet
Enabling/disabling the SONET interface on page 142. where port is 1 or 2
Configure APS (if desired). See Configuring APS on update aps-channel 1-1-port-0/sonet
page 143. update aps-group group
where group is 1 or 2
Note: For short distance connections, you may need to add

attenuation to the OC-3c/STM1 interface.

The following table describes the supported sonet-profile parameters.
medium-type The type of SONET signaling.

Values:
sonet Synchronous Optical Network (North
America)
sdh Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (Europe)
Default: sonet
medium-line-coding Line coding for this interface.

Values:
sonetMediumOther
sonetMediumB3ZS Used for STS-1 and STS-3
electrical SONET/SDH signaling.
sonetMediumCMI Used for STS-1 and STS-3
electrical SONET/SDH signaling.
sonetMediumNRZ Non-Return to Zero. Used for
optical SONET/SDH signals.
sonetMediumRZ Return to Zero. Used for optical
SONET/SDH signals.
Default: sonetmediumnrz
medium-line-type Describes the line type for this interface.

Values:
sonetMultiMode
sonetShortSingleMode
Default: sonetshortsinglemode
medium-circuit-identifier The SONET circuit identifier, determined by the

system installer.
Values:
string of up to 260 characters

medium-loopback-config How the SONET loopback is configured.

Values:
sonetnoloop SONET circuit, with no loop.
sonetfacilityloop All incoming data on the Rx
interface is retransmitted out of the Tx interface.
Used to check the circuit between a remote device
and the MALC and to test the MALC optical
module.
sonetterminalloop All of the data transmitted on
the Tx interface is also internally looped back to
the Rx interface. Used to verify that the ATM and
PHY layers are communicating.
sonetotherloop All incoming data on the Rx
Used to check the circuit between the IAD and a
remote unit and to verify that the optical module
and the SONET PHY are working.
path-current-width Indicates the type of the SONET/SDH path.

Values:
sts1
sts12cSTM4
sts3cSTM1
clock-external-recovery Whether internal clocking can be recovered from

an external source.
Values:
enabled
disabled
clock-transmit-source The clocking source.

Values:
external155mhz Transmit clock synthesized from
an external 155.52 MHz source.
looptiming Uses the recovered receive clock as
the transmit clock.
localtiming Either uses a local clock source or an
external clock which is attached to the device
containing the interface.
throughtiming Uses a transmit clock derived
from the recovered receive clock of another
interface.
medium-cell-scramble- Specifies whether SONET scramble mode is

config enabled.
medium-line-scramble- Specifies whether the line-level SONET scramble

config mode is enabled.

Configuring the OC-3c/STM1 interface

To view the OC-3c/STM1 interfaces on the system, use the list command:
zSH> list sonet-profile
sonet-profile 1-1-1-0/sonet
To display the default sonet-profile for an interface, use the get

command:
zSH> get sonet-profile 1-1-1-0/sonet
medium-type: -----------------> {sonet}:
medium-line-coding: ----------> {sonetmediumnrz}:
medium-line-type: ------------>
{sonetshortsinglemode}:
medium-circuit-identifier: ---> {}:
medium-loopback-config: ------> {sonetnoloop}:
path-current-width: ----------> {sts3cstm1}:
clock-external-recovery: -----> {enabled}:
clock-transmit-source: -------> {looptiming}:
medium-cell-scramble-config: -> {true}:
medium-line-scramble-config: -> {true}:

medium-line-type: ------------>
{sonetshortsinglemode}:
If you need to make changes to the default configuration, use the update
command.
Enabling/disabling the SONET interface

By default, the OC-3c/STM1 interface is inactive. During maintenance, or if
the port is not in use, the SONET interface should be in the down state.
The following example enables the SONET interface in shelf 1, slot 1,
port 1:
zSH> update if-translate 1-1-1-0/sonet
ifIndex: ----------> {12}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {1}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:

APS
type: -------------> {sonet}:

ifName: -----------> {}:
....................
Record updated.
To disable the interface:

ifIndex: ----------> {12}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {1}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {sonet}:
adminstatus: ------> {up}: down
ifName: -----------> {}:
....................
Record updated.
APS
Configuring APS
The system automatically creates the following APS profiles for SONET/
SDH OC3C/STM1 and OC12/STM4 uplink cards:
• aps-channel: configures the APS channels. There are two APS channel
per port. OC-3c/STM1 cards have 2 ports and therefore four APS
channels. OC-12/STM4 cards have 1 port and 2 APS channels.
• aps-group: configures the APS groups. There are up to two APS groups
on the system. Each APS group contains a working and protect channel.
The OC3C/STM1 card supports APS 1:1 protection. In the 1:1 protection
scheme, a working channel on one card carries the full traffic, while a protect
channel on another card is either idle or reserved for low priority traffic.
When a failure occurs on the working fiber, the destination switch moves the
data from the working fiber to the protect fiber.
The OC12/STM4 card supports both APS 1:1 protection and APS 1+1
protection. In the 1+1 protection scheme, a working card transmits the same
data in one direction on the working channel while a protect card

simultaneously transmits the same data in the opposite direction on the protect
channel. When both transmissions reach the destination switch, the data on
the protection channel is ignored. When a failure occurs on the working
channel, the destintation switch uses the tranmission from the protect channel.
The following tables describe how the SONET/SDH cards and ports are
assigned to APS groups and channels. These values cannot be changed. The
OC3C/STM1 card has 2 ports per card and requires assignments for each port.
Table 32: OC3C/STM1 Card APS Assignments
Slot Port APS group APS channel

1 1 1 1
1 2 2 1
2 1 1 0
2 2 2 0
The OC-12/STM4 card has 1 port and requires
Table 33: OC12/STM4 Card APS Assignments

1 1 1 1
2 1 1 0
Note: The APS protocol runs on the protect or second SONET/SDH

card.
To configure APS:
1 Verify both the working and protect SONET/SDH interfaces are
configured identically, including the same card-group-id, and both are
enabled.
2 Verify that the MALC working ports are connected to the working ports
on the SONET/SDH switch and the MALC protection ports are connected
to the protection ports on the SONET/SDH switch.
3 Activate the APS channels for the APS groups:
zSH> update aps-channel 1-1-1-0/sonet
apsChanConfigGroupName: ---> {group1}: **read-only **
apsChanConfigNumber: ------> {1}: ** read-only **
apsChanConfigAdminStatus: -> {notinservice}: inservice
apsChanConfigPriority: ----> {low}:
....................
Record updated.


APS

....................
Record updated.
4 Activate the APS groups:

zSH> update aps-group 1
apsConfigName: -----------> {group1}: ** read-only **
apsConfigAdminStatus: ----> {notinservice}: inservice
apsConfigMode: -----------> {oneton}: oneplusone
apsConfigRevert: ---------> {nonrevertive}:
apsConfigDirection: ------> {unidirectional}:
apsConfigExtraTraffic: ---> {disabled}:
apsConfigSdBerThreshold: -> {6}:
apsConfigSfBerThreshold: -> {3}:
apsConfigWaitToRestore: --> {300}:
apsConfigCreationTime: ---> {0}: ** read-only **
....................
Record updated.

....................
Record updated.


10
OC-12C/STM4/GIGE CARDS
This chapter describes the MALC OC-12c/STM4/GigE Uplink cards and

explains how to configure them. It includes:
• OC-12c/STM4/GigE Uplink card configuration, page 151
• Configuring OC-12c/STM4 interfaces, page 155
• Configuring Ethernet interfaces, page 158
• APS, page 163
• T1/E1 TDM cables, page 166
Note: Uplink cards must be installed in slot 1 or slot 2 of the MALC

chassis.

OC-12c/STM4/GigE cards
Overview
The MALC supports the following models OC-12c/STM4/

GigE Uplink cards:
•OC12/STM-4 card with single GigE port (UP-O12/S4/
GE/TDM-ATM/IP)
•High peformance OC12/STM-4 card with single GigE LX
port (UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-LX/T-E1)
•High peformance OC12/STM-4 card with single GigE SX
port (UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-SX/T-E1)
These cards include the following interfaces:
One 599 Mbps OC-12c/STM4 port
One 10/100 Ethernet interface for management or data
One Gigabit Ethernet interface.This interface is twisted
pair, multimode fiber SX, or single mode fiber LX,
depending on the model.
Eight T1/E1 TDM ports that support either GR-303 or
V5.2.
Table 34: UP-O12/S4/GE/TDM-ATM/IP, UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-LX/T-E1, UP-O12-S4/

HP-GE-SX/T-E1specifications
Size 1 slot
Density 8 ports TDM T1/E1

1 port OC-12c/STM4

Overview

HP-GE-SX/T-E1specifications (Continued)
Physical TDM T1/E1: Amphenol 44 pin connector

interfaces OC-12c/STM4
• Connectors: Single mode fiber with SC connector
• Wavelength: 1274 nm minimum, 1356 nm maximum
• Tx min: -15 dBm, max: -8 dBm
• Receive sensitivity: -28 dBm maximum
• Reach: 10 km with 9/125 mm single mode fiber
1000 BaseT Ethernet fiber (LX)
• Connector: Dual fiber LC connectors (Tx and Rx)
• Tx min: -9 dBm, minimum: -3 dBm maximum
• Reach: 10 km with 9/125 mm single mode fiber
1000 BaseT Ethernet fiber (SX)
• Connector: Dual fiber LC connectors (Tx and Rx)
• Tx min: -9.5dBm, minimum: 0 dBm maximum
• Reach: 5 km with 50/125 mm multimode fiber
The optical interfaces are class 1 Laser International Safety
Standard IEC 825 compliant
RJ45 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet interface for management
Note: The 10/100/1000 Ethernet UTP and fiber

interfaces cannot both be active at the same time.


line cards (such as ADSL or SHDSL) and the Uplink card. The
the backplane.
supported.
• VPI: 0 to 7
• VCI: 32 to 1023
G.965 and ETSI EN 300 347-1 V2.2.2 (V5.2)
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) IEEE 802.3


4096 maximum GR-303 call reference values (CRVs) per
system

OC-12c/STM4/GigE Uplink card configuration

Voice AAL2 SAR for converting TDM bus voice traffic to

processing ATMG.711 encoding only
interface AAL5 Management VC termination (RFC 1483 routed) for
ATM in-band management
SNMP

OC-12c/STM4 link redundancy with separate fiber uplink to
standby card
1+1 TDM T1/E1 interface redundancy (with Y cable).
APS 1:1 bi-directional and 1+1 (with Y cable).
Power 50 W
consumption

This section describes optional configuration procedures for the OC-12c/
STM4/GigE Uplink cards. If these procedures are required, they should be
done before provisioning the system.
Changing the OC-12c/STM4/GigE card line type

If, after configuring the line type for a OC-12c/STM4/GigE Uplink card, you
need to change the line type, delete the Uplink card-profile and recreate it.

zSH> cd /card1
zSH> pwd
/card1/

zSH> mkdir onreboot
zSH> cd onreboot

example:
zSH> cd /card1
zSH> pwd
/card1/

zSH> delete card-profile 1/1/5029 UP-O12/S4/GE/TDM-ATM/IP
card
or
zSH> delete card-profile 1/1/5035 UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-LX/T-E1
or UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-SX/T-E1 card
For the UP-O12/S4/GE/TDM-ATM/IP card:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcoc12.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
....................
New record saved.
For the UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-LX/T-E1 or UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-SX/T-E1

card:


sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcgige.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
....................
New record saved.
Configuring ATM settings for OC-12c/STM4/GigE cards

To configure UP-O12/S4/GE/TDM-ATM/IP cards:
zSH> update card-profile 1/1/5029
sw-file-name: ---------> {malcoc12.bin}:
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
sw-enable: ------------> {true}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
....................
or
To configure UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-LX/T-E1 or UP-O12-S4/HP-GE-SX/
T-E1 cards:
zSH> update card-profile 1/1/5035 for the HP OC3C/STM4 card

sw-file-name: ---------> {malcgige.bin}:

upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
sw-enable: ------------> {true}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
....................
Connecting redundant OC-12c/STM4/GigE Uplink cards

The OC-12c/STM4/GigE Uplink cards have a Y cable to provide redundancy
for the TDM interfaces. To connect the redundant cables:
1 Attach each 44-pin connector to the T1/E1 TDM connector on the Uplink
card.
Figure 45.)
Figure 45: Connecting redundant Uplink cards
For pinout information about the redundant T1/E1 TDM cable, see T1/E1
TDM cables, page 166.

Connecting the redundant APS cable

To support APS, a midplane cable must used to connect two OC12/STM4
cards. To connect the cards for APS 1+1 redundancy:
Connect the ports on the Uplink cards labeled 1+1 RDNT using the APS
1+1 cable.
Figure 46: Connecting the APS 1+1 redundant cable

The following table summarizes the commands required to configure
OC-12c/STM4 uplink interfaces on the MALC:
Action Command
Specify whether the card has T1 or E1 interfaces and update card-profile 1/1/5029
change the default the ATM settings (optional). See If your system is redundant, configure the T1/E1
Configuring ATM settings for OC-12c/STM4/GigE settings and the ATM settings on both the active and
cards on page 153 . standby cards.
Modify the OC-12c/STM4 interface. See Configuring update sonet-profile 1-1-1-0/sonet

the OC-12c/STM4 interface on page 157 If your system is redundant, configure the ATM settings
on both the active and standby cards.
Activate the interfaces in the if-translate profile. See update if-translate 1-1-1-0/sonet
Enabling/disabling the SONET interface on page 158.
(Optional) Configure APS. See Configuring APS on update aps-channel 1-1-1-0/sonet

page 163. update aps-group 1

The following table describes the supported sonet-profile parameters.
medium-type The type of SONET signaling.

Values:
sonet Synchronous Optical Network
sdh Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
Default: sonet
medium-line-coding Line coding for this interface. The only supported

value is sonetMediumCMI. This is used for
electrical SONET/SDH signals (STS-1 and
STS-3).
medium-line-type Describes the line type for this interface. The only
supported value is sonetLongSingleMode.
medium-circuit-identifier The SONET circuit identifier, determined by the

system installer.
Values:
string of up to 260 characters
medium-loopback-config How the SONET loopback is configured.
Values:
sonetnoloop SONET circuit, with no loop.
sonetfacilityloop All incoming data on the Rx
Used to check the circuit between a remote device
and the MALC and to test the MALC optical
module.
sonetterminalloop All of the data transmitted on
the Tx interface is also internally looped back to
the Rx interface. Used to verify that the ATM and
PHY layers are communicating.
sonetotherloop All incoming data on the Rx
Used to check the circuit between the IAD and a
remote unit and to verify that the optical module
and the SONET PHY are working.
path-current-width Indicates the type of the SONET/SDH Path. The

only supported value is sts12cSTM4.
clock-external-recovery Whether internal clocking can be recovered from

an external source.
Values:
enabled
disabled

clock-transmit-source The clocking source.

Values:
external155mhz Transmit clock synthesized from
an external 155.52 MHz source.
looptiming Uses the recovered receive clock as
the transmit clock.
localtiming Ether uses a local clock source or an
external clock is attached to the device containing
the interface.
throughtiming Uses a transmit clock derived
from the recovered receive clock of another
interface.
medium-cell-scramble- Specifies whether cell-level SONET scramble

medium-line-scramble- Specifies whether the line-level SONET scramble

Configuring the OC-12c/STM4 interface
Note: For short distance connections, you may need to add

attenuation to the OC-12c/STM4 interface.
For most configurations the default settings for the OC-12c/STM4 card
are appropriate. To view the OC-12/cSTM4 interfaces on the system, use
the list command:
zSH> list sonet-profile
To display the default sonet-profile for an interface, use the get

command:
medium-type: -----------------> {sonet}
medium-line-coding: ----------> {sonetmediumcmi}
medium-line-type: ------------> {sonetshortsinglemode}
medium-circuit-identifier: ---> {}
medium-loopback-config: ------> {sonetnoloop}
path-current-width: ----------> {sts12cstm4}
clock-external-recovery: -----> {enabled}
clock-transmit-source: -------> {localtiming}
medium-cell-scramble-config: -> {true}
medium-line-scramble-config: -> {true}
If you need to make changes to the default configuration, use the update
command.

Enabling/disabling the SONET interface

By default, the OC-12c/STM4 interface is inactive. During maintenance, or if
the port is not in use, the SONET interface should be in the down state.
The following example enables the SONET interface in shelf 1, slot 1,
port 1:
ifIndex: ----------> {12}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {1}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {sonet}:
ifName: -----------> {1-1-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.
To disable the interface:

ifIndex: ----------> {12}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {1}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {sonet}:
adminstatus: ------> {up}: down
ifName: -----------> {1-1-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.
Configuring Ethernet interfaces

Each MALC Uplink card provides a single 10/100 Ethernet interface. The
OC12/STM4/GE/TDM Uplink cards also have a Gigabit Ethernet interface.
The Gigabit interface is either twisted pair or fiber LX.

Note: The Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on the OC12/STM4 and the

OC12/STM4 high performance cards are configured in the same way,
except that the Gigabit interface on the high performance card will
autodetect the media (fiber or copper) and it does not interoperate
with 10/100 Mbps devices.
The table below describes the Ethernet parameters.
autonegstatus Enables autonegotiation. When enabled, the interface will

negotiate the options specified in the autoNegCap
parameter.
Options:
enabled Negotiate link attributes with remote partner. Final
link rate, duplex, and flow control, are determined by the
advertised capabilities on each end. The link will settle on a
speed/duplex based on the hierarchy described in the IEEE
802.3-2000 document.
disabled Do not negotiate. Link speed and duplex will be
forced to the parameters indicated in the 'mauType' field. If
the other end does not advertise those parameters (when in
autonegotiate mode), or if the other end wants to force the
link to a different speed/duplex combination, there will no
link.
Default: enabled
mauType Ethernet physical interface type.

Values:
mauOther Supported on UTP
mau10Baset Supported on UTP
mau10Basethd Supported on UTP
mau10Basetfd Supported on UTP
mau100Basetxhd Supported on UTP
mau100Basetxfd Supported on UTP
mau1000basethd Supported on UTP
mau1000basetfd Supported on UTP
mau1000baselxhd Supported on fiber
mau1000baselxfd Supported on fiber
mau1000basesxhd Not supported
mau1000basesxfd Not supported
Default: mau1000baselxfd (Gigabit Ethernet)

restart Forces auto-negotiation to begin link renegotiation. If

auto-negotiation signaling is disabled, this parameter has no
effect.
Values:
restart Forces auto-negotiation to begin link renegotiation.
The Ethernet interface also renegotiates the link whenever
the ether profile is saved.
norestart This value is not supported.
ifType The type of Ethernet. Should be set to the same value as the
mauType.
Values:
mauOther Supported on UTP
mau10Baset Supported on UTP
mau10Basethd Supported on UTP
mau10Basetfd Supported on UTP
mau100Basetxhd Supported on UTP
mau100Basetxfd Supported on UTP
mau1000basethd Supported on UTP
mau1000basetfd Supported on UTP
mau1000baselxhd Supported on fiber
mau1000baselxfd Supported on fiber
mau1000basesxhd Not supported
mau1000basesxfd Not supported

autoNegCap The capabilities of the Ethernet interface that are advertised

by this port. Note that multiple options can be specified by
adding a plus (+) sign between entries.
This parameter also controls flow control, which is used to
regulate the flow of traffic between endpoints. Flow control
cause the transmitter to stop sending traffic if it receives a
pause message from an overwhelmed far end.
For more information on flow control refer to IEEE
802.3-2000.
Values:
bOther Other or unknown
b100baseT4 Advertise 100BASE-T4
b100baseT2 Advertise 100BASE-T2 half duplex mode
b100baseT2FD Advertise 100BASE-T2 full duplex mode
b10baseT Advertise speed 10Mbps, duplex half and full
b10baseTFD Advertise speed 10Mbps, duplex full
b100baseTX Advertise 100BASE-TX half duplex mode
b100baseX Advertise 100BaseX
b100baseT Advertise speed 100Mbps, duplex half and full
b100baseTXFD Advertise 100BASE-TX full duplex
b100baseXFD Advertise 100BaseX full duplex
b1000baseX Advertise 1000BaseX full duplex
b1000baseT Advertise 1000Mbps, duplex full
b1000baseXFD 1000BaseX full duplex
bFdxPause Advertise pause for full duplex links
bFdxBPause Advertise Full (symmetric and asymmetric)
flow control
bFdxAPause Advertise Asymmetric flow control
bFdxSPause Advertise Symmetric flow control
Default:
b10baseTFD+b100baseTXFD+bFdxBPause+b1000baseT
FD (Gigabit Ethernet)

remotefault Indicates the state of the remote end of the Ethernet link.
Values:
noerror Link is operating normally.
offline Other end is not attempting to establish a link.
linkfailure Failed to establish a link. This could be caused
by different settings on either end of the link.
autonegerror Failed to establish a link because a matching
combination could not be found in the advertised
autonegotiation capabilities.
clksrc Determines which side of the link will provide clocking for
the link.
If both sides are configured for automatic, both ends of the
link negotiate which will be the master and which will be the
slave based on the rules in IEEE 802.3-2000. If both sides
are configured the same (either as master or as slave) the link
will not be established.
Values:
automatic The clock source is selected based on the rules in
the IEEE 802.3-2000. This is the recommended setting.
master The local side will attempt to provide clock for the
link.
slave The local will attempt to recover clock from the clock
generated by the far end of the link.
Default: automatic
Configuring the 10/100 BaseT interface

The default values in the ether profile are appropriate for most applications. If
you need to modify the settings:
1 Find the ifIndex of the Ethernet port. For example, for the first Ethernet
port on the first Uplink card:
zSH> ifxlate 1-1-1-0/ethernetcsmacd
ifIndex: ----------> {1}
shelf: ------------> {1}
slot: -------------> {1}
port: -------------> {1}
subport: ----------> {0}
type: -------------> {ethernetcsmacd}
adminstatus: ------> {up}
physical-flag: ----> {true}
iftype-extension: -> {none}
ifName: -----------> {1-1-1-0}
2 To view the defaults, use the get command:

zSH> get ether 1

APS
autonegstatus: -> {enabled}

mauType: -------> {mau100basetxfd}
restart: -------> {norestart}
ifType: --------> {mau100basetxfd}
autonegcap: ----> {b100baseTXFD}
remotefault: ---> {noerror}
clksrc: --------> {unused}
3 If you need to modify the profile, use the update command.
Configuring the 1000 BaseT interface

For the Gigabit Ethernet interface, settings you might need to configure
include the mauType and the autonegcap parameters:
1 Find the ifIndex of the Ethernet port. For example, for the second
Ethernet port (the Gigabit Ethernet port) on the first Uplink card:
zSH> ifxlate 1-1-2-0/ethernetcsmacd
ifIndex: ----------> {3}
shelf: ------------> {1}
slot: -------------> {1}
port: -------------> {2}
subport: ----------> {0}
type: -------------> {ethernetcsmacd}
adminstatus: ------> {up}
ifName: -----------> {1-1-2-0}
2 If required, use the update command to make changes to the Ethernet

interface configuration:
zSH> update ether 3
autonegstatus: -> {enabled}
mauType: -------> {mau100basetxfd} modify as necessary to support either UTP or fiber
interfaces
restart: -------> {norestart}
ifType: --------> {mau100basetxfd}
autonegcap: ----> {b10baseTFD+b100baseTXFD+bFdxBPause+b1000baseTFD}
remotefault: ---> {noerror}
clksrc: --------> {automatic}
....................
Record updated.
APS
Configuring APS
The system automatically creates the following APS profiles for SONET/
SDH OC3C/STM1 and OC12/STM4 uplink cards:

• aps-channel: configures the APS channels. There are two APS channel
per port. OC-3c/STM1 cards have 2 ports and therefore four APS
channels. OC-12/STM4 cards have 1 port and 2 APS channels.
• aps-group: configures the APS groups. There are up to two APS groups
on the system. Each APS group contains a working and protect channel.
The OC3C/STM1 card supports APS 1:1 protection. In the 1:1 protection
scheme, a working channel on one card carries the full traffic, while a protect
channel on another card is either idle or reserved for low priority traffic.
When a failure occurs on the working fiber, the destination switch moves the
data from the working fiber to the protect fiber.
The OC12/STM4 card supports both APS 1:1 protection and APS 1+1
protection. In the 1+1 protection scheme, a working card transmits the same
data in one direction on the working channel while a protect card
simultaneously transmits the same data in the opposite direction on the protect
channel. When both transmissions reach the destination switch, the data on
the protection channel is ignored. When a failure occurs on the working
channel, the destintation switch uses the tranmission from the protect channel.
The following tables describe how the SONET/SDH cards and ports are
assigned to APS groups and channels. These values cannot be changed. The
OC3C/STM1 card has 2 ports per card and requires assignments for each port.
Table 35: OC3C/STM1 Card APS Assignments

1 1 1 1
1 2 2 1
2 1 1 0
2 2 2 0
The OC-12/STM4 card has 1 port and requires
Table 36: OC12/STM4 Card APS Assignments

1 1 1 1
2 1 1 0
Note: The APS protocol runs on the protect or second SONET/SDH

card.
To configure APS:
1 Verify both the working and protect SONET/SDH interfaces are
configured identically, including the same card-group-id, and both are
enabled.

APS
2 Verify that the MALC working ports are connected to the working ports
on the SONET/SDH switch and the MALC protection ports are connected
to the protection ports on the SONET/SDH switch.
3 Activate the APS channels for the APS groups:
....................
Record updated.

....................
Record updated.
4 Activate the APS groups:

....................
Record updated.



....................
Record updated.
T1/E1 TDM cables

This section describes the following T1/E1 TDM cables available from Zhone
Technologies:
• Redundant T1/E1 TDM cable (OC12/STM4/GE Uplink card) on page 166
• Non-redundant T1/E1 TDM cable (OC12/STM4/GE Uplink card) on
page 169
Redundant T1/E1 TDM cable (OC12/STM4/GE Uplink card)
Figure 47: Redundant T1/E1 TDM cable
Table 37: P1 to P2 pinouts

TX 10(ring) Green/White P1-3 P2-5

T1/E1 TDM cables
Table 37: P1 to P2 pinouts (Continued)
4 RX 10(tip) White/Brown P1-19 P2-6

RX 10(ring) Brown/White P1-4 P2-31
TX 11(ring) Slate/White P1-5 P2-9

6 RX 11(tip) Red/Blue P1-21 P2-10
RX 11(ring) Blue/Red P1-6 P2-35

TX 13(ring) Brown/Red P1-9 P2-17
10 RX 13(tip) Red/Slate P1-25 P2-18
RX 13(ring) Slate/Red P1-10 P2-43









T1/E1 TDM cables
Table 39: P1 to P4 pinouts (Continued)

17 Ground Yellow/Orange P1-31 P4-32
Cable detect Orange/Yellow P1-32 P4-31
Non-redundant T1/E1 TDM cable (OC12/STM4/GE Uplink card)
There are two cables for the T1/E1 TDM interfaces on the OC12/STM4
Uplink card a redundant and a non-redundant version.
Figure 48: Non-redundant T1/E1 TDM cable
Table 40: Non-redundant 8-port T1/E1 to 50 pin connector cable pinouts


Table 40: Non-redundant 8-port T1/E1 to 50 pin connector cable pinouts (Con-







T1/E1 TDM cables
Table 40: Non-redundant 8-port T1/E1 to 50 pin connector cable pinouts (Con-




11
TDM/ATM UPLINK CARD (UPLINK-T1/E1-ATM/
TDM/IP)
This chapter describes the MALC TDM/ATM Uplink card and explains how
to configure it. It includes:
• T1/E1 TDM Uplink card configuration, page 176

TDM/ATM Uplink card (Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP)
Overview
The TDM/ATM Uplink card provides GR-303 and V5.2

support for the MALC. The card occupies a single slot in
the MALC chassis and has 16 T1/E1 ports. The first eight
ports are ATM T1/E1 ports; the second eight are TDM T1/
E1 ports. The ATM ports provide multiplexing and
demultiplexing of ATM traffic on the cell level as described
in the ATM Forum AF-PHY-0086.001.
The Uplink card also contains an Ethernet port for local
management, local LAN connectivity, or IP uplink; and a
serial (craft) port for local management.
The TDM ports receive GR-303 or V5.2 signaling and
convert it to PSTN analog signaling.
Note: Pulse dialing is not supported on the TDM/ATM

Uplink card.
Table 41: Uplink-T1/E1-TDM/ATM specifications
Size 1 slot
Density 16 ports:
8 ATM T1/E1 ports (ports 1 through 8)
8 TDM T1/E1 ports (ports 9 through 16)
Connectors One (1) 96-pin telco connector

One Ethernet 10/100 port
One RS-232D serial craft port
Supported line T1: 1.544 Mbps

rates E1: 2.048 Mbps

Overview
Table 41: Uplink-T1/E1-TDM/ATM specifications (Continued)
the backplane.
supported.
16 IMA groups are supported, as described in the ATM
forum AF-PHY-0086.001. Note that UNI and IMA mode are
not currently supported on the same card.
VPI/VCI ranges:
• VPI: 0 to 3
• VCI: 32 to 511


4096 maximum GR-303 call reference values (CRVs) per system
Power 36 W
consumption

T1/E1 TDM Uplink card configuration

This section describes optional configuration procedures for the T1/E1 TDM
Uplink card. If these procedures are required, they should be done before
provisioning the system.
Configuring ATM settings for T1/E1 ATM/TDM Uplink cards

To change the ATM bandwidth settings for the first 8 ports of the T1/E1
TDM IP Uplink cards:
zSH> update card-profile 1/1/5114 shelf/slot/type (type is 5114 for T1/E1 TDM IP Uplink cards)
sw-file-name: ---------> {malcT1E1Tdmf.bin}:
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
sw-enable: ------------> {true}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
....................
Changing the T1/E1 ATM/TDM Uplink card line type

If, after configuring the line type for a T1/E1 TDM Uplink card, you need to
change the line type, delete the Uplink card-profile and recreate it.

zSH> cd /card1
zSH> pwd
/card1/

T1/E1 TDM Uplink card configuration
zSH> mkdir onreboot

zSH> cd onreboot

example:
zSH> cd /card1
zSH> pwd
/card1/


sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcT1E1Tdmf.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: e1 | ds1
....................
New record saved.
Connecting redundant T1/E1 ATM/TDM Uplink cards

The T1/E1 TDM Uplink card has a redundant Y cable to provide card
redundancy. To connect the redundant cables:
1 Attach the 96-pin connector to the uplink connector on the Uplink card.
Figure 49.)

Figure 49: Connecting redundant T1/E1 TDM Uplink cards
For pinout information about the redundant T1/E1 TDM cable, see T1/
E1-ATM/TDM cables, page 187.

port card.


Action Command
interfaces on page 178. 9 to 16 (for the TDM Uplink card)
page 182.


• ESF framing
• B8ZS coding
• CSU mode
• HDB3 coding
Parameter Options

Values:
Default: esf for T1
e1 for E1

interface.
for E1.
hdb3 for E1
For information, see the MALC Configuration Guide.

characters.
information, see MALC Configuration Guide.

Parameter Options

circuitry.
Values:
Default: 0

Values:
enabled
disabled
Default: enabled

Values:
Default: csu

circuitry.
Values:
Default: csu00

Parameter Options

Values:
Default: true
Values:
HEC value.
HEC value.
Default: true

line-type: ----------------------> {esf}:
line-code: ----------------------> {b8zs}:
circuit-id: ---------------------> {ds1}:
signal-mode: --------------------> {none}:
fdl: ----------------------------> {fdlnone}:
ds1-mode: -----------------------> {other}:
protocol-emulation: -------------> {network}
signal-type: --------------------> {loopstart}
ds1-group-number: ---------------> {0}
line-power: ---------------------> {disabled}
Record updated.


ifindex: -----> {1}: .
shelf: -------> {1}:
slot: --------> {1}:
port: --------> {1}:
subport: -----> {0}:
type: --------> {ds1}:
ifName: -----------> {1-1-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.
active:
1:1:1:0

groups on the MALC:
Action Command



ima-group-profile.

Values:
active.
active.
not active.

Values:
1 to 8
Default: 1

Values:
1 to 8
Default: 1
group.
Values:
Default: ctc


interface.
Values:
0 to 255
Default: 1

is startup.
Values:
m32 32 cells
m64 64 cells
m128 128 cells
m256 256 cells
Default: m128

interface.
Values:
0 to 100
Default: 25

state.
Values:
1 or 2
Default: 2

state.
Values:
1 to 5
Default: 2

state.
Values:
1 to 5
Default: 1
testLinkIfIndex This parameter is used for testing the IMA link. See
MALC Configuration Guide for information.

testPattern This parameter is used for testing the IMA link. See
testProcStatus This parameter is used for testing the IMA link. See
Overview

• T1/E1-ATM-32
Links IMA group
1-4 1
5-8 2
9 - 12 3
13 - 16 4
17 - 20 9
21 - 24 10
25 - 28 11
29 -32 12



txImaId: ---------> {1}:
betaValue: -------> {2}:
....................
Record updated.
Moving IMA links

standby card:
If Index If Name
--------- ---------------
000736 1-3-1-0
000737 1-3-2-0

T1/E1-ATM/TDM cables
000738 1-3-3-0
000739 1-3-4-0
This section describes the following T1/E1-ATM/TDM cables available from
Zhone Technologies:
• Redundant TDM/ATM Uplink cable on page 187
• Non-redundant TDM/ATM Uplink cable on page 190
Redundant TDM/ATM Uplink cable
The TDM/ATM Uplink card can be redundantly configured by using active

and standby cards connected with a “Y” cable. Figure 50 shows the
96-pin-to-three-50-pin, redundant TDM/ATM Uplink cable. Table 42 lists the
pinouts.
Figure 50: Redundant TDM/ATM Uplink cable
Table 42: Redundant TDM/ATM uplink cable pinouts
Port Pair Signal Color From To
1 TX 1 Ring Blue/White P1-1 and P2-1 P3-1
1 TX 1 Tip White/Blue P1-2 and P2-2 P3-26

Table 42: Redundant TDM/ATM uplink cable pinouts (Continued)
2 RX 1 Ring Orange/White P1-3 and P2-3 P3-27

RX 1 Tip White/Orange P1-4 and P2-4 P3-2
3 TX 2 Ring Green/White P1-5 and P2-5 P3-5
2 TX 2 Tip White/Green P1-6 and P2-6 P3-30

4 RX 2 Ring Brown/White P1-7 and P2-7 P3-31
RX 2 Tip White/Brown P1-8 and P2-8 P3-6
5 TX 3 Ring Slate/White P1-9 and P2-9 P3-39
3 TX 3 Tip White/Slate P1-10 and P2-10 P3-34

6 RX 3 Ring Blue/Red P1-11 and P2-11 P3-35
RX 3 Tip Red/Blue P1-12 and P2-12 P3-10
7 TX 4 Ring Orange/Red P1-13 and P2-13 P3-13
4 TX 4 Tip Red/Orange P1-14 and P2-14 P3-38
8 RX 4 Ring Green/Red P1-15 and P2-15 P3-39
RX 4 Tip Red/Green P1-16 and P2-16 P3-14

9 TX 5 Ring Brown/Red P1-17 and P2-17 P3-17
5 TX 5 Tip Red/Brown P1-18 and P2-18 P3-42
10 RX 5 Ring Slate/Red P1-19 and P2-19 P3-43
RX 5 Tip Red/Slate P1-20 and P2-20 P3-18
11 TX 6 Ring Blue/Black P1-21 and P2-21 P3-21
6 TX 6 Tip Black/Blue P1-22 and P2-22 P3-46
12 RX 6 Ring Orange/Black P1-23 and P2-23 P3-47
RX 6 Tip Black/Orange P1-24 and P2-24 P3-22






21 TX 11 Ring Brown/Red P1-41 and P2-41 P4-17
11 TX 11 Tip Red/Brown P1-42 and P2-42 P4-42
22 RX 11 Ring Slate/Red P1-43 and P2-43 P4-43
RX 11 Tip Red/Slate P1-44 and P2-44 P4-18
23 TX 12 Ring Blue/Black P1-45 and P2-45 P4-21
12 TX 12 Tip Black/Blue P1-46 and P2-46 P4-46

24 RX 12 Ring Orange/Black P1-47 and P2-47 P4-47
RX 12 Tip Black/Orange P1-48 and P2-48 P4-22




Non-redundant TDM/ATM Uplink cable
Figure 51 shows the 96-pin-to-four-50-pin, non-redundant TDM/ATM Uplink

cable. Table 43 lists the pinouts.
Figure 51: Non-Redundant TDM/ATM Uplink cable
Table 43: Non-redundant TDM/ATM uplink cable pinouts
1 TX 1 Ring Blue/White P1-1 P2-1

1 TX 1 Tip White/Blue P1-2 P2-26
2 RX 1 Ring Orange/White P1-3 P2-27
RX 1 Tip White/Orange P1-4 P2-2
3 TX 2 Ring Green/White P1-5 P2-5
2 TX 2 Tip White/Green P1-6 P2-30
4 RX 2 Ring Brown/White P1-7 P2-31

RX 2 Tip White/Brown P1-8 P2-6

Table 43: Non-redundant TDM/ATM uplink cable pinouts (Continued)
5 TX 3 Ring Slate/White P1-9 P2-39

3 TX 3 Tip White/Slate P1-10 P2-34
6 RX 3 Ring Blue/Red P1-11 P2-35
RX 3 Tip Red/Blue P1-12 P2-10

7 TX 4 Ring Orange/Red P1-13 P2-13
4 TX 4 Tip Red/Orange P1-14 P2-38
8 RX 4 Ring Green/Red P1-15 P2-39
RX 4 Tip Red/Green P1-16 P2-14

9 TX 5 Ring Brown/Red P1-17 P2-17
5 TX 5 Tip Red/Brown P1-18 P2-42
10 RX 5 Ring Slate/Red P1-19 P2-43
RX 5 Tip Red/Slate P1-20 P2-18
11 TX 6 Ring Blue/Black P1-21 P2-21
6 TX 6 Tip Black/Blue P1-22 P2-46

12 RX 6 Ring Orange/Black P1-23 P2-47
RX 6 Tip Black/Orange P1-24 P2-22



Table 43: Non-redundant TDM/ATM uplink cable pinouts (Continued)

21 TX 11 Ring Brown/Red P1-41 P3-17
11 TX 11 Tip Red/Brown P1-42 P3-42

22 RX 11 Ring Slate/Red P1-43 P3-43
RX 11 Tip Red/Slate P1-44 P3-18
23 TX 12 Ring Blue/Black P1-45 P3-21
12 TX 12 Tip Black/Blue P1-46 P3-46

24 RX 12 Ring Orange/Black P1-47 P3-47
RX 12 Tip Black/Orange P1-48 P3-22



12
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter explains how to configure the system level settings on the
MALC. It contains the following:
• Adding redundant Uplink cards, page 193
• Dual, non-redundant Uplink cards, page 200
• System clocking, page 204
Adding redundant Uplink cards

The MALC supports Uplink card redundancy, in which two Uplink cards are
installed in the system, one primary and one standby. The card installed in the
lower slot becomes the primary card, and shares configuration information
with the standby card. If the primary card goes down, the standby card takes
over.
After install an Uplink card in the MALC chassis, you can add a redundant
Uplink by installing a card of the same type and creating a new card-profile
for it.
Caution: Both Uplink cards in a redundant pair must have flash

cards of the same size and must be running the same software version.
Ensure all redundant and spare Uplink cards are upgraded to the
current software version.

System Configuration
The following table describes the parameters in the card-profile used to

configure Uplink cards:
card-group-id The unique redundancy group to which the card is assigned. A card group can contain at
most two cards and redundant card pairs must be in the same card group.
Note that you cannot change a non-zero card-group-id. The card-profile must be
deleted and reprovisioned.
Values:
0 to 65535
Default: 1 (for Uplink cards)
2 (for MTAC/Ring cards)
0 (for non-redundant cards)
weight A weight given to this card that determines whether this card should become the active
card after both cards are reset. Cards in a card group negotiate which cards are active and
standby by comparing weights. Cards with higher preferences become active. If multiple
cards have the same weight, the card in the lower numbered slot becomes active.
Values:
noPreference No preference.
neveractive The card never becomes active.
slightpreference
mediumpreference
highpreference
Default: noPreference

card-line-type Specifies the line type of the card and the signaling that runs over it. Does not apply to
OC3C/STM1 Uplink cards or OC12/S4/GE/TDM Uplink cards (for these cards, enter any
value):
Values:
e1 E1 UNI mode (T1/E1 IMA Uplink card)
ds1 DS1 UNI mode (T1/E1 IMA Uplink card)
e1-ima E1 ATM IMA mode (T1/E1 IMA Uplink card)
ds1-ima DS1 ATM IMA mode (T1/E1 IMA Uplink card)
e3 E3 UNI mode (DS3/E3 Uplink card)
ds3 DS3 UNI mode (DS3/E3 IMA Uplink card)
t1-uni-gr303 T1 UNI mode of ATM and GR-303 TDM signaling (T1/E1 TDM Uplink
card)
t1-ima-v52 T1 IMA mode of ATM and GR-303 TDM signaling (T1/E1 TDM Uplink
card)
t1-uni-gr303 T1 UNI mode of ATM and GR-303 TDM signaling (T1/E1 TDM Uplink
card)
t1-ima-v52 T1 IMA mode of ATM and V5.2 TDM signaling (T1/E1 TDM Uplink card)

card-atm- Specifies the percentage of the uplink interfaces assigned to particular ATM service
configuration categories.
Values:
vbnrt95rt5 Specifies the following allocation:
• UBR: 1%
• nrt-VBR: 94%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 5%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 80%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 15%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 65%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 30%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 50%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 45%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 35%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 60%
• UBR: 5%
• nrt-VBR: 20%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 75%
• UBR: 1%
• nrt-VBR: 5%
• CBR/rt-VBR: 94%

Uplink cards on the MALC have the following types and software images:
Table 44: MALC Uplink card types
Card Type Name of software image
Uplink-DS3/E3 5009 malcds3.bin

malcds3raw.bin (Boot partition
image file)
Uplink-DS3/E3-ATM/IP 5109 malcds3f.bin

malcds3fraw.bin (Boot partition
image file)
Uplink-OC3C/STM1 5011 malcoc3.bin

malcoc3raw.bin (Boot partition
image file)
Uplink-OC3C/STM1-ATM/IP 5111 malcoc3f.bin
malcoc3fraw.bin (Boot partition
image file)
Uplink-T1/E1-IMA-8 5001 malct1ima.bin

malct1imaraw.bin (Boot partition
image file)
Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8 5101 malct1imaf.bin

malct1imafraw.bin (Boot partition
image file)
Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/TDM-16 5014 malcT1E1Tdm.bin

malct1e1tdmraw.bin (Boot
partition image file)
Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP-16 5114 malct1e1tdmf.bin

malct1e1tdmfraw.bin (Boot
partition image file)
Uplink-OC12/S4/GE/ 5029 malcoc12.bin
TDM-ATM/IP malcoc12raw.bin (Boot partition
image file)
Configuring redundant Uplink cards
Caution: You must configure redundant physical interfaces on both

the active and standby cards. This applies to all Uplink cards. In
addition, you must manually keep the configuration of the physical
interfaces on the active and standby cards in sync.



To configure the card-profile for a standby DS3/E3 Uplink card:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcds3.bin or malcds3f.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}: enter the same redundancy group ID as the primary Uplink card
....................
New record saved.
To configure the card-profile for a protection OC3C/STM1 Uplink card:

sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcoc3.bin or malcoc3f.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
....................
New record saved.
To configure the card-profile for a protection OC12/STM4 Uplink card:

sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcoc12.bin


upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
....................
New record saved.
To configure the card-profile for a standby T1/E1 IMA Uplink card:

sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malct1ima.bin or malct1imaf.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: e1 | ds1 | e1-ima | ds1-ima
....................
New record saved.
To configure the card-profile for a standby T1/E1 TDM Uplink card:

sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcT1E1Tdm.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:

....................
New record saved.
Verifying redundancy status

The showactivecards and showredundancy commands display
information about MALC redundancy.
The showredundancy command displays the status of the Uplink card
redundancy:
zSH> showredundancy
Redundancy status for card 01:01 - Safe, all services have redundant peers
01:01 is active storage
01:02 is standby storage
The showactivecards command displays the active cards for all

redundancy groups on the system:
zSH> showactivecards
Shelf/Slot Group Id Card Type
__________________________________
2: 1/1 1 MALC DS3
Dual, non-redundant Uplink cards

The MALC chassis can include two non-redundant DS3/E3 or OC3C/
STM1 Uplink cards. In this configuration, only cell relay is supported and
there is no Uplink card redundancy.
Configuring non-redundant Uplink cards
Caution: Changing to non-redundant Uplinks requires you to erase

the system configuration and should only be done during a
maintenance window.
This procedure requires serial port access to the MALC.
By default, two Uplink cards of the same type in the same chassis are part of a
redundancy group. Converting these cards to non-redundant requires that you
reassign these cards to the redundancy group 0 (which means they are not
redundant).
To add non-redundant Uplinks:
1 Back up the configuration. To back up the configuration to the network:
a Create the file in the destination location of the TFTP server and
make it writable.

b Save the configuration using the dump command. The following

example saves the configuration to a file named malc.cfg on the host
192.168.8.21:
2 Erase the configuration:
zSH> set2default
3 Wait for the uplink card in slot 1 to reach the running state.
4 List the if-translate profiles. Note that the if-translate profile addresses
are in the form uplink1/type for port 1 and uplink2/type for port 2, and so
on. For example:
zSH> list if-translate
if-translate 1-1-1-0/ethernetcsmacd
if-translate ethernet1/other
if-translate 1-1-1-0/rs232
if-translate 1-1-1-0/sonet
if-translate uplink1/other
if-translate uplink2/other
if-translate 1-1-1-0/propvirtual
if-translate 1-1-1-0-propvirtual/other
if-translate uplink1/atm
if-translate uplink1/aal5
if-translate uplink1/rfc1483
if-translate uplink2/atm
if-translate uplink2/aal5
if-translate uplink2/rfc1483
if-translate 1-1-1-0-propvirtual/atm
if-translate 1-1-1-0-propvirtual/aal5
if-translate 1-1-1-0-propvirtual/rfc1483
18 entries found.
5 Update the card profile for slot 1 and set the card-group-id to 0. The
following example uses an OC3C/STM1 ATM/IP card:
zSH> update card-profile 1/1/5111
sw-file-name: -----------> {malcoc3f.bin}:
upgrade-vers: -----------> {}:
sw-enable: --------------> {true}:
card-group-id: ----------> {1}: 0
card-line-type: ---------> {ds1}: ** read-only **
card-atm-configuration: -> {vbnrt65rt30}:
....................


This will cause the removal of all associated
profilesand a slotreboot to create new if-translate
profilesbased on "uplinkx-y" names.
Record updated.
The system removes the profiles for the card and then reboots the card.
6 Wait for the Uplink card in slot 1 to reach the RUNNING state.
7 List the if-translate profiles. Note that for a single Uplink card, the
if-translate profiles addresses are in the form uplink1-1/type for port 1
and uplink1-2/type for port 2, and so on. For example:
if-translate ethernet1-1/other
if-translate uplink1-1/other
if-translate uplink1-1/atm
if-translate uplink1-1/aal5
if-translate uplink1-1/rfc1483
18 entries found.
8 Create a card-profile for slot 2, using 0 for the card-group-id.

sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcoc3f.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}: 0
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: ds1 | e1 enter line type of DS1 interface

....................
New record saved.
9 Wait for the Uplink card in slot 2 to reach the RUNNING state.
10 List the if-translate profiles. Note that the if-translate profiles addresses
are now in the form uplink1-x/type for the Uplink card in slot 1 and
uplink2-x/type for the Uplink card in slot 2, and so on. For example:
36 entries found.

Managing the MALC over a non-redundant Uplink
In a dual, non-redundant configuration, the system is managed over only one

of the Uplink cards a time. The first card active in the system (by default, the
card in the first slot) contains the management channel.
To maintain a management connection to the device, you should provision a
management channel on both Uplink cards. In this case, if the Uplink card
that is managing the MALC reboots, the other Uplink card takes over
management of the system. The management channel can either be over the
Ethernet or an ATM PVC. In either case, the IP addresses for each of the
Uplink cards must be on different subnets.
System clocking
The following table summarizes the tasks for configuring system clocking on
the MALC.
Task Command
Update the ds1-profile, update ds1-profile shelf-slot-port-subport/ds1

sonet-profile, or ds3-profile to The MTAC/Ring card has a single ds1-profile for the BITS clock
verify the type of clocking for the interface.
interface. See Configuring a DS1 or
MTAC/Ring clock source on or
page 206 update ds3-profile shelf-slot-port-subport/ds3
Configuring a DS3 clock source on or
page 207, update sonet-profile shelf-slot-port-subport/
Configuring an OC-3c/STM1 or sonet
OC-12c/STM4 clock source on
page 208.
Update the system-clock-profile to update system-clock-profile shelf-slot-port-0/
specify whether the clock is eligible type
and to assign a weight. See Where type is ds1, ds3, or sonet.
Configuring a DS1 or MTAC/Ring
clock source on page 206 The MALC creates system-clock-profiles for each interface in the system
that can provide clock. By default, interfaces are not eligible to provide
Configuring a DS3 clock source on clock and all interfaces have an equal weight of 5.
page 207.
If required, specify a system clock update system 0
in the system-profile. See Clock sources specified in the system-profile always override settings in
Configuring a clock source in the system-clock-profiles.
system profile on page 209.
Note: clock-source-profiles are recommended for configuring
clock sources.
Overview
The MALC can receive system clocking from one of the following sources:

System clocking
• The DS1 interfaces on the T1/E1 Uplink card

• The DS3 interfaces on the DS3 Uplink card
• OC-3c/STM1 interfaces on the OC3C/STM1 Uplink card
• OC-12c/STM4 interfaces on the OC12/STM4 Uplink card
• The BITS clock source on the MTAC/Ring card (which has a type of
DS1)
Note: Interfaces that are designated as eligible clock sources cannot

be set to through timing
The MALC creates system-clock-profiles for each interface that can provide
clock for the system. These profiles define the clock sources that are eligible
to provide system clock and defines the weights for the clock on the interface.
If there are multiple active interfaces configured as eligible clock sources, the
system selects a clock source based on the weight configured in the
system-clock-profile. If a primary clock source has been configured in the
system profile, this clock source overrides all other clocks.
Note the following information about redundant clock sources on the MALC:
• By default, interfaces are not eligible to provide clock.
• The clock source with the highest weight becomes the primary clock
source. Weights are from 1 (lowest priority) to 10 (highest priority).
• If a clock source is defined in the primaryclocksource parameter in the
system profile, that clock source takes precedence over the settings in the
system-clock-source profiles, if any. Clock sources defined in the system
profile are given a weight of 11.
• If you assign weight to a clock source that is higher than the currently
active clock source, or if you assign a clock source in the system profile,
the system will switch over to the new clock source.
The following table describes the parameters used to provide clocking for the
the system.

transmit-clock-source There are three clocking options for DS1/DS3

(ds1-profile, interfaces:
ds3-profile, or Values:
sonet-profile) looptiming The recovered receive clock from the
DS1/DS3 is used as the transmit clock.
localtiming A local (to the DS1/DS3 interface) clock
source is used on the DS1/DS3 transmit signal.
throughtiming The transmit DS1/DS3 clock is
derived from the recovered receive clock of another
DS1/DS3 interface. Interfaces that are designated as
eligible clock sources cannot be set to through timing.
Default: looptiming (DS3) throughtiming (DS1)
primaryclocksource The shelf-slot-port-subport/type of an interface to

(system profile) provide clocking for the system. For the BITS clock
on the MTAC/Ring card, specify the address in the
form shelf-slot-1-0/ds1.
Note: If configured, the setting in the

primaryclocksource parameter overrides
settings in the system-clock-profile for all
interfaces that provide clocking.
system-clock-eligibility Specifies whether the interface is eligible to provide

(system-clock-profile) clocking for the system.
Values:
true
false
Default: false
system-clock-weight Assigns a weight to the clock source. If you assign

(system-clock-profile) weight to a clock source that is higher than the
currently active clock source, the system will switch
over to that clock source.
Values:
1 to 10 1 is the lowest priority, 10 is the highest
Default: 5
Configuring a DS1 or MTAC/Ring clock source

1 Verify that the interface that is to provide clock is up and active.
2 Verify the transmit-clock-source parameter in the ds1-profile is set to
looptiming:
zSH> update ds1-profile 1-1-1-0/ds1 for the MTAC/Ring card, enter the shelf-slot-port-subbport
line-type: ----------------------> {esf}
line-code: ----------------------> {b8zs}

System clocking
send-code: ----------------------> {sendnocode}

circuit-id: ---------------------> {ds1}
loopback-config: ----------------> {noloop}
signal-mode: --------------------> {robbedbit}
fdl: ----------------------------> {fdlnone}
dsx-line-length: ----------------> {dsx0}
line-status-change-trap-enable: -> {disabled}
channelization: -----------------> {enabledds0}
ds1-mode: -----------------------> {csu}
csu-line-length: ----------------> {csu00}
clock-source-eligible: ----------> {eligible}
transmit-clock-source: ----------> {looptiming}
cell-scramble: ------------------> {false}
ds1-group-number: ---------------> {0}
....................
Record updated.
3 In the system-clock-profile, enable the clock source and change the

default weight (if necessary):
zSH> update system-clock-profile 1-1-1-0/ds1
system-clock-eligibility: -> {false}: true
system-clock-weight: ------> {5}:modify the weight if necessary
....................
Record updated.
Configuring a DS3 clock source

To configure a DS3 clock source:
2 Verify transmit-clock-source parameter in the ds3-profile is set to
looptiming:
line-type: ---------------> {dsx3cbitparity}:
line-coding: -------------> {dsx3b3zs}:s
end-code: ---------------> {dsx3sendnocode}:
circuit-id: --------------> {}:
loopback-config: ---------> {dsx3noloop}:
transmit-clock-source: ---> {looptiming}:
line-length-meters: ------> {0}:
line-status-trap-enable: -> {enabled}:
channelization: ----------> {disabled}:
ds1-for-remote-loop: -----> {0}:
far-end-equip-code: ------> {}:

far-end-loc-id-code: -----> {}:

far-end-frame-id-code: ---> {}:
far-end-unit-code: -------> {}:
far-end-fac-id-code: -----> {}:
medium-scramble-config: --> {true}:
medium-frame-config: -----> {e3frameg832}:
medium-atmframe-config: --> {dsx3atmframingdirectcellmapped}:
Record updated.

system-clock-weight: ------> {5}:modify the wieght if necessary
....................
Record updated.
Configuring an OC-3c/STM1 or OC-12c/STM4 clock source

To configure a OC-3c/STM1 clock source:
2 Verify clock-transmit-source parameter in the sonet-profile is set
looptiming:
medium-line-type: ------------> {sonetlongsinglemode}:

system-clock-weight: ------> {5}:modify the wieght if necessary
....................
Record updated.

System clocking
Revertive clock source

Redundant clock sources are revertive by default. If a standby clock source
becomes active after the failure of a primary clock source, the system will
revert to the primary clock source after that clock source becomes active
again. Note that the clock source must be active for 30 seconds before the
system will revert back to the primary clock source.
To disable revertive clock sources set the revertiveclocksource
parameter in the system profile to false:
syscontact: -----------> {Zhone Global Services and Support 7001 Oakport
Street Oakland Ca. (877) Zhone20 (946-6320) Fax (510)777-7113
support@zhone.com}:
sysname: --------------> {b142}:
syslocation: ----------> {Oakland}:
enableauthtraps: ------> {disabled}:
setserialno: ----------> {0}:
zmsexists: ------------> {true}:
zmsconnectionstatus: --> {inactive}:
zmsipaddress: ---------> {192.25.84.91}:
configsyncexists: -----> {false}:
configsyncoverflow: ---> {false}:
configsyncpriority: ---> {high}:
configsyncaction: -----> {noaction}:
configsyncfilename: ---> {192.25.202.142_4_1028333450007}:
configsyncstatus: -----> {synccomplete}:
configsyncuser: -------> {cfgsync}:
configsyncpasswd: -----> {** private **}: ** read-only **
numshelves: -----------> {1}:
shelvesarray: ---------> {}:
numcards: -------------> {3}:
ipaddress: ------------> {192.25.200.142}:
alternateipaddress: ---> {0.0.0.0}:
countryregion: --------> {us}:
primaryclocksource: ---> {0/0/0/0/0}:
ringsource: -----------> {internalringsourcelabel}:
revertiveclocksource: -> {true}: false
voicebandwidthcheck: --> {false}:
....................
Record saved.
Configuring a clock source in the system profile
Note: clock-source-profiles are recommended for configuring clock

sources.
Clock sources configured in the system profile override settings in

clock-source-profiles. Typically, specifying a clock source in the system

profile is not necessary, but can be use to manually change clock sources, or
for testing purposes.
Update the system profile to specify the clock source. The following
example specifies that the first T1 interface on the Uplink card provides
system clocking:
syscontact: ----------> {Zhone Global Services and
Support 7001 Oakport Road Oakland Ca. (877) Zhone20
(946-6320) Fax (510)777-7113 support@zhone.com}:
sysname: -------------> {Zhone Malc}:
setserialno: ---------> {0}:
zmsexists: -----------> {false}:
zmsipaddress: --------> {0.0.0.0}:
configsyncfilename: --> {}:
configsyncstatus: ----> {syncinitializing}:
configsyncuser: ------> {}:
configsyncpasswd: ----> {**private**}: **read-only**
numshelves: ----------> {1}:
numcards: ------------> {3}:
ipaddress: -----------> {192.168.8.21}:
primaryclocksource: --> {0/0/0/0/0}: 1-1-1-0/dsl
ringsource: ----------> {internalringsourcelabel}
....................
Record updated.
As soon as the profile is saved, the clock source specified becomes active.
Viewing clock source information

To view the clock information on the system, use the clkmgrshow
command. This command has the following syntax:
clkmgrshow [current | eligible | list ]
– current: displays the current primary and secondary clock sources.
– eligible: displays only the eligible clock sources. Eligible clock
sources are interfaces that are configured as eligible and are active.

System clocking
– list: lists the eligible and non-eligible clock sources. Non-eligible

clock sources are interfaces that either not configured as eligible, or
are not active.
For example, to display the eligible and non-eligible clock sources:
zSH> clkmgrshow list
eligible list has 0 entries
ineligible list has 5 entries

1 not eligible (4) 1/1/2 (5) : DS3 : LOOP
5 not eligible (26) 1/21/1 (5) : T1 : LOCAL


13
ADSL CARDS
This chapter describes the MALC ADSL cards and explains how to configure
them. It includes:
• Activating ADSL cards, page 232
• Configuring POTS ports, page 257
• ADSL cable and port pinouts, page 261
Overview
MALC ADSL interfaces provide a standards-based, high-speed DSL interface
between the MALC and CPE devices.
The following cards provide ADSL interfaces:
• ADSL-24: 24 ADSL interfaces in a single-slot card. See 24-port
single-slot ADSL card (ADSL-24) on page 216.
• ADSL+POTS-24-2S: 24 ADSL interfaces and 24 POTS interfaces in a
two-slot card. See 24-port ADSL+POTS card (ADSL+POTS-24-2S) on
page 217.
• ADSL-32A: 32 ADSL interfaces in a single-slot card. See 32-port ADSL
card (ADSL-32A) on page 219.
• ADSL+POTS-32A-2S: 32 ADSL interfaces and 32 POTS interfaces in a
two-slot card. See 32-port ADSL+POTS card (ADSL+POTS-32A-2S) on
page 221.
• ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32AB-2S: 32 ADSL interfaces with splitter in a
two-slot card. See 32-port ADSL+Splitter card
(ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-2S) on page 223.
• ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S: 32 ADSL interfaces with splitter
that complies with UK standards in a two-slot card. See 32-port
ADSL+Splitter-UK card (ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S) on page 225
• ADSL-48A: 48 ADSL Annex A interfaces that support ADSL2 and
ADSL2+ standards. See 48-port ADSL cards (ADSL-48) on page 226
• ADSL-48B: 48 ADSL Annex B interfaces that support ADSL2 and
ADSL2+ standards. See 48-port ADSL cards (ADSL-48) on page 226

ADSL cards
• ADSL + SPLTR-48A-2S: 48 ADSL interfaces with splitter in a two-slot

card. See 48-port ADSL card with splitter (ADSL + SPLTR-48A-2S) on
page 228.
• ADSL+POTS-TDM/PKT-48-2S and ADSL+POTS-TDM-48-2S: 48
ADSL interfaces and 48 POTS interfaces in a two-slot card. See 48 port
ADSL+POTS (ADSL+POTS-TDM/PKT-48-2S and
ADSL+POTS-TDM-48-2S) on page 230.
MALC ADSL interfaces comply with the ANSI T1.413 Issue 2, G.992.1
(G.dmt) and G.992.2 (G.lite) specifications. They support:
• Annex A mode (ADSL over POTS)
• Fast or interleaved channel modes
Note: For information on configuring the POTS interfaces of the

ADSL card, see POTS cards on page 311.
Transmission modes
This section briefly describes the supported ADSL transmission modes.
G.lite
G.lite, defined in the International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
specification G.992.2, allows downstream speeds of up to 1536 Kbps.
Advantages of G.lite modems include:
• No voice splitters required at the customer premises to separate voice and
data traffic.
• Fast retrain capabilities enable the modems to respond quickly to
changing line conditions.
• Efficient power management capabilities allows the modem to reduce
power consumption during periods of low data transfer.
Full rate
Full rate T1 ADSL modem. This is used for connecting to full rate T1.413
issue 2 modems.
G.dmt
G.dmt is a higher-bandwidth variant of G.lite that provides for downstream
speeds of up to 8160 Kbps. G.dmt is defined in ITU specification G.992.1.

Overview
Rate adaption
The ADSL card supports rate adaption, which enables it to respond to

changing line conditions by adjusting the line rate. At startup, the ADSL
modems negotiate a data rate. If the line conditions change, the line drops and
the modems attempt to retrain (possibly at a different line rate).
Training
The ADSL modem uses signal-to-noise ratio measurements to adjust its

performance to maintain a bit error rate (BER) of 10-7 or better. The minimum
margin is the floor at which the modem will maintain a connection. The
maximum margin is the ceiling for power cutback. The target margin is the
lowest margin that the modem tries to achieve when training and adapting.
Figure 52: Signal-to-noise margins
connection drops
maximum and retrains
modem reduces power
signal-to-noise margin
to maintain connection
target level the modem trains to
modem attempts to
increase margin
minimum connection drops

and retrains
The system will try to attain the target signal-to-noise margin when training.
If the line reaches the maximum bit rate and the actual margin is below the
maximum margin, the line operates normally. If the margin rises above the
target margin, the modem drops the connection and retrains once, then drops
the power to enforce the maximum margin.
If, after a connection is made, the margin drops below the target margin, the
modem attempts to increase the margin. If the minimum margin cannot be
kept, the modem drops the connection and retrains.

ADSL cards
24-port single-slot ADSL card (ADSL-24)
The 24-port ADSL card occupies a single slot in the MALC

chassis. It supports the ANSI T1.413 Issue 2, G.992.1
(G.dmt) and G.992.2 (G.lite) ADSL standards.
The discrete multitone (DMT) modulation technique used in
G.dmt and G.lite modems modulates user data into as many
as 255 separate frequency-division multiplexed modem
channels. Each modem channel (or tone) occupies
approximately 4KHz of analog bandwidth. The ADSL
DMT modem does not use the first 20KHz of the signal,
which are the frequencies POTS lines use. The ADSL card
does not have an integrated splitter, it requires an external
splitter.
Table 45: ADSL-24 specifications
Size 1 slot
Density 24 ports ADSL
Connectors One (1) RJ-21X 50-pin telco connector
Standards ANSI T1.413.2 (auto-detected)

supported G.992.1 (G.DMT) (auto-detected)
G.992.2 (G.Lite)
G.994.1 (G.hs)
Line Annex A supported (ADSL over POTS)
characteristics Fast Path or Interleaved mode supported on a per port basis
Fast Retrain supported
Supported line 32 Kbps to 8160 Kbps (1536 Kbps for G.lite) downstream
rates 32 Kbps to 896 Kbps (512 Kbps for G.lite) upstream

Overview
Table 45: ADSL-24 specifications (Continued)
ATM support Cell Relay switching onto ATM bus to Uplink card
Default VPI/VCI ranges (per port):
• VPI: 0 to 1
• VCI: 32 to 255
Metallic test Look-out test

function
Redundancy None
Main ADSL chipset, 8 ports each

components
Power 30 W nominal (all ports initialized, no ports trained)

consumption plus
1.1 W additional per active ADSL interface
56.4 W maximum
24-port ADSL+POTS card (ADSL+POTS-24-2S)
The 24-port ADSL+POTS card occupies two slots

in the MALC chassis and provides 24 ports of
integrated ADSL and POTS service. It supports
the ANSI T1.413 Issue 2, G.992.1 (G.dmt) and
G.992.2 (G.lite) ADSL standards.
Each port on the card has an internal passive
splitter to separate the ADSL data traffic from the
POTS voice traffic. At the customer premise, the
IAD requires a splitter to separate the data and
voice traffic coming over a single line.
Each ADSL and POTS interface on the card is
configured in the same way as other similar
interfaces on the system.

ADSL cards
Table 46: ADSL+POTS-24-2S specifications
Size 2 slots
Density 24 ports ADSL, 24 ports POTS

G.992.2 (G.Lite)
G.994.1 (G.hs)
ADSL line Annex A supported (ADSL over POTS)

POTS line 2 wire POTS, Loop Start

characteristics 900 Ohm line impedance (POTS-24)
23mA loop current @ 18,000 feet loop length (long reach)
0-4KHz spectrum support only
Internal passive splitter.
Default VPI/VCI ranges (per ADSL port):
• VPI: 0 to 1
• VCI: 32 to 255
Metallic test Look-out test (ADSL and POTS)

function
Redundancy None

components
Power 37.4 W nominal (all ports initialized, no ports trained)

consumption plus
1.10 W additional per active POTS interface
96.68 W maximum

Overview
32-port ADSL card (ADSL-32A)
The 32-port ADSL card occupies a single slot in the MALC

chassis. It supports the ANSI T1.413 Issue 2, G.992.1 (G.dmt)
and G.992.2 (G.lite) ADSL standards.
G.dmt and G.lite modems modulates user data into as many as
255 separate frequency-division multiplexed modem
channels. Each modem channel (or tone) occupies
approximately 4KHz of analog bandwidth. The ADSL DMT
modem does not use the first 20KHz of the signal, which are
the frequencies POTS lines use.
The 32-port ADSL card does not have an integrated splitter, it
requires an external splitter.
Table 47: ADSL-32A specifications
Size 1 slot
Connectors One (1) Champ 64-pin telco connector

G.992.2 (G.Lite)
G.994.1 (G.hs)


ADSL cards
Table 47: ADSL-32A specifications (Continued)
• VPI: 0 to 1
• VCI: 32 to 255

function
Redundancy None

components

consumption plus
1 W additional per active ADSL interface
50 W maximum

Overview
32-port ADSL+POTS card (ADSL+POTS-32A-2S)
The 32-port ADSL+POTS occupies two slots in

the MALC chassis and provides 32 ports of
integrated ADSL and POTS service. It supports
the ANSI T1.413 Issue 2, G.992.1 (G.dmt) and
G.992.2 (G.lite) ADSL standards.
Each port on the card has an internal passive
splitter to separate the ADSL data traffic from the
POTS voice traffic. At the customer premise, the
IAD requires a splitter to separate the data and
voice traffic coming over a single line.
Table 48: ADSL+POTS-32A-2S specifications
Size 2 slots
Density 32 ports ADSL, 32 ports POTS
Connectors One (1) Amphenol champ 64-pin connector

G.992.2 (G.Lite)
G.994.1 (G.hs)
ADSL line Annex A supported (ADSL over POTS)


ADSL cards
Table 48: ADSL+POTS-32A-2S specifications (Continued)
POTS line 2 wire POTS, Loop Start

characteristics 900 Ohm line impedance
0-4KHz spectrum support only
Internal passive splitter.
Default VPI/VCI ranges (per ADSL port):
• VPI: 0 to 1
• VCI: 32 to 255
Metallic test Look-out test (ADSL and POTS)

function
Redundancy None

components

consumption plus
95 W maximum

Overview
32-port ADSL+Splitter card (ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-2S)
The 32-port ADSL+Splitter card occupies two slots

in the MALC chassis. It supports the ANSI T1.413
Issue 2, G.992.1 (G.dmt) and G.992.2 (G.lite) ADSL
standards.
Table 49: ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32AB-2S specifications
Size 2 slot
Connectors Two (2) Amphenol Champ 64-pin telco connectors

G.992.2 (G.Lite)
G.994.1 (G.hs)


ADSL cards
Table 49: ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32AB-2S specifications (Continued)
• VPI: 0 to 1
• VCI: 32 to 255

function
Redundancy None

components

consumption plus
50 W maximum

Overview
32-port ADSL+Splitter-UK card (ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S)
The 32-port ADSL+Splitter-UK card occupies two

slots in the MALC chassis. It supports the ANSI
T1.413 Issue 2, G.992.1 (G.dmt) and G.992.2 (G.lite)
ADSL standards. The splitter complies with UK
standards.
Table 50: ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S specifications
Size 2 slot

G.992.2 (G.Lite)
G.994.1 (G.hs)


ADSL cards
Table 50: ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S specifications (Continued)
• VPI: 0 to 1
• VCI: 32 to 255

function
Redundancy None

components

consumption plus
56.4 W maximum
48-port ADSL cards (ADSL-48)
There are two models of ADSL 48 port cards:

•Annex A
•Annex B
The ADSL Annex A 48-port card (ADSL-48) occupies a
single slot in the MALC chassis for ADSL-only or a double
slot for use with the internal splitter card. This card supports
ADSL Annex A, ADSL2, and ADSL2+.
ADSL2+ modems modulates user data into as many as 511
separate frequency-division multiplexed modem channels.
Each modem channel (or tone) occupies approximately
4KHz of analog bandwidth. The ADSL DMT modem does
not use the first 20KHz of the signal, which are the
frequencies POTS lines use. The ADSL card has an optional
integrated splitter.
The ADSL Annex B 48-port card (ADSL-48) occupies a
single slot in the MALC chassis. This card supports ADSL
Annex B.
G.dmt and G.lite modems modulates user data into as many

Overview
as 255 separate frequency-division multiplexed modem channels. Each

modem channel (or tone) occupies approximately 4KHz of analog bandwidth.
The ADSL DMT modem does not use the first 128 KHz of the signal, which
are the frequencies ISDN lines use. This ADSL card does not have an
integrated splitter. It requires an external splitter.
Table 51: ADSL-48 specifications
Size 1 slot


G.992.2 (G.Lite)
G.994.1 (G.hs)
G.992.3 and G.992.4 (ADSL2)
G.992.5 (ADSL2+)
Reach Extended ADSL2 (READSL2)

characteristics Annex B supported (ADSL over ISDN)
Fast Path or Interleaved mode supported on a per port basis
Supported line T1.413:

rates
• 32 Kbps to 12 Mbps downstream
• 32 Kbps to 1024 Kbps upstream
G.lite:
ADSL2+:
• 32 Kbps to 1024 Kbps (512 Kbps for G.lite) upstream
• VPI: 0 to 11
• VCI: 32 to 63

function
Redundancy None

ADSL cards
Table 51: ADSL-48 specifications (Continued)

components
Power 23 Watts nominal
plus
.72 W additional per active ADSL2+ port
.67 Watts additional per active ADSL port
57.5 W maximum total. This is at maximum distance with all
ports trained at ADSL2+ rates
48-port ADSL card with splitter (ADSL + SPLTR-48A-2S)
The ADSL Annex A 48-port card with splitter

(ADSL + SPLTR-48A-2S) occupies two slots in
the MALC chassis. This card supports ADSL
Annex A, ADSL2, and ADSL2+.
The discrete multitone (DMT) modulation
technique used in ADSL2+ modems modulates
user data into as many as 511 separate
frequency-division multiplexed modem
channels. Each modem channel (or tone)
occupies approximately 4KHz of analog
bandwidth. The ADSL DMT modem does not
use the first 20KHz of the signal, which are the
frequencies POTS lines use. The ADSL card has
an optional integrated splitter.

Overview
Table 52: ADSL-48 + splitter specifications
Size 2 slot
Connectors Two 96-pin telco connector

G.992.2 (G.Lite)
G.994.1 (G.hs)
G.992.3 and G.992.4 (ADSL2)
G.992.5 (ADSL2+)

rates
G.lite:
ADSL2+:
• VPI: 0 to 11 (can be configured up to 63)
• VCI: 32 to 63
448 VC-switched connections and 48 VP-switched
connections
function
Redundancy None

ADSL cards
Table 52: ADSL-48 + splitter specifications (Continued)

components
plus
48 port ADSL+POTS (ADSL+POTS-TDM/PKT-48-2S and

ADSL+POTS-TDM-48-2S)
Each 48-port ADSL+POTS cards occupies two slots

in the MALC chassis and provides 48 ports of
integrated ADSL and POTS service. It supports the
ANSI T1.413 Issue 2, G.992.1 (G.dmt) and G.992.2
(G.lite), G.992.3 and G.992.4 (ADSL2), G.992.5
(ADSL2+), and Reach Extended ADSL2
(READSL2) ADSL standards.
Each port on the card has an internal passive splitter
to separate the ADSL data traffic from the POTS
voice traffic. At the customer premise, the IAD
requires a splitter to separate the data and voice
traffic coming over a single line.
The ADSL+POTS-TDM/PKT-48-2S card supports
traditional TDM POTS services as well packet voice
for use in a VOIP network.
The ADSL+POTS-TDM-48-2S card supports
traditional TDM POTS services.
For information on the POT

Overview
Table 53: ADSL-48 + POTS specifications
Size 2 slot
Density 48 ports ADSL and 48 ports ADSL
Connectors One 96-pin telco connector

G.992.2 (G.Lite)
G.994.1 (G.hs)
G.992.3 and G.992.4 (ADSL2)
G.992.5 (ADSL2+)

rates
G.lite:
ADSL2+:
• VPI: 0 to 11 (can be configured up to 63)
• VCI: 32 to 63
connections
function
Redundancy None

ADSL cards
Table 53: ADSL-48 + POTS specifications (Continued)

components
plus
Activating ADSL cards

Each card installed in the system must have a card-profile. Each type of slot
card requires different settings in the card-profile.
Tip: You can specify the name of the software image for a card in a
card-profile or a type-module. Each card of a particular type can
share a single type-module.
Settings in type-modules can be overridden by settings in
card-profiles.
ADSL slot cards on the MALC have the following types and software images:
Table 54: ADSL card types
Card Type Name of software

image
ADSL-24 (single-slot AC5 ADSL) 5010 malcadslac5.bin
ADSL+POTS-24-2S 5005 malcadslpots.bin

ADSL-32A (single-slot AC6 ADSL) 5015 malcadslac6.bin
ADSL+POTS-32A-2S 5016 malcadslpotsac6.bin
ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32AB-2S 5017 malcadslspltac6.bin

ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S 5023 malcadslspltukt6.bin
ADSL-48A 5036 malcxdsl48.bin

(single slot ADSL Annex A)
ADSL+POTS-TDM-48-2S (two slot
ADSL Annex A with TDM POTS)
ADSL+POTS-48 TDM/PKT-48-2S
(two slot ADSL Annex A with TDM
POTS and packet voice support)

Table 54: ADSL card types (Continued)
Card Type Name of software

image
ADSL+SPLTR-48A-2S 5038 malcxdslspltanxa.bin

(two slot ADSL Annex A with splitter)
ADSL-48B 5039 malcxdsl48anxb.bin

(single slot ADSL Annex B)
Creating card-profiles for ADSL-24 cards

The following example create a card-profile for an ADSL card in shelf 1,
slot 13:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcadslac5.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................
New record saved.
Creating card-profiles for 32-port ADSL cards

The following example creates a card-profile for an ADSL-32 card in
shelf 1, slot 16:
sw-file-name: -----------> {} malcadslac6.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................

ADSL cards

New record saved.
Creating card-profiles for 32-port ADSL+POTS cards

The following example creates a card-profile for an
ADSL+POTS-32A-2S card in shelf 1, slot 18:
(enter the lower-numbered slot for cards which occupy two slots)
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcadslpotsac6.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................
New record saved.
Creating card-profiles for 32-port ADSL+Splitter cards

The following example creates a card-profile for a 32-port
ADSL+Splitter card in shelf 1, slot 8:
(enter the lower-numbered slot for cards which occupy two slots)
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcadslspltac6.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................
New record saved.

Creating card-profiles for 32-port ADSL+Splitter-UK cards

The following example creates a card-profile for a 32-port
ADSL+Splitter card in shelf 1, slot 5:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcadslspltukt6.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................
New record saved.
Creating card-profiles for 48-port ADSL cards

All 48 port ADSL cards use the same card type and software image: After
specifying the image name, assign a card-line-type to indicate the type of
card:
• unknowntype (the default): ADSL only
• adsl-pots: ADSL and TDM-based POTS
• adsl-pots-pv: ADSL and packet-based POTS
• adsl-splitter: ADSL+splitter
The following example creates a card-profile for an ADSL-48 Annex A
card in shelf 1, slot 12:
sw-file-name: -----------> {} malcxdsl48.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................

ADSL cards

New record saved.
Configuring an ADSL+POTS 48 card for TDM voice

1 View the type of card installed in the system:
zSH> slots
1: MALC DS3 F (RUNNING)
2: MALC DS3 F (LOADING)
4: MALC XDSL 48 POTS (LOADING)
10: MALC MTAC FC (RUNNING)
The POTS card in slot 4 is an ADSL+POTS-TDM-48-2S card, which

supports TDM voice only.
2 Create a card-profile for the ADSL+POTS card:
zSH> new card-profile 1/4/5036 slot 4
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcxdsl48.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: adsl-pots indicates TDM voice only
....................
New record saved.
Configuring an ADSL+POTS 48 card for packet voice

zSH> slots
6: MALC XDSL 48/with Packet Voice POTS
The POTS card in slot 6 is an ADSL+POTS-48 TDM/PKT card, which

supports packet voice only.
2 Create a card-profile for the ADSL+POTS card:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcxdsl48.bin


upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: adsl-pots-pv indicates packet voice
....................
New record saved.
Configuring a 48-port ADSL Annex B card

Create a card-profile for the ADSL Annex B card:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcxdsl48anxb.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................
New record saved.
Configuring a 48-port ADSL+Splitter card

Create a card-profile for the ADSL+splitter:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcxdslspltanxa.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:

ADSL cards

card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: adsl-splitter
....................
New record saved.
Verifying the slot card installation

After you save the card-profile record, the slot card in that slot resets and the
begins downloading their software image from the flash card. This could take
a few moments.
When the card has finished loading, a log message similar to the following is
displayed (if logging is enabled):
zSH> Card in slot slot-number changed state to RUNNING
You can also use the slots command and specify the slot number of the
card to view the state of the card. For example:
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL ANNEX B AC5
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110011
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Card-Profile ID : 1/15/5013
Shelf : 1
Slot : 15
State : LOADING indicates the card is booting up
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Heartbeat check : enabled
Longest hbeat : 51
Fault reset : enabled
Uptime : 0 hours, 0 minutes
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL ANNEX B AC5
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110011
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 15
State : RUNNING indicates the card is active
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 51
Uptime : 0 hours, 5 minutes

Configuring ADSL interfaces
To view the status of all the cards, use the slots command without any
arguments:
zSH> slots
1: MALC DS3 (RUNNING)
13: MALC ADSL (RUNNING)
15: MALC MTAC (RUNNING)

This section explains how to configure ADSL connections on the MALC. It
contains the following sections:
• Overview on page 239
• Configuring ADSL S=1/2 on page 248
• Configuring ADSL 2 and ADSL 2+ on page 252
Note: ADSL connections on the ADSL card and the ADSL + POTS
cards are configured in the same way.
Overview
The following table summarizes the commands required to configure ADSL

interfaces on the MALC:
Action Command
Configure the type of ADSL interface. See update adsl-profile shelf/slot/port

Configuring the ADSL transmission and channel mode where port is from:
on page 240.
1 to 24 (for 24 port ADSL cards)
Configure the downstream interface. See Configuring update adsl-co-profile shelf/slot/

an ADSL downstream interface on page 243. port
Configure the upstream interface. See Configuring an update adsl-cpe-profile shelf/slot/
ADSL upstream interface on page 245 port
Activate the interface. See Activating the interface on update if-translate shelf/slot/port
page 246
Configuring ADSL S=1/2. See Configuring ADSL update adsl-profile shelf/slot/port

S=1/2 on page 248. update adsl-co-profile shelf/slot/
port
Configuring ADSL2 or ADSL2+. See Configuring update adsl-profile shelf/slot/port

ADSL 2 and ADSL 2+ on page 252. update adsl-co-profile shelf/slot/
port

ADSL cards
Configuring the ADSL transmission and channel mode

Configure the ADSL transmission and channel mode in the adsl-profile. The
following parameters are supported in this profile:
adslTrellisModeEnabled Enables or disables trellis mode.
adslTransmissionMode ADSL transmission mode. Supported values:

Values:
autonegotiatemode : automatically
negotiates all supported transmission modes.
The modem uses the G.hs protocol to
negotiate a transmission mode in this order:
T1.413, then G.dmt, then G.lite.
fullratemode : automatically negotiates full
rate modes (G.dmt and T1 mode). G.dmt has
priority over T1 mode.
glitemode : G.lite. Supports only interleave
mode.
t1mode : Full rate T1
gdmtmode : G.dmt
ghsmode : the modem negotiates only G.dmt
and G.lite modes. G.dmt has priority over
G.lite.
adslChannelMode Specifies the channelization of the ADSL

line. Supported values:
Values:
fastonly
interleavedonly
adslMaxDownstreamToneIndex Specifies the maximum downstream active

tone.
Values:
32 (128KHz) to 511 (2044KHz) Each value
represents 4KHz.
Default: 255
• Changing this value causes the DSL
modems to retrain.
• The parameter is only supported on
MALC single-slot ADSL (24-port AC5
and 32-port AC6) cards

adslMinDownstreamToneIndex Specifies the minimum downstream active

tone.
Values:
represents 4KHz.
Default: 32
modems to retrain.
adslMaxUpstreamToneIndex Specifies the maximum upstream active tone.
Values:
represents 4KHz.
Default: 30
modems to retrain.
adslMinUpstreamToneIndex Specifies the minimum upstream active tone.

Values:
represents 4KHz.
Default: 6
modems to retrain.
adslPotsBypassRelayMaxDurat The maximum duration in seconds that an

ion ADSL POTS low-pass filter bypass relay will
remain active (closed). The relay will
automatically return a line back to normal
(open) mode when this timer has expired.
Values:
1 to 300
Default: 60
Only valid for ADSL-SPLTR-32 cards.
The following example accepts the defaults, which are appropriate for
most applications:

ADSL cards
zSH> update adsl-profile 1/12/1

adslLineConfProfile: ----> {}:
adslAlarmConfProfile: ---> {}:
adslTrellisModeEnabled: -> {true}:
adslNTRModeEnabled: -----> {true}:
adslTransmissionMode: ---> {autonegotiatemode}:
adslChannelMode: --------> {fastonly}:
....................
Record updated.
Configuring ADSL tone ranges

The MALC supports setting the active upstream and downstream tone ranges
for ADSL modems on the single-slot ADSL (24-port and 32-port) cards.
Although this is not typically required, changing the range of tones can affect
the maximum throughput of the channel as well as providing isolation from
certain interference.
The following parameters in the adsl-profile specify the range of active
tones for the DSL modem:
– AdslMaxDownstreamToneIndex
– AdslMinDownstreamToneIndex
– AdslMaxUpstreamToneIndex
– AdslMinUpstreamToneIndex
For POTS lines, the valid frequency range in the downstream direction is
128 KHz to 1020 KHz. In the upstream direction valid frequency range is
24 KHz to 120 KHz.
ADSL occupies from about 24KHz to 1100KHz. (The theoretical limit is
15 bits/Hz.)
Note: Changing of any of these parameters will cause the

modem to retrain.

Configuring an ADSL downstream interface

Configure the ADSL downstream interface in the adsl-co-profile. The
following parameters are supported in this profile:
rateMode The transmit rate adaptation configured on this

modem. Supported values:
fixed: The rate is negotiated at startup and remains
fixed. Modem speed is determined by the
fastMaxTxRate or interleaveMaxTxRate
parameters.
adaptatstartup: The rate is negotiated at startup
and remains fixed. Modem speed is determined by
the fastMaxTxRate or interleaveMaxTxRate
parameters. If the line is able to support a higher
rate, the rate above the minimum is assigned to the
available channel (either fast or interleave).
adaptatruntime: The rate is negotiated
dynamically and can vary between the maximum
and minimum configured rates. If the line
conditions change during runtime, the line speed is
adjusted.
targetSnrMgn Target signal to noise margin (in tenths of dBs).

This is the noise margin the modem must achieve
with a BER of 10-7 or better to successfully
complete initialization.
maxSnrMgn Maximum acceptable signal/noise margin (in

tenths of dBs). If the noise margin rises above this
the modem attempts to reduce its power output to
optimize its operation.
minSnrMgn Minimum acceptable signal to noise margin (in

tenths of dBs). If the noise margin falls below this
level, the modem attempts to increase its power
output. If that is not possible the modem will
attempt to re-initialize or shut down.
fastMinTxRate Minimum transmit rate (in bps) for channels

configured for fast transmission mode.
For a CO interface, the range is 32Kbps to
8160Kbps (1536Kbps for G.Lite).
interleaveMinTxRate Minimum transmit rate (in bps) for channels

configured for interleaved transmission mode.

ADSL cards
fastMaxTxRate Maximum transmit rate (in bps) for channels

maxInterleaveDelay Maximum interleave delay for this channel.

Interleave delay applies only to the interleave
channel and defines the mapping (relative spacing)
between subsequent input bytes at the interleaver
input and their placement in the bit stream at the
interleaver output. Larger numbers provide
greater separation between consecutive input bytes
in the output bit stream allowing for improved
impulse noise immunity, but at the expense of
payload latency.
Values:
0 0.5 ms
1 1 ms
2 2 ms
4 4 ms
8 8 ms
16 16 ms
32 32 ms
63 63 ms
interleaveMaxTxRate Maximum transmit rate (in bps) for channels

initFailureTrapEnable Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap.This trap

controls whether line up or line down traps are
sent while the system is booting up.
Default: disable
Note: If the interface is configured for G.lite, change the

interleaveMaxTxRate parameter to a valid value for G.lite
(1536 Kbps or less).
The following example configures an ADSL downstream interface. Note

that you can accept most of the default values.
zSH> update adsl-co-profile 1/12/1
rateMode: -----------------> {adaptatstartup}:
rateChanRatio: ------------> {50}:
targetSnrMgn: -------------> {60}:
maxSnrMgn: ----------------> {310}:

minSnrMgn: ----------------> {0}:

downshiftSnrMgn: ----------> {0}:
upshiftSnrMgn: ------------> {0}:
minUpshiftTime: -----------> {0}:
minDownshiftTime: ---------> {0}:
fastMinTxRate: ------------> {32000}:
interleaveMinTxRate: ------> {32000}:
fastMaxTxRate: ------------> {8160000}:
maxInterleaveDelay: -------> {24}:
interleaveMaxTxRate: ------> {8160000}: for G..lite, change
to a value less than 1536000
thresh15MinLofs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLoss: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLols: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLprs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinESs: -----------> {0}:
threshFastRateUp: ---------> {0}:
threshInterleaveRateUp: ---> {0}:
threshFastRateDown: -------> {0}:
threshInterleaveRateDown: -> {0}:
initFailureTrapEnable: ----> {disable}
....................
Record updated.
Configuring an ADSL upstream interface
Note: If the interface is configured for G.lite, change the

interleaveMaxTxRate parameter to a valid value for G.lite (512
Kbps or less).
Configure the ADSL upstream interface in the adsl-cpe-profile. The

supported parameters in the upstream profile are identical to the CO profile,
with the following exceptions:
fastMinTxRate Minimum transmit rate (in bps) for channels

For a CPE interface, the range is 32 Kbps to
896 Kbps (512 Kbps for G.lite).
interleaveMinTxRate Minimum transmit rate (in bps) for channels


ADSL cards


The following example configures an ADSL upstream interface. Note that

you can accept most of the default values.
zSH> update adsl-cpe-profile 1/12/1
rateChanRatio: ------------> {50}:
targetSnrMgn: -------------> {60}:
maxSnrMgn: ----------------> {310}:
minSnrMgn: ----------------> {0}:
upshiftSnrMgn: ------------> {0}:
minUpshiftSnrMgn: ---------> {0}:
minDownshiftSnrMgn: -------> {0}:
fastMinTxRate: ------------> {32000}:
fastMaxTxRate: ------------> {2048000}:
interleaveMaxTxRate: ------> {2048000}: for G.lite, change to a value less than 512000
thresh15MinLofs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLoss: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLprs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinESs: -----------> {0}:
....................
Record updated.
Activating the interface

Activate the interface using the if-translate profile. The following
example activates the ADSL card in shelf 1, slot 12, port 1:
zSH> update if-translate 1-12-1-0/adsl
ifIndex: ----------> {156}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {12}:

port: -------------> {1}:

subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {adsl}:
ifName: -----------> {1-12-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.
Activate the rest of the interfaces similarly.

Use the dslstat command to displays the status of the interface:
zSH> dslstat 1-12-1-0/adsl
General Stats:
-------------
AdminStatus..................................UP
Line uptime(DD:HH:MM:SS)....................0:02:27:52
DslUpLineRate (bitsPerSec)...................512000
DslDownLineRate (bitsPerSec).................8064000
DslMaxAttainableUpLineRate (bitsPerSec)......565333
DslMaxAttainableDownLineRate (bitsPerSec)....856000
Out Octets...................................286571
Out Discards.................................0
Out Errors...................................0
In Octets....................................286571
In Discards..................................0
In Errors....................................0
ATM OCD Count................................0
ATM NCD Count................................0
ATM HEC Count................................0
ATM far-end OCD Count........................0
ATM far-end NCD Count........................0
ATM far-end HEC Count........................0
ADSL Physical Stats:

------------------
Actual Transmission connection standard......G.dmt
AdslAtucCurrLineSnrMgn (tenths dB)...........310
AdslAtucCurrLineAtn (tenths dB)..............135
AdslAtucCurrOutputPwr (tenths dB)............70
AdslAturCurrLineSnrMgn (tenths dB)...........90
AdslAturCurrLineAtn (tenths dB)..............135
AdslAturCurrOutputPwr (tenths dB)............103
LOFS.........................................0
LOLS.........................................0
LOSS.........................................0
ESS..........................................0
Inits........................................1

ADSL cards
Adsl connects................................1
Adsl disconnects.............................5407
near-end statistics:
-------------------
blocks received..............................147087
errored blocks received......................0
CRC errors on interleaved buffer.............0
CRC errors on fast buffer....................0
FEC corrected errors on interleaved buffer...0
FEC corrected errors on fast buffer..........0
background errored blocks received...........0
non-SES blocks received......................0
Severely Errored Seconds.....................0
Unavailable Seconds..........................59
Loss of Signal Seconds.......................0
Seconds with one/more FECs...................0
Seconds declared as high BER.................0
far-end statistics:
-------------------
blocks received..............................147205
Loss of Power (dying gasps)..................0
Fast retrains................................0
Fast retrain failures........................0
Configuring ADSL S=1/2
This section describes S=1/2 mode transmission on the MALC ADSL 32-port
and 32-port+Splitter cards.
The ADSL S=1/2 specification, as defined in the ITU standard G.992.2, is a
transmission mode that supports downstream data rates up to 12 Mbps at
distances of 6,000 feet or less.
The following ADSL 32-port and cards support S=1/2 mode transmission:
• ADSL-32A
• ADSL+POTS-32A-2S

• ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-2S
• ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S
• ADSL 48
Overview
There are two ADSL S=1/2 configurations:
• Configuring the ADSL transmission and channel mode on page 240
• Configuring S=1/2 transmission mode for interleaved mode on page 250
Modify the following parameters to enable S=1/2 transmission.
Configure interleaved channels in the adsl-profile:
adslChannelMode Specifies the channelization of the ADSL

line. Supported values:
Values:
fastonly
interleavedonly
Default: fastonly
Set the maximum transmit rate in the adsl-co-profile:


Configuring S=1/2 transmission mode for fast mode

1 Verify that the adminstatus of the if-translate profile for the ADSL port
is up:
ifIndex: ----------> {505}
shelf: ------------> {1}
slot: -------------> {12}
port: -------------> {1}
subport: ----------> {0}
type: -------------> {adsl}
adminstatus: ------> {down} up
ifName: -----------> {1-12-1-0}
....................

ADSL cards

Record updated.
2 Verify that the ADSL channelization is set to fast:

adslChannelMode: --------> {fastonly}: leave the default
....................
Record updated.
3 Set the maximum transmit rate to 12 Mbps for fast ADSL channel modes.
This forces the ADSL port into S=1/2 transmission mode.
rateChanRatio: ------------> {50}:
targetSnrMgn: -------------> {60}:
maxSnrMgn: ----------------> {310}:
minSnrMgn: ----------------> {0}:
upshiftSnrMgn: ------------> {0}:
fastMinTxRate: ------------> {32000}:
fastMaxTxRate: ------------> {8160000}: 12000000 12Mbps
interleaveMaxTxRate: ------> {8160000}:
thresh15MinLofs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLoss: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLols: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLprs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinESs: -----------> {0}:
....................
Record updated.
Configuring S=1/2 transmission mode for interleaved mode

1 Ensure the adminstatus of the if-translate profile for the ADSL port is
up:


ifIndex: ----------> {505}
shelf: ------------> {1}
slot: -------------> {12}
port: -------------> {1}
subport: ----------> {0}
type: -------------> {adsl}
adminstatus: ------> {down} up
ifName: -----------> {1-12-1-0}
....................
Record updated.
2 Set the ADSL channelization to interleaved:

adslChannelMode: --------> {fastonly}: interleavedonly
....................
Record updated.
3 Set the maximum transmit rate to 12 Mbps for interleaved ADSL channel
mode. This forces the ADSL port into S=1/2 transmission mode.
rateChanRatio: ------------> {50}:
targetSnrMgn: -------------> {60}:
maxSnrMgn: ----------------> {310}:
minSnrMgn: ----------------> {0}:
upshiftSnrMgn: ------------> {0}:
fastMinTxRate: ------------> {32000}:
fastMaxTxRate: ------------> {8160000}:
interleaveMaxTxRate: ------> {8160000}: 12000000 12Mbps
thresh15MinLofs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLoss: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLols: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLprs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinESs: -----------> {0}:

ADSL cards

....................
Record updated.
Configuring ADSL 2 and ADSL 2+
ADSL 2 and ADSL 2+ is supported on MALC ADSL 48 port cards only.

Configuring the ADSL 2 and ADSL 2+ interfaces

The following parameters are used to configure ADSL 2 and ADSL 2+
interfaces:
adslTransmissionMode ADSL transmission mode. Supported values:

(adsl-profile) Values:
autonegotiatemode : automatically
negotiates all supported transmission modes.
The modem uses the G.hs protocol to
negotiate a transmission mode in this order:
ADSL2+, ADSL2, then G.dmt.
fullratemode : automatically negotiates full
rate modes (G.dmt and T1 mode). G.dmt has
priority over T1 mode.
glitemode : G.lite. Supports only interleaved
mode.
t1mode : Full rate T1
gdmtmode : G.dmt
ghsmode :The modem uses the G.hs
protocol to negotiate a transmission mode in
this order: T1.413, G.dmt, then G.lite.
adsl2Mode the modem negotiates ADSL2
only
adsl2PlusMode the modem negotiates
ADSL2+ only
adslLineDMTConfMode Selects whether there is overlap of ADSL

(adsl-profile) Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) frequency bins.
Values:
echoCancel overlap of DMT frequency
bins. Only supported by g.dmt Annex A.
freqDivMux no overlap of DMT frequency
bins.
Default: freqDivMux
reachExtendedAdsl2 Defines whether downstream reach extended
(adsl-co-profile) ADSL2 (READSL2) operation should be
enforced by the ATU-C. Only enable for
ADSL2 and ADSL2+
Values:
enable
disable
Default: enable
1 There is typically no need to change the settings in ADSL profiles to

configure ADSL 2 or ADSL 2+. But if your setup requires it, use the
update command:

ADSL cards

adslLineConfProfile: ------------> {0000000334}:
adslAlarmConfProfile: -----------> {0000000334}:
adslTrellisModeEnabled: ---------> {true}:
adslNTRModeEnabled: -------------> {false}:
adslTransmissionMode: -----------> {autonegotiatemode}:
adslChannelMode: ----------------> {fastonly}:
adslMaxDownstreamToneIndex: -----> {511}:
adslMinDownstreamToneIndex: -----> {32}:
adslMaxUpstreamToneIndex: -------> {31}:
adslMinUpstreamToneIndex: -------> {6}:
adslPotsBypassRelayMaxDuration: -> {60}:
adslLineDMTConfMode: ------------> {freqdivmux}:
....................
Record updated.
2 Update the downstream interface to specify a line speed:

rateMode: -----------------> {adaptatruntime}:
rateChanRatio: ------------> {50}:
targetSnrMgn: -------------> {60}:
maxSnrMgn: ----------------> {310}:
minSnrMgn: ----------------> {0}:
downshiftSnrMgn: ----------> {0}:upshiftSnrMgn:
------------> {0}:
fastMinTxRate: ------------> {32000}:
fastMaxTxRate: ------------> {32736000}:
thresh15MinLofs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLoss: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLols: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLprs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinESs: -----------> {0}:
initFailureTrapEnable: ----> {disable}:
reachExtendedAdsl2: -------> {enable}:
....................
Record updated.
3 There is typically no need to change the settings for the upstream

interface, unless you want to configure trap thresholds. If your setup
requires it, use the update command:

zSH> update adsl-cpe-profile 1/3/1

rateMode: -----------------> {adaptatruntime}:
rateChanRatio: ------------> {50}:
targetSnrMgn: -------------> {60}:
maxSnrMgn: ----------------> {310}:
minSnrMgn: ----------------> {0}:
upshiftSnrMgn: ------------> {90}:
minUpshiftSnrMgn: ---------> {60}:
minDownshiftSnrMgn: -------> {60}:
fastMinTxRate: ------------> {32000}:
fastMaxTxRate: ------------> {1024000}:
thresh15MinLofs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLoss: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinLprs: ----------> {0}:
thresh15MinESs: -----------> {0}:
....................
Record updated.
4 Activate the interface using the if-translate profile:

ifIndex: ----------> {334}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {3}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {adsl}:
ifName: -----------> {1-3-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.
5 Use the dslstat command to displays the status of the interface:

zSH> dslstat 1-3-1-0/adsl
General Stats:
-------------
AdminStatus..................................UP

ADSL cards
Line uptime
(DD:HH:MM:SS)....................0:04:27:52
Out Octets...................................286571
Out Discards.................................0
Out Errors...................................0
In Octets....................................286571
In Discards..................................0
In Errors....................................0
ATM OCD Count................................0
ATM NCD Count................................0
ATM HEC Count................................0
ATM far-end OCD Count........................0
ATM far-end NCD Count........................0
ATM far-end HEC Count........................0
ADSL Physical Stats:

------------------
Actual Transmission connection standard......G.dmt
AdslAtucCurrLineSnrMgn (tenths dB)...........310
AdslAtucCurrLineAtn (tenths dB)..............135
AdslAtucCurrOutputPwr (tenths dB)............70
AdslAturCurrLineSnrMgn (tenths dB)...........90
AdslAturCurrLineAtn (tenths dB)..............135
AdslAturCurrOutputPwr (tenths dB)............103
LOFS.........................................0
LOLS.........................................0
LOSS.........................................0
ESS..........................................0
Inits........................................1
Adsl connects................................1
Adsl disconnects.............................5407
near-end statistics:
-------------------
blocks received..............................147087
far-end statistics:
-------------------

Configuring POTS ports
blocks received..............................147205
Loss of Power (dying gasps)..................0
Fast retrains................................0
Fast retrain failures........................0

Note: The MALC POTS-24 and ADSL+POTS-32A-2S cards do not
support pulse dialing or ground start signaling.
The following table summarizes how to configure a POTS interfaces on the

MALC:
Action Command
Configure the POTS gain settings. See update analog-if-cfg-profile index/voicefxs

Configuring POTS settings on page 257. Where index is of the form shelf-slot-port-subport or a user-defined
string.
For typical applications, the settings in this profile do not need to be
modified.
Configure the POTS signaling. See update analog-fxs-cfg-profile index/voicefxs

Configuring signal type and ring For typical applications, the settings in this profile do not need to be
frequency on page 260. modified.
Activate the POTS interfaces in the update if-translate index/voicefxs

if-translate profiles. See Activating
POTS interfaces on page 261.
Configuring POTS settings

Modify the following parameters in the analog-if-cfg-profile if you need to
change the gain settings for each voice line:

ADSL cards
if-cfg-impedence Specifies the terminating impedance of analog voice interfaces.

Values:
ohms600complex 600 Ohms + 2.16uF
Default: ohms600complex
if-cfg-receive-tlp The receive TLP is the signal level to the customer premises equipment (CPE). The
receive signal range is +3 dB to -9 dB. A positive number adds gain, a negative
number adds loss to the analog signal after decoding from PCM. For example, a
receive TLP setting of -6 dB will generate a voice signal at -6 dB level.
Values:
fxsrtlpn9db
fxsrtlpn8db
fxsrtlpn7db
fxsrtlpn6db
fxsrtlpn5db
fxsrtlpn4db
fxsrtlpn3db (not supported on the POTS 900 card)
fxsrtlpn1db
fxsrtlp0db
fxsrtlp1db
fxsrtlp2db
fxsrtlp3db
rtlpnummeric
Default: fxsrtlpn6db

if-cfg-transmit-tlp The transmit TLP is the signal level from the customer premises equipment (CPE).
The transmit signal range is +9 dB to -3 dB. A positive number adds loss, a negative
number adds gain to the analog signal before encoding to PCM. For example, a
transmit TLP setting of +3 dB will set a loss of 3 dB to generate a 0 dB PCM signal.
Values:
fxsTtlp9db (not supported on the POTS 900 card)
fxsTtlp7db
fxsTtlp6db
fxsTtlp5db
fxsTtlp4db
fxsTtlp3db
fxsTtlp2db
fxsTtlp1db
fxsTtlp0db
fxsTtlpN1db
fxsTtlpN2db
fxsTtlpN3db
Default: fxsTtlp0db
if-cfg-pcm-encoding Line encoding.

Values:
alaw for E1.
mulaw for T1.
if-cfg-receive-tlpNum Receive Transmission Level Point (RTLP) settings control the amount gain or loss
added to the incoming signal after it is decoded to analog. To incrase the signal level
set the RTLP setting to higher values. The default is 0 dB.
Values:
-160 to 85 (in tenths of dB)
Default: 0 dB
if-cfg-transmit-tlpNum Transmit Transmission Level Point (TTLP) controls the amount of gain or loss added
to a voice signal before it is encoded to digital PCM. To increase the signal level,
reduce the TTLP setting to lower value.
Values:
Default: 0 dB
If you need to modify the gain settings, update the analog-if-cfg-profile

for each interface. For example;:
zSH> update analog-if-cfg-profile 1-3-1-0/voicefxs
Please provide the following: (q=quit)
if-cfg-impedence: ------------>{ohms600complex}: modify if required
if-cfg-receive-tlp: ---------->{fxsrtlp0db}: modify if required

ADSL cards
if-cfg-transmit-tlp: --------->{fxsttlp0db}: modify if required

if-cfg-trunk-conditioning: --->{idle}:
if-maintenance-mode: --->{off}:
if-cfg-pcm-encoding: --->{mulaw}: alaw | mulaw
if-cfg-receive-tlpNum: -----> {0}:
if-cfg-transmit-tlpNum: ----> {0}:
....................
Record updated.
Configuring signal type and ring frequency

Modify the following parameters in the analog-fxs-cfg-profile if you need to
change signalling type and ring frequency for each voice line:
signal-type The method by which an off-hook condition is indicated.

Values:
fxsloopstart
Default: fxsloopstart
ring-frequency Rate in cycles per second (Hertz) at which polarity reversal
occurs on ringing.
Values:
ringfrequency20
ringfrequency25
ringfrequency30
ringfrequency50
Default: ringfrequency20
ring-back The ring back is requested if this variable is set to on.

Values:
on
off
Default: off
If you need to modify the signaling and ring frequency, update the
analog-fxs-cfg-profile for each interface. For example;:
zSH> update analog-fxs-cfg-profile 1-3-1-0/voicefxs
signal-type: ----> {fxsloopstart}
ring-frequency: -> {ringfrequency20} modify if required
ring-back: ------> {off} modify if required
....................
Record updated.

ADSL cable and port pinouts
Activating POTS interfaces

Update the if-translate records for the POTS interface to enable the line.
The following example activates the first POTS interface on the slot card
zSH> update if-translate 1-3-1-0/voicefxs
ifIndex: ----------> {132}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {3}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {voicefxs}:
ifName: -----------> {1-3-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.

This section describes the ADSL cables available from Zhone Technologies
and the ADSL port pinouts.
• ADSL 48 card pinouts on page 264
• ADSL cable pinouts on page 267
ADSL card port pinouts
This section describes the following ADSL port pinouts:

• ADSL 24 port card pinouts on page 261
• ADSL 32 port card pinouts on page 262
• ADSL 48 card pinouts on page 264
ADSL 24 port card pinouts

The ADSL-24, ADSL-24-2S, POTS-24-2S, and POTS-24 cards use standard
RJ-21X pinouts. Table 55 lists the port pinouts.

ADSL cards
Table 55: ADSL-24-2S, ADSL-24-2S, POTS-24-2S, and POTS-24 pinouts
Pin Function Pin Function
1 Channel 1 ring 26 Channel 1 tip



25 Not used 50 Not used
ADSL 32 port card pinouts

The ADSL-32A, ADSL+POTS-32A-2S, ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32AB-2S,
and ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S cards use standard Champ 64
pinouts. Table 56 lists the port pinouts.

Table 56: ADSL-32A, ADSL+POTS-32A-2S, ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32AB-2S,

and ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S pinouts





ADSL cards
Table 56: ADSL-32A, ADSL+POTS-32A-2S, ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32AB-2S,

and ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S pinouts (Continued)
ADSL 48 card pinouts

Table 57 lists the ADSL-48 card pinouts.
Table 57: 48-port ADSL card pinouts
Port Signal Pin
1 Tip J7-2
Ring J7-1
2 Tip J7-4
Ring J7-3
3 Tip J7-6
Ring J7-5
4 Tip J7-8
Ring J7-7
5 Tip J7-10
Ring J7-9
6 Tip J7-12
Ring J7-11
7 Tip J7-14
Ring J7-13
8 Tip J7-16
Ring J7-15
9 Tip J7-18
Ring J7-17
10 Tip J7-20
Ring J7-19
11 Tip J7-22
Ring J7-21

Table 57: 48-port ADSL card pinouts (Continued)
Port Signal Pin
12 Tip J7-24
Ring J7-23
13 Tip J7-26
Ring J7-25
14 Tip J7-28
Ring J7-27
15 Tip J7-30
Ring J7-29
16 Tip J7-32
Ring J7-31
17 Tip J7-34
Ring J7-33
18 Tip J7-36
Ring J7-35
19 Tip J7-38
Ring J7-37
20 Tip J7-40
Ring J7-39
21 Tip J7-42
Ring J7-41
22 Tip J7-44
Ring J7-43
23 Tip J7-46
Ring J7-45
24 Tip J7-48
Ring J7-47
25 Tip J7-50
Ring J7-49
26 Tip J7-52
Ring J7-51

ADSL cards
Port Signal Pin
27 Tip J7-54
Ring J7-53
28 Tip J7-56
Ring J7-55
29 Tip J7-58
Ring J7-57
30 Tip J7-60
Ring J7-59
31 Tip J7-62
Ring J7-61
32 Tip J7-64
Ring J7-63
33 Tip J7-66
Ring J7-65
34 Tip J7-68
Ring J7-67
35 Tip J7-70
Ring J7-69
36 Tip J7-72
Ring J7-71
37 Tip J7-74
Ring J7-73
38 Tip J7-76
Ring J7-75
39 Tip J7-78
Ring J7-77
40 Tip J7-80
Ring J7-79
41 Tip J7-82
Ring J7-81

Port Signal Pin
42 Tip J7-84
Ring J7-83
43 Tip J7-86
Ring J7-85
44 Tip J7-88
Ring J7-87
45 Tip J7-90
Ring J7-89
46 Tip J7-92
Ring J7-91
47 Tip J7-94
Ring J7-93
48 Tip J7-96
Ring J7-95
ADSL cable pinouts
This section describes the following ADSL cable pinouts:

• ADSL-32 to dual-50-pin cable pinouts on page 267
• ADSL-32 multi-connector cable pinouts on page 270
• ADSL-48 to dual 50-pin connector cable on page 278
ADSL-32 to dual-50-pin cable pinouts

Figure 53 shows the 32-port ADSL to dual-50-pin cable. Table 58 lists the
pinouts.

ADSL cards
Figure 53: 32-port ADSL to dual 50-pin cable
Table 58: 32-port ADSL to dual-50-pin cable pinouts
1 Tip White/Blue P1-33 P2-26
Ring Blue/White P1-1 P2-1
2 Tip White/Orange P1-34 P2-27
Ring Orange/White P1-2 P2-2
3 Tip White/Green P1-35 P2-28
Ring Green/White P1-3 P2-3
4 Tip White/Brown P1-36 P2-29

Ring Brown/White P1-4 P2-4
5 Tip White/Slate P1-37 P2-30
Ring Slate/White P1-5 P2-5

6 Tip Red/Blue P1-38 P2-31
Ring Blue/Red P1-6 P2-6
7 Tip Red/Orange P1-39 P2-32
Ring Orange/Red P1-7 P2-7
8 Tip Red/Green P1-40 P2-33
Ring Green/Red P1-8 P2-8

9 Tip Red/Brown P1-41 P2-34
Ring Brown/Red P1-9 P2-9

Table 58: 32-port ADSL to dual-50-pin cable pinouts (Continued)
10 Tip Red/Slate P1-42 P2-35

Ring Slate/Red P1-10 P2-10
11 Tip Black/Blue P1-43 P2-36
Ring Blue/Black P1-11 P2-11

12 Tip Black/Orange P1-44 P2-37
Ring Orange/Black P1-12 P2-12
13 Tip Black/Green P1-45 P2-38
Ring Green/Black P1-13 P2-13

14 Tip Black/Brown P1-46 P2-39
Ring Brown/Black P1-14 P2-14
15 Tip Black/Slate P1-47 P2-40
Ring Slate/Black P1-15 P2-15
16 Tip Yellow/Blue P1-48 P2-41
Ring Blue/Yellow P1-16 P2-16

17 Tip Yellow/Orange P1-49 P2-42
Ring Orange/Yellow P1-17 P2-17
18 Tip Yellow/Green P1-50 P2-43
Ring Green/Yellow P1-18 P2-18
19 Tip Yellow/Brown P1-51 P2-44
Ring Brown/Yellow P1-19 P2-19
20 Tip Yellow/Slate P1-52 P2-45
Ring Slate/Yellow P1-20 P2-20
21 Tip Violet/Blue P1-53 P2-46

Ring Blue/Violet P1-21 P2-21
22 Tip Violet/Orange P1-54 P2-47
Ring Orange/Violet P1-22 P2-22
23 Tip Violet/Green P1-55 P2-48
Ring Green/Violet P1-23 P2-23
24 Tip Violet/Brown P1-56 P2-49

Ring Brown/Violet P1-24 P2-24

ADSL cards
25 Tip Violet/Slate P1-57 P3-26

Ring Slate/Violet P1-25 P3-1



ADSL-32 multi-connector cable pinouts

The ADSL-32 multi-connector cable (CBL-ADSL-32-MC) is used to connect
three ADSL-32 cards to 4 standard 50 pin connectors.

Figure 54: ADSL-32 card multi-connector cable
Pinouts for this cable are listed in Table 59 through Table 64 on page 277.
Table 59: P1 to P4 (channels 1-24)



ADSL cards
Table 59: P1 to P4 (channels 1-24) (Continued)













ADSL cards










ADSL cards











ADSL cards




ADSL-48 to dual 50-pin connector cable

Table 57 lists the ADSL-48 card pinouts.

Figure 55: 48-port ADSL to dual 50-pin cable

ADSL cards
Table 65: 48-port ADSL to dual-50-pin cable pinouts
Pair Signal Color From To Binder group
1 Tip White/Blue P1-2 P2-26 1 (Blue)



13 Tip White/Blue P1-26 P2-38 2 (Orange)






ADSL cards
25 Tip White/Blue P1-50 P3-26 3 (Green)






37 Tip White/Blue P1-74 P3-38 4 (Brown)






ADSL cards

14
SHDSL CARDS
This chapter describes the MALC SHDSL cards and explains how to
configure them. It includes:
• Activating SHDSL cards, page 289
• Configuring SDSL interfaces, page 292
• Configuring SHDSL interfaces, page 297
• SHDSL pinouts, page 303
• Delivering power and data to a Raptor 100 SHDSL-LP, page 308
Overview
This section describes the following SHDSL cards:
• 24-port SHDSL card (G.SHDSL-24) on page 286
• SHDSL-24 card (SHDSL-24-LP) on page 287
• SHDSL 4-wire card (G.SHDSL-4W-12) on page 289

SHDSL cards
24-port SHDSL card (G.SHDSL-24)
The 24 port SHDSL card supports the G.991.2 (SHDSL)

standard.
Table 66: SHDSL-24 specifications
Size 1 slot
Density 24 ports
Physical One (1) RJ-21X 50-pin telco connector

interfaces
Standards ITU G.991.2

supported
Supported line 72 Kbps to 2368 Kbps

rates
• VPI: 0 to 1
• VCI: 32 to 255

Overview
Table 66: SHDSL-24 specifications (Continued)
Metallic test Look-in test

functions
Redundancy None
Main SLIC/Codec
components
Power 34.0 W nominal (all port initialized, no ports trained)

consumption plus
0.79 W additional per active SHDSL interface
52.96 W maximum
SHDSL-24 card (SHDSL-24-LP)
The LP IN port on the MALC SHDSL-24-LP card provides

12 pairs of wires to deliver power. The power is combined
with the data and sent out over the 24 SHDSL ports to
downstream MALC devices. One MALC SHDSL-LP card
can provide power and data for 6 MALC devices.

SHDSL cards
Table 67: SHDSL-24 -LP specifications
Specification Value
Size 1 slot
Density 24 ports
Physical One (1) RJ-21X 50-pin telco connector for data

interfaces One (1) DB-25 connector for delivering power
Standards ITU G.991.2

supported
Supported line 72 Kbps to 2368 Kbps

rates
• VPI: 0 to 1
• VCI: 32 to 255
Metallic test Look-in test

functions
Redundancy None
Main SLIC/Codec
components
Power 34.0 W nominal (all port initialized, no ports trained)

consumption plus
0.79 W additional per active SHDSL interface
52.96 W maximum

Activating SHDSL cards
SHDSL 4-wire card (G.SHDSL-4W-12)
The 4-wire SHDSL-12 card provides longer reach and

higher line rates than the existing 2-wire SHDSL-24 card.
Combining two channels for one subscriber line provides
twice the bandwidth.
The channels that can be combined must be consecutive
pairs (for example, 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 23 and 24).
Table 68: SHDSL card 4-wire specifications
Specification Value
Density 12 subscriber lines
Physical One (1) RJ-21X Champ 50-pin connector

interfaces
Line ITU G.991.2 SHDSL

characteristics
Redundancy None
Nominal line Symmetric rate increments up to 4.6 Mbps

rate
ATM support Default VPI/VCI ranges (per port):

VPI: 0 to 1
VCI: 32 to 255
Power 34.0 W nominal (all port initialized, no

consumption ports trained)
plus
0.79 W additional per active SHDSL
interface
43.48 W maximum

card-profiles.

SHDSL cards
The slots cards on the MALC have the following types and software images:
Table 69: MALC card types
G.SHDSL-24 and SHDSL-24-LP 5006 malcgshdsl.bin
G.SHDSL-4W-12 5030 malcgshdsl4w.bin
Creating card-profiles for G.SHDSL-24 or SHDSL-24-LP

cards
The following example creates a card-profile for a SHDSL card in shelf
1, slot 14:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcgshdsl.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................
New record saved.
Creating card-profiles for SHDSL 4-wire cards

he following example creates a card-profile for a 4 wire SHDSL card in
shelf 1, slot 19:
sw-file-name: -----------> {}: malcgshdsl4w.bin
upgrade-vers: -----------> {}:
card-group-id: ----------> {0}:
card-line-type: ---------> {unknowntype}:

....................
Record created.

a few moments.
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
State : LOADING indicates the card is still initializing
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 0
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
State : RUNNING indicates the card is functional
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 59
Uptime : 1 minute
arguments:
zSH> slots

SHDSL cards
Viewing active redundant cards

Use the showactivecards command to view all active cards in the system
that are part of a redundant card group:
__________________________________
1: 1/14 333 MALC MTAC
Configuring SDSL interfaces

The following table summarizes the commands required to configure SDSL
Action Command
Configure the type of SDSL interface and whether it is update dsl-config index/sdsl
acting as a CO or CPE device. See Specifying the type Where index is of the form shelf-slot-port-subport or a
of DSL interface on page 293. user-defined string.
Configure specific DSL interface settings, such as update sdsl-config index/sdsl

framing and compatibility. See Configuring an SDSL
interface on page 294.
Activate the interface. See Activating the interface on update if-translate index/sdsl
page 296
Verify the interface is active. See Verifying the showlinestatus shelf slot port
interface on page 297
Automatic baud rate adaption and fixed rate settings
When you select the sdsllatest line type for SDSL interface, or shdsllatest for
a SHDSL interface), the MALC can perform automatic baud rate adaption.
This allows receiving devices to communicate with transmitting devices
operating at different baud rates without the need to establish data rates in
advance. By determining the baud rate from the transmitting device, the
receiving MALC automatically trains to match the line rate of the incoming
data.
The automatic baud rate adaption process may take several minutes. This is
because the CO and CPE device modems use an algorithm to step through a
sequence of baud rates, where the devices establish a connection at each line
rate and then move to the next higher rate until they reach the final rate they
agree upon.
The following table describes how the fixed-bit-rate settings in the
sdsl-config and shdsl-config profiles affect training rates.

Table 70: Fix-bit-rate settings and modem train rates
CO CPE Then
Disabled Disabled highest available rate is negotiated.
Disabled Enabled Modems train at CPE’s fixed rate.
Enabled Disabled Modems train at CO’s fixed rate.
Enabled Enabled Modems train at lowest fixed rate.
Configuration restrictions
The same card can support a combination of SDSL and SHDSL ports with the
following restrictions:
• Configure the DSL modem in pairs (modems 1 and 2, modems 3 and 4,
and so on).
• Adjacent modems (ports 1 and 2, 3 and 4, and so on) must have the same
line-type. Each DSL modem supports 2 DSL ports.
• Adjacent modems must have the same framer-type (if configured for
SDSL).
• Adjacent modems must have the same unit-mode setting.
• Adjacent modems must have the same network timing recovery setting.
Other configuration settings, such as line speed, can differ for each line on the
card.
Specifying the type of DSL interface
Note: The IANA-ifType for SDSL interfaces is shdsl. The interface

name appears in profile indexes and system output.

SHDSL cards
The dsl-config profile supports the following parameters:
line-type The DSL type supported on this interface.

Values:
shdsl SHDSL. Not compatible with shdsllatest firmware.
sdsl SDSL. Not compatible with sdsllatest firmware.
shdsllatest Compatible with future versions of firmware code.
Required for autobaud.
sdsllatest Compatible with future versions of firmware code.
Required for autobaud.
Default: shdsllatest
Refer to the release notes for your device firmware revision
levels.
unit-mode Specifies whether the unit is configured as a CO or CPE

device.
Values:
co
cpe
Default: co
line-status-trap Specifies whether a line status trap should be sent whenever

-enable the DSL line goes up or down. Note that this setting does not
apply to line status traps sent during system bootup. During
bootup, line status traps are not sent.
A DSL link down trap has a moderate severity level and a link
up trap has a low severity.
Default: enabled
To specify the interface as an SDSL line, set the line-type in the

dsl-config profile:
zSH> update dsl-config 1-1-1-0/shdsl
line-type: -> {sdsl}: sdsl | sdsllatest
unit-mode: -> {coe}:
....................
Record updated.
Configuring an SDSL interface

By default, MALC DSL interfaces are configured as SDSL CO interfaces
with a line rate of 1,552 Kbps.

The sdsl-config profile supports the following parameters (all others should
be left at their default values):
config-line-rate The line rate.

Values:
line-rate-144kbps, line-rate-160kbps, line-rate-192kbps, line-rate-208kbps,
line-rate-2256kbps, line-rate-2288kbps
Default: line-rate-1552kbps
fix-bit-rate Enables or disables automatic baud rate adaption.

Values:
fix-bit-disable This value enables automatic baud rate adaption. If the CO and CPE
devices have different line rates at startup, the lower of the two rates will be selected.
fix-bit-enable This value is used for static (set) baud rates.
ntr Network timing recovery (NTR) specifies that the system synchronizes with an
external (network) clocking source.
Values:
ntr-enable the system synchronizes with the network.
ntr-disable the system relies on its own clocking source.
Default: ntr-disable
power-scale Adjusts transmit power in small increments to compensate for minor differences on
power between units.
Values:
17664 For loop lengths from 0 to 10 feet (0 to 3.05 meters). Equivalent to -3.39db.
20992 For loop lengths less than 4000 feet (1219.2 meters). Equivalent to -1.9db.
29952 For loop lengths greater than 4000 feet (1219.2 meters). Equivalent to
1.19db.

SHDSL cards
Note: If SDSL ports require network timing, network timing

recovery must be enabled for each port by setting the ntr
parameter in to ntr-enable.
The default sdsl-config profile enables automatic baud rate detection (if
the DSL line-type is sdsllatest). To specify a particular line rate, update
the profile:
zSH> update sdsl-config 1-15-1-0/shdsl
Please provide the following: ([q]uit)
config-line-rate: -> {line-rate-1552kbps}: line-rate-752kbps
fix-bit-rate: -> {fix-bit-disable}: fix-bit-enable
connect-mode: -> {flowpoint-mode}:
ntr: ---------> {ntr-disable}:
framer-type: -> {atm-clear-channel}:
power-scale: -> {17664}: 20992
....................
Record updated.
Note: If you are setting a fixed rate for the interface, both sides must
have the same setting or the line will not train.

example activates the SDSL/SHDSL line in shelf 1, slot 15, port 1:
zSH> update if-translate 1-15-1-0/shdsl
ifIndex: ----------> {156}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {15}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {shdsl}:
physical-flag: ----> {false}:
ifName: -----------> {}:
....................
Record updated.

Configuring SHDSL interfaces

The showlinestatus command displays the status of the interfaces in the
system. The following example displays the status of the line in shelf, slot
15, port 1:
zSH> showlinestatus 1 15 1
Search in progress .........
.................
GroupId --------> 129
Status ---------> ACTIVE (1)
TxClk ----------> NONE (1)
RefClkSrc ------> NO
If_index -------> 128
Peer If_Index --> 0
Shelf ----------> 1
Slot -----------> 15
Port -----------> 1
SubPort --------> 0

The MALC supports 2-wire and 4-wire SHDSL cards. These cards support
SHDSL as defined in ITU G.991.2. The cards are configured in the same way,
except that the line rates for the 4-wire card are different.
The following table summarizes the commands required to configure SHDSL
Action Command
Configure the type of SHDSL interface and whether it update dsl-config index/shdsl
is acting as a CO or CPE device. See Specifying the Where index is of the form shelf-slot-port-subport or a
type of DSL interface on page 293. user-defined string.
Configure specific DSL interface settings, such as update shdsl-config index/shdsl

framing and compatibility. See Configuring an SDSL
interface on page 294.
Activate the interface. See Activating the interface on update if-translate index/shdsl
page 296
Verify the interface is active. See Verifying the showlinestatus shelf slot port
interface on page 297
Specifying the type of DSL interface

The system creates dsl-config profiles for SHDSL cards with the
appropriate settings.
zSH> get dsl-config 1-6-1-0/shdsl
line-type: -> {shdsllatest}:
unit-mode: -> {co}:

SHDSL cards
See Configuring SDSL interfaces on page 292 for a description of the

values in the dsl-config profile.
SHDSL interfaces have the same configuration restrictions as SDSL
interfaces. For details, see Specifying the type of DSL interface on page 293.

Configuring a SHDSL line

The shdsl-config profile supports the following parameters (all others should
be left at their default values):
shdsl-config-line-rate The line rate. If the shdsl-fix-bit-rate parameter is enabled, the line will attempt to
train at this rate. Note that the DSL modem uses 8kbps for ATM framing and other
ATM overhead, so that effective line rate is 8kbps less that the configured rate. Note
that some of these rates (indicated by line-rate-4w) are only supported on the 4-wire
SHDSL card.
Values:
line-rate-2368kbps line-rate-4w-384kbps line-rate-4w-512kbps
line-rate-4w-640kbps line-rate-4w-768kbps line-rate-4w-896kbps
line-rate-4w-4480kbps line-rate-4w-4608kbps
Default: line-rate-2320kbps
shdsl-transmit-power- Indicates if transmit power backoff is used on the other end of the loop. When enabled,
back-off-mode the transmit power is reduced in steps of 1dB from 0 to 6 dB according to the received
power.
Values:
backoffdisable
backoffenable
Default: backoffenable

SHDSL cards
shdsl-fix-bit-rate Normally, if the CO side and CPE side select different line rates at startup, the lower of
the two rates will be selected. By using the fix bit rate the CO side can override the
default procedure and require startup at the rate specified in the
shdsl-config-line-rate.
Values:
fix-bit-disable This value enables automatic baud rate adaption, where the DSL
modem will train at the best achievable rate. If the CO and CPE devices have different
line rates at startup, the line will train up to the highest rate supported by both devices.
fix-bit-enable This value is used for static (set) baud rates. With this option, the line
will attempt to connect at the rate configured in the shdsl-config-line-rate.
Default: fix-bit-disable
shdsl-ntr Determines the clocking on the SHDSL line.

Values:
ntr-local-osc The line uses the system’s internal clock. Also known as local timing.
ntr-refck-8KHz The line uses an 8KHZ clock derived from a timing source such a
T1/E1 interface.
Default: ntr-local-osc
shdsl-clock-offset This parameter is used to help achieve a low frequency wander and jitter between
network and DSL system clock. This value can only be set on devices configured as
CO in the dsl-config profile.
Values:
-100 to 100 (in parts per million)
Default: 0
shdsl-repeater-id This value identifies if the STU is being used as a repeater.

Values:
noChangeRepeater
repeaterDisable
repeaterEnable
Default: repeaterDisable
shdsl-standard Determines the SHDSL standard used.

Values:
annex-a G.991.2 Annex A. Typically used in the United States.
annex-b G.991.2 Annex B. Typically used outside the United States.
Default: annex-b
shdsl-startup-margin Specifies the minimum desired target margin in dB for the local line conditions during
startup. Used to negotiate the bit rate during startup.
Values:
0 to 10
Default: 6

shdsl-wire-mode This setting disables or enables 4-wire-framing.

Values:
four-wire-disable Four wire framing is disabled. Use this setting for the 2 wire
SHDSL card.
four-wire-enable-bit-interleave Sends one bit on channel 1, then one bit on channel
2, as described in the ITU-T G.991.2, section E.2.
four-wire-enable-byte-interleave sends one byte on channel 1, and then one byte on
channel 2, as described in ITU-T G.991.2, section E.7
four-wire-enable-non-interleave Sends 12 bytes on channel 1, 12 bytes on second
channel 2.
Default: four-wire-disable
shdsl-frame-sync Not supported.
shdsl-decoder-coeffA 21 bit value corresponding to the decoder coefficient A or B, as defined in the G.991.2
shdsl-decoder-coeffB standard. Note that the default value is bit-reversed, when compared against the
recommended polynomials in the G.991.2 standard. Thus when you enter the 21-bit
value, it should be written bit-reversed also.
Values:
0 to 2097151
Default: 366 (for shdsl-decoder-coeffA)
817 (for shdsl-decoder-coeffB)
shdsl-power-scale Adjusts transmit power in small increments to compensate for minor differences in
power between units. The formula for the adjustment is:
adjustment (in dB) = 29952 * 10(shdsl-power-scale / 20)
The following values are recommended for different loop lengths.
Values:
17664 For loop lengths from 0 to 10 feet (0 to 3.05 meters). Corresponds to -3.39dB.
20992 For loop lengths less than 4000 feet (1219 meters). Corresponds to -1.9dB.
29952 For loop lengths greater than 4000 feet (1219 meters). Corresponds to
-1.19dB.
Default: 29298
To configure an SHDSL interface update the shdsl-config profile:

For a 2-wire interface:
zSH> update shdsl-config 1-6-1-0/shdsl
shdsl-config-line-rate: -------------> {line-rate-2320kbps}: line-rate-1552kbps
shdsl-transmit-power-back-off-mode: -> {backoffenable}:
shdsl-fix-bit-rate: -----------------> {fix-bit-disable}:
shdsl-ntr: --------------------------> {ntr-local-osc}:
shdsl-clock-offset: -----------------> {0}:
shdsl-repeater-id: ------------------> {repeaterdisable}:
shdsl-standard: ---------------------> {annex-b}:
shdsl-startup-margin: ---------------> {6}:

SHDSL cards
shdsl-wire-mode: --------------------> {four-wire-disable}:

shdsl-frame-sync: -------------------> {45}:
shdsl-decoder-coeffA: ---------------> {366}:
shdsl-decoder-coeffB: ---------------> {817}:
shdsl-power-scale: ------------------> {29298}:
....................
Record updated.
To configure a 4-wire SHDSL interface update the shdsl-config profile:

zSH> update shdsl-config 1-6-1-0/shdsl
shdsl-config-line-rate: -------------> {line-rate-2320kbps}:
line-rate-4w-4608kbps
shdsl-transmit-power-back-off-mode: -> {backoffenable}:
shdsl-fix-bit-rate: -----------------> {fix-bit-disable}:
shdsl-ntr: --------------------------> {ntr-local-osc}:
shdsl-clock-offset: -----------------> {0}:
shdsl-repeater-id: ------------------> {repeaterdisable}:
shdsl-standard: ---------------------> {annex-b}:
shdsl-startup-margin: ---------------> {6}:
shdsl-wire-mode: --------------------> {four-wire-disable}:
four-wire-enable-byte-interleave
shdsl-frame-sync: -------------------> {45}:
shdsl-decoder-coeffA: ---------------> {366}:
shdsl-decoder-coeffB: ---------------> {817}:
shdsl-power-scale: ------------------> {29298}:
....................
Record updated.

example activates the interface line in shelf 1, slot 6, port 1:
zSH> update if-translate 1-6-1-0/shdsl
ifIndex: ----------> {156}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {15}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {shdsl}:
ifName: -----------> {1-6-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.

SHDSL pinouts

Use the dslstat command to displays the status of the interface:
zSH> dslstat 1-6-1-0/shdsl
General Stats:
-------------
AdminStatus..................................UP
Out
Octets...................................1921747131
Out Discards.................................0
Out Errors...................................0
In
Octets....................................1921797746
In Discards..................................0
In Errors....................................0
ATM LCD Count................................1
DSL Physical Stats:
------------------
DslLineSnrMgn (tenths dB)....................384
DslLineAtn (tenths dB).......................246
DslCurrOutputPwr (tenths dB).................75
LOFS.........................................1
LOLS.........................................1
LOSS.........................................1
ESS..........................................9
CRC Errors...................................0
Inits........................................1
SHDSL pinouts
This section describes the following pinouts on the SHSDL cards:
• SDHSL-LP connector on page 303
• SHDSL-LP IN connector on page 304
• G.SHDSL 4-Wire pinouts on page 306
• SHDSL-24 pinouts on page 307
SDHSL-LP connector
Table 74 lists the SHDSL connector pinouts.

SHDSL cards
Table 71: SHDSL-24-LP pniouts
Pin Function Pin Function Power
1 Channel 1 ring 26 Channel 1 tip POS
2 Channel 2 ring 27 Channel 2 tip NEG



SHDSL-LP IN connector
The LP IN port on the MALC SHDSL-24-LP card provides 12 pairs of wires

to deliver power. The power is combined with the data and sent out over the
24 SHDSL ports to downstream Raptor 100 devices. One MALC SHDSL-LP
card can provide power and data for 6 Raptor 100 devices.

SHDSL pinouts
Figure 56 shows the pin locations for the MALC SHDSL-LP power
connector. Table 72 on page 305 lists the pinouts.
Figure 56: SHDSL-LP power connector
Table 72: Power connector pinouts
DB-25 pin Delivers power to Function Colors

MALC SHDSL-LP port
1 1 POSV1 White/Blue
14 2 NEGV1 Blue/White
2 3 POSV2 White/Orange
15 4 NEGV2 Orange/White
3 5 POSV3 White/Green
16 6 NEGV3 Green/White
4 7 POSV4 White/Brown
17 8 NEGV4 Brown/White
5 9 POSV5 White/Slate
18 10 NEGV5 Slate/White
6 11 POSV6 Red/Blue
19 12 NEGV6 Blue/Red
7 13 POSV7 Red/Orange
20 14 NEGV7 Orange/Red
8 15 POSV8 Red/Green
21 16 NEGV8 Green/Red
9 17 POSV9 Red/Brown
22 18 NEGV9 Brown/Red
10 19 POSV10 Red/Slate

SHDSL cards
Table 72: Power connector pinouts (Continued)
DB-25 pin Delivers power to Function Colors

MALC SHDSL-LP port
23 20 NEGV10 Slate/Red
11 21 POSV11 Black/Blue
24 22 NEGV11 Blue/Black
12 23 POSV12 Black/Orange
25 24 NEGV12 Orange/Black
13 N/A Not used N/A
G.SHDSL 4-Wire pinouts
The 4- wire SHDSL-12 cards use standard RJ-21X pinouts. Table 73 lists the
port pinouts.
Table 73: 4- wire SHDSL-12 pinouts
1 Port 1 ring 26 Port 1 tip




SHDSL pinouts
Table 73: 4- wire SHDSL-12 pinouts (Continued)


SHDSL-24 pinouts
The SHDSL-24 card uses standard RJ-21X pinouts. Table 74 lists the port
pinouts.
Table 74: SHDSL-24




SHDSL cards
Table 74: SHDSL-24 (Continued)



Delivering power and data to a Raptor 100 SHDSL-LP

This section describes how to connect the MALC SHDSL-LP card to a Zhone
Raptor 100 SHDSL-LP device. The MALC SHDSL-LP card delivers power
and data on the same wires. For distances of 10,000 feet (3,048 meters), two
pairs of wires delivering power are required.
The specifications for the cables delivering power are as follows:
• 2 wires per port
• 26 AWG (0.4 mm) or 24 AWG (0.5 mm)
The LP IN port on the MALC SHDSL-24-LP card provides 12 pairs of wires
to deliver power. The power is combined with the data and sent out over the
24 SHDSL ports to downstream Raptor 100 SHDSL-LP devices. One MALC
SHDSL-LP card can provide power and data for 6 Raptor 100 devices.
The wiring diagram below illustrates the wiring connections for power and
data being transmitted over the same pair of wires to a single MALC. To
power multiple MALC devices, uses the pinouts described in Table 72 on
page 305 to match SHDSL ports to the power pairs. Each set of four pins can
power a single Raptor 100.
For the SHDSL data connector pinouts, see SHDSL pinouts on page 303.

Delivering power and data to a Raptor 100 SHDSL-LP
Figure 57: Example power and data delivered over the same wire pairs for one
Raptor 100

SHDSL cards

15
POTS CARDS
This chapter describes the MALC POTS card and explains how to configure
it. It includes:
• 24-port POTS card (POTS-24 and POTS-900-24), page 312
• 48-port POTS card (POTS-TDM-48 and POTS-TDM/PKT-48), page 313
• Configuring POTS ports, page 317
Overview
The following cards provide POTS interfaces:
• POTS 24 card. See 24-port POTS card (POTS-24 and POTS-900-24) on
page 312.
• POTS 48. See 48-port POTS card (POTS-TDM-48 and POTS-TDM/
PKT-48) on page 313.
Note: For information on ADSL+POTS cards see ADSL cards on

page 213.

POTS cards
24-port POTS card (POTS-24 and POTS-900-24)
The 24-port POTS cards provide access to traditional 2-wire

analog voice circuits using tone dialing. They support loop
start and provides echo cancellation. The POTS cards
communicates with the Uplink card over the MALC TDM
and control bus. POTS voice traffic is converted from
G.711-encoded voice to ATM AAL2 and transmitted to the
voice network by the Uplink card. A standards-based voice
gateway, such as the MALC converts the voice traffic back
to TDM and forwards it to a class 5 switch.
The POTS-24 card supports 600 ohm impedance. The
POTS-900-24 card supports 900 ohm impendance.
Table 75: POTS-24, POTS-900-24 specifications
Specification Density
Size 1 slot
Density 24 ports
Physical interfaces One (1) RJ-21X 50-pin telco connector
Line characteristics 2 wire POTS, Loop Start

600 Ohm line impedance (POTS-24)
900 Ohm line impedance (POTS-900-24)
Metallic test Look-out tests

functions
Ring generation Ring voltage supplied through Ring Voltage bus
Ring Voltage Generator located on MT/Ringer/Alarm card
External generation possible through Ring Generator
access port on MTAC/Ring card.

Overview
Table 75: POTS-24, POTS-900-24 specifications (Continued)
Redundancy None
Main components ST Micro SLIC/Codec
Power consumption 12 W @ 30 mA nominal (no ports off hook)

plus
46.56 W maximum
48-port POTS card (POTS-TDM-48 and POTS-TDM/PKT-48)
There are two models of 48 port POTS cards:

•POTS-TDM-48 supports traditional 2-wire analog voice
circuits using tone dialing. It communicates with the
Uplink card over the MALC TDM bus and the control
bus. POTS voice traffic is converted from G.711-encoded
voice to ATM AAL2 and transmitted to the voice network
by the Uplink card. A standards-based voice gateway,
such as the MALC converts the voice traffic back to TDM
and forwards it to a class 5 switch.
•POTS-TDM/PKT-48 supports traditional TDM voice as
well as packetized voice for use in a VOIP network. This
card supports loop start and provides echo cancellation. It
communicates with the Uplink card over the MALC
packet bus and the control bus. POTS voice traffic is
packetized on the card and sent to a standards-based voice
gateway, such as the MALC voice gateway card. There the
voice traffic is converted back to TDM and forwarded it to
a class 5 switch.

POTS cards
Table 76: POTS-TDM-48 and POTS-TDM/PKT-48 specifications
Size 1 slot
Density 48 ports
Physical One (1) 96-pin telco connector

interfaces
Line 2 wire POTS, Loop Start

characteristics 40mA loop current @ 18,000 feet loop length (long reach)
Metallic test Look-out tests
functions
Ring Ring voltage supplied through Ring Voltage bus
generation Ring Voltage Generator located on MT/Ringer/Alarm card
External generation possible through Ring Generator access
port on MTAC/Ring card.
Redundancy None
Power 32 watts maximum

consumption
Configuring POTS cards

card-profiles.
POTS-24 5002 malcpots.bin

POTS-900 5002 malcpots.bin
POTS-TDM-48 5047 malcpots48.bin
POTS-TDM/PKT-48 5047 malcpots48.bin

Configuring POTS cards
MALC cards with 48 POTS ports can be configured to operate in TDM mode
or in packet voice mode, depending on the model of card installed. This
requires setting the card-line-type in the card-profile.
Configuring 24 port POTS cards

The following example creates a card-profile for a POTS card in shelf 1,
slot 13:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcpots.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................
New record saved.
Configuring a POTS 48 card for TDM voice

zSH> slots
8: MALC POTS 48 (LOADING)
The POTS card in slot 8 is a POTS-TDM-48 card, which supports TDM

voice only.
2 Create a card-profile for the card in slot 8:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcpots48.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:

POTS cards

card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: pots indicates TDM voice only
....................
New record saved.
Configuring a POTS 48 card for packet voice

zSH> slots
6: MALC POTS 48/with Packet Voice (LOADING)
The POTS card in slot 6 is a POTS-TDM/PKT-48 card, which supports

packet voice.
2 Create a card-profile for the POTS-48 card in slot 6:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcpots48.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: pots-pv indicates packet voice
....................
New record saved.

After you save the card-profile record, the slot card in that slot resets and
the begins downloading their software image from the flash card. This
could take a few moments.
When the card has finished loading, a log message similar to the
following is displayed (if logging is enabled):


Note: The MALC POTS-24 and ADSL+POTS-32A-2S cards do not
support pulse dialing or ground start signaling.
The following table summarizes how to configure a POTS interfaces on the

MALC:
Action Command
Configure the POTS gain settings. See update analog-if-cfg-profile index/voicefxs

Configuring POTS settings on page 317. Where index is of the form shelf-slot-port-subport or a user-defined
string.
For typical applications, the settings in this profile do not need to be
modified.
Configure the POTS signaling. See update analog-fxs-cfg-profile index/voicefxs

Configuring signal type and ring For typical applications, the settings in this profile do not need to be
frequency on page 320. modified.
Activate the POTS interfaces in the update if-translate index/voicefxs

if-translate profiles. See Activating
POTS interfaces on page 321.
Configuring POTS settings

Modify the following parameters in the analog-if-cfg-profile if you need to
change the gain settings for each voice line:

POTS cards
if-cfg-impedence Specifies the terminating impedance of analog voice interfaces.

Values:
Default: ohms600complex
if-cfg-receive-tlp The receive TLP is the signal level to the customer premises equipment (CPE). The
receive signal range is +3 dB to -9 dB. A positive number adds gain, a negative
number adds loss to the analog signal after decoding from PCM. For example, a
receive TLP setting of -6 dB will generate a voice signal at -6 dB level.
Values:
fxsrtlpn9db
fxsrtlpn8db
fxsrtlpn7db
fxsrtlpn6db
fxsrtlpn5db
fxsrtlpn4db
fxsrtlpn1db
fxsrtlp0db
fxsrtlp1db
fxsrtlp2db
fxsrtlp3db
rtlpnummeric
Default: fxsrtlpn6db

if-cfg-transmit-tlp The transmit TLP is the signal level from the customer premises equipment (CPE).
The transmit signal range is +9 dB to -3 dB. A positive number adds loss, a negative
number adds gain to the analog signal before encoding to PCM. For example, a
transmit TLP setting of +3 dB will set a loss of 3 dB to generate a 0 dB PCM signal.
Values:
fxsTtlp7db
fxsTtlp6db
fxsTtlp5db
fxsTtlp4db
fxsTtlp3db
fxsTtlp2db
fxsTtlp1db
fxsTtlp0db
fxsTtlpN1db
fxsTtlpN2db
fxsTtlpN3db
Default: fxsTtlp0db
if-cfg-pcm-encoding Line encoding.

Values:
alaw for E1.
mulaw for T1.
if-cfg-receive-tlpNum Receive Transmission Level Point (RTLP) settings control the amount gain or loss
added to the incoming signal after it is decoded to analog. To incrase the signal level
set the RTLP setting to higher values. The default is 0 dB.
Values:
Default: 0 dB
if-cfg-transmit-tlpNum Transmit Transmission Level Point (TTLP) controls the amount of gain or loss added
to a voice signal before it is encoded to digital PCM. To increase the signal level,
reduce the TTLP setting to lower value.
Values:
Default: 0 dB
If you need to modify the gain settings, update the analog-if-cfg-profile

for each interface. For example;:
zSH> update analog-if-cfg-profile 1-3-1-0/voicefxs
Please provide the following: (q=quit)
if-cfg-impedence: ------------>{ohms600complex}: modify if required
if-cfg-receive-tlp: ---------->{fxsrtlp0db}: modify if required

POTS cards
if-cfg-transmit-tlp: --------->{fxsttlp0db}: modify if required

if-cfg-trunk-conditioning: --->{idle}:
if-maintenance-mode: --->{off}:
if-cfg-pcm-encoding: --->{mulaw}: alaw | mulaw
if-cfg-receive-tlpNum: -----> {0}:
if-cfg-transmit-tlpNum: ----> {0}:
....................
Record updated.
Configuring signal type and ring frequency

Modify the following parameters in the analog-fxs-cfg-profile if you need to
change signalling type and ring frequency for each voice line:
signal-type The method by which an off-hook condition is indicated.

Values:
fxsloopstart
Default: fxsloopstart
ring-frequency Rate in cycles per second (Hertz) at which polarity reversal
occurs on ringing.
Values:
ringfrequency20
ringfrequency25
ringfrequency30
ringfrequency50
Default: ringfrequency20
ring-back The ring back is requested if this variable is set to on.

Values:
on
off
Default: off
If you need to modify the signaling and ring frequency, update the
analog-fxs-cfg-profile for each interface. For example;:
zSH> update analog-fxs-cfg-profile 1-3-1-0/voicefxs
signal-type: ----> {fxsloopstart}
ring-frequency: -> {ringfrequency20} modify if required
ring-back: ------> {off} modify if required
....................
Record updated.

Activating POTS interfaces

Update the if-translate records for the POTS interface to enable the line.
The following example activates the first POTS interface on the slot card
zSH> update if-translate 1-3-1-0/voicefxs
ifIndex: ----------> {132}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {3}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {voicefxs}:
ifName: -----------> {1-3-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.

POTS cards

16
VOICE GATEWAY CARD (VG-T1/E1-32-2S)
This chapter describes the MALC Voice Gateway card and explains how to
• Adding a voice gateway card, page 325
• Adding a redundant voice gateway card, page 326
• Pinouts, page 327
Note: For information on the slot cards supported with the voice
gateway card, see Packet voice support on page 29.
Overview
The voice gateway card is a 2-slot card and is available

in 4, 8, 16, or 32 port configurations for flexible TDM
access off of Resilient Packet Ring (RPR), IP or ATM
networks. This card supports up to 32 T1/E1s for
concurrent voice calls (128 protected 1+1 T1/E1 ports).
For ATM voice networks, the voice gateway card
supports Broadband Loop Emulation Service (BLES)
to either GR-303 or V5.2 signals as well as Emulation
Loop Control Protocol (ELCP) to V5.2 signals on the
local exchange switch.
For IP access, the voice gateway card supports Session
Initiation Protocol Private Line Automatic Ringdown
(SIP-PLAR) to either GR-303 or V5.2 signals on the
local switch.
Both VOIP and VoATM voice connections can be run
exclusively or concurrently on the same MALC system
and voice gateway card.
A MALC system also supports simultaneous voice
gateway connections and subscriber line connections
that use the same uplink card. However, subscriber line

Voice Gateway Card (VG-T1/E1-32-2S)
POTS or ISDN connections cannot be directly connected to the voice gateway

card on the same MALC system.
The following connection types are supported.
• Voice over ATM:
– BLES to GR-303 or V5.2
– ELCP to V5.2
• Voice over IP: SIP-PLAR to GR-303 or V5.2
Table 78: Voice gateway card specifications
Size 2 slots
Density 4, 8, 16, or 32 ports
Standards ITU-T G.703

supported ITU-T G.704
Supported line 1.544 MHz, 2.048 MHz

rates

function Metallic loopback relay
Power 55 watts
General 100/120 ohm balance
Support for 8 IG over 32 T1/E1 facilities
960 call capacity for concurrent off-hook DS0s
ATM AAL2 VoATM

VPI/VCI default values:
VPI: 0-7
VCI: 32-63
BLES-compliant, CAS Signalling over ATM AAL2:
• G.711, G.726, and G.729a encoding
• Silence suppression
• Echo cancellation (48ms tail echo)
• Audio profiles 7,8,9,10 for VoATM
• CAS, CCS and ELCP on V5.2
• Auto detect fax/modem calls and switch to G.711, disable
echo cancel/silence suppression
• Configurable jitter buffer

Adding a voice gateway card
Table 78: Voice gateway card specifications (Continued)
ISDN Allows ISDN telephony over packet networks

VOIP SIP PLAR support for VOIP:
• G.711, G.729a, and G.726 encoding
• Silence suppression
• Echo cancellation (48ms tail echo)
• Distributed SIP stack and RTP on every card
• CAS and CCS
• Auto detect fax/modem calls and switch to G.711, disable
echo cancel/silence suppression
• Configurable static or dynamic jitter buffer
• RFC2833 CAS transmission
• Configurable packet payload size
Adding a voice gateway card

To add a voice gateway card to the MALC, physically install the voice
gateway card in the desired slot location. Voice gateway cards are double-slot
cards that can be inserted into any slot except the first slot. After the card is
installed, create a card profile.
This example adds the voice gateway card to slot 3 and specifies the binary
file malct1e132vg.bin (for T1 connections). For E1 connections, specify the
malct1e132vgv52.bin file.
sw-file-name: -----------> {} malct1e132vg.bin
admin-status: -----------> {operational}
upgrade-sw-file-name: ---> {}
upgrade-vers: -----------> {}
admin-status-enable: ----> {enable}
sw-upgrade-admin: -------> {reloadcurrrev}
sw-enable: --------------> {false} true
sw-upgrade-enable: ------> {false}
card-group-id: ----------> {0}
hold-active: ------------> {false}
weight: -----------------> {nopreference}
card-line-type: ---------> {unknowntype} ds1
....................
Record updated.

Adding a redundant voice gateway card

The voice gateway card supports card-level redundancy. Configuring
redundant voice gateway cards requires 2 separate voice gateway cards and
intercard cabling to connect the cards.
Caution: Both cards in a redundant pair must be running the same

software version.
Although it may be helpful to place the redundant voice gateway cards close
to each other, redundant voice gateway cards do not need to be in contiguous
slot locations. Figure 58 shows redundant voice gateway cards with intercard
cabling installed.
Figure 58: Redundant voice gateway card cabling
pwr fail
active
fault
pwr fail
active
fault
8X
T1
E1
T
D
M
8X
T1
E1
T
D
M
ma0503

Pinouts
Configuring redundant voice gateway cards
Caution: You must configure redundant physical interfaces on both

the active and standby cards. This applies to all redundant cards. In
addition, you must manually keep the configuration of the physical
interfaces on the active and standby cards in sync.
Note: When configuring the redundant voice gateway card, the

settings in the card-profile for the both cards must be identical.
To add a redundant card to the system:

2 Install a second voice gateway card in an adjacent slot.
3 Create a card-profile for the second card:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malct1e132vg.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}: enter the same redundancy group ID as the primary card
....................
New record saved.
Pinouts
This section provides the pinout for the following voice gateway cables:
• Voice gateway non-redundant TDM cable on page 328
• Voice gateway redundant TDM cable on page 333

Voice gateway non-redundant TDM cable
Figure 59 shows the MALC voice gateway cable. P1 to channels 1-8,

page 328 through Table 82 on page 332 lists the pinouts.
Figure 59: MALC voice gateway cable
Table 79: P1 to channels 1-8
Pair Signal Color From Binder
1 TX 1 (tip) White/Blue P1-106 Blue
TX 1 (ring) Blue/White P1-105 Blue

2 RX 1 (tip) White/Orange P1-108 Blue
RX 1 (ring) Orange/White P1-107 Blue
3 TX 2 (tip) White/Green P1-110 Blue

TX 2 (ring) Green/White P1-109 Blue
4 RX 2 (tip) White/Brown P1-112 Blue
RX 2 (ring) Brown/White P1-111 Blue
5 TX 3 (tip) White/Slate P1-114 Blue
TX 3 (ring) Slate/White P1-113 Blue
6 RX 3 (tip) Red/Blue P1-116 Blue

RX 3 (ring) Blue/Red P1-115 Blue

Pinouts
Table 79: P1 to channels 1-8 (Continued)
7 TX 4 (tip) Red/Orange P1-27 Blue

TX 4 (ring) Orange/Red P1-1 Blue
8 RX 4 (tip) Red/Green P1-79 Blue
RX 4 (ring) Green/Red P1-53 Blue

9 TX 5 (tip) Red/Brown P1-28 Blue
TX 5 (ring) Brown/Red P1-2 Blue
10 RX 5 (tip) Red/Slate P1-80 Blue
RX 5 (ring) Slate/Red P1-54 Blue

11 TX 6 (tip) Black/Blue P1-29 Blue
TX 6 (ring) Blue/Black P1-3 Blue
12 RX 6 (tip) Black/Orange P1-81 Blue
RX 6 (ring) Orange/Black P1-55 Blue
13 TX 7 (tip) Black/Green P1-30 Blue
TX 7 (ring) Green/Black P1-4 Blue

14 RX 7 (tip) Black/Brown P1-82 Blue
RX 7 (ring) Brown/Black P1-56 Blue
15 TX 8 (tip) Black/Slate P1-31 Blue
TX 8 (ring) Slate/Black P1-5 Blue
16 RX 8 (tip) Yellow/Blue P1-83 Blue
RX 8 (ring) Blue/Yellow P1-57 Blue
17 TX 9 (tip) Yellow/Orange P1-32 Blue
TX 9 (ring) Orange/Yellow P1-6 Blue
18 RX 9 (tip) Yellow/Green P1-84 Blue
RX 9 (ring) Green/Yellow P1-58 Blue
19 TX 10 (tip) Yellow/Brown P1-33 Blue
TX 10 (ring) Brown/Yellow P1-7 Blue

20 RX 10 (tip) Yellow/Slate P1-85 Blue

RX 10 (ring) Slate/Yellow P1-59 Blue
21 TX 11 (tip) Violet/Blue P1-34 Blue
TX 11 (ring) Blue/Violet P1-8 Blue

22 RX 11 (tip) Violet/Orange P1-86 Blue
RX 11 (ring) Orange/Violet P1-60 Blue
23 TX 12 (tip) Violet/Green P1-35 Blue
TX 12 (ring) Green/Violet P1-9 Blue

24 RX 12 (tip) Violet/Brown P1-87 Blue
RX 12 (ring) Brown/Violet P1-61 Blue
25 TX 13 (tip) Violet/Slate P1-36 Blue
TX 13 (ring) Slate/Violet P1-10 Blue
26 TX 13 (tip) White/Blue P1-88 Orange
TX 13 (ring) Blue/White P1-62 Orange

27 RX 14 (tip) White/Orange P1-37 Orange
RX 14 (ring) Orange/White P1-11 Orange
28 TX 14 (tip) White/Green P1-89 Orange
TX 14 (ring) Green/White P1-63 Orange
29 RX 15 (tip) White/Brown P1-38 Orange
RX 15 (ring) Brown/White P1-12 Orange
30 TX 15 (tip) White/Slate P1-90 Orange
TX 15 (ring) Slate/White P1-64 Orange
31 RX 16 (tip) Red/Blue P1-39 Orange

RX 16 (ring) Blue/Red P1-13 Orange
32 TX 16 (tip) Red/Orange P1-91 Orange
TX 16 (ring) Orange/Red P1-65 Orange

Pinouts
33 RX 17 (tip) Red/Green P1-40 Orange
RX 17 (ring) Green/Red P1-14 Orange
34 TX 17 (tip) Red/Brown P1-92 Orange
TX 17 (ring) Brown/Red P1-66 Orange
35 RX 18 (tip) Red/Slate P1-41 Orange
RX 18 (ring) Slate/Red P1-15 Orange
36 TX 18 (tip) Black/Blue P1-93 Orange

TX 18 (ring) Blue/Black P1-67 Orange
37 RX 19 (tip) Black/Orange P1-42 Orange
RX 19 (ring) Orange/Black P1-16 Orange

38 TX 19 (tip) Black/Green P1-94 Orange
TX 19 (ring) Green/Black P1-68 Orange
39 RX 20 (tip) Black/Brown P1-43 Orange

RX 20 (ring) Brown/Black P1-17 Orange
40 TX 20 (tip) Black/Slate P1-95 Orange
TX 20 (ring) Slate/Black P1-69 Orange
41 RX 21 (tip) Yellow/Blue P1-44 Orange
RX 21 (ring) Blue/Yellow P1-18 Orange
42 RX 21 (tip) Yellow/Orange P1-96 Orange
RX 21 (ring) Orange/Yellow P1-70 Orange
43 TX 22 (tip) Yellow/Green P1-45 Orange
TX 22 (ring) Green/Yellow P1-19 Orange
44 RX 22 (tip) Yellow/Brown P1-97 Orange
RX 22 (ring) Brown/Yellow P1-71 Orange
45 TX 23 (tip) Yellow/Slate P1-46 Orange

TX 23 (ring) Slate/Yellow P1-20 Orange
46 RX 23 (tip) Violet/Blue P1-98 Orange
RX 23 (ring) Blue/Violet P1-72 Orange
47 TX 24 (tip) Violet/Orange P1-47 Orange
TX 24 (ring) Orange/Violet P1-21 Orange

48 RX 24 (tip) Violet/Green P1-99 Orange

RX 24 (ring) Green/Violet P1-73 Orange
49 RX 25 (tip) Violet/Brown P1-48 Orange

RX 25 (ring) Brown/Violet P1-22 Orange
50 TX 25 (tip) Violet/Slate P1-100 Orange
TX 25 (ring) Slate/Violet P1-74 Orange
51 TX 26 (tip) White/Blue P1-49 Green
TX 26 (ring) Blue/White P1-23 Green
52 RX 26 (tip) White/Orange P1-101 Green
RX 26 (ring) Orange/White P1-75 Green
53 TX 27 (tip) White/Green P1-50 Green
TX 27 (ring) Green/White P1-24 Green
54 RX 27 (tip) White/Brown P1-102 Green
RX 27 (ring) Brown/White P1-76 Green
55 TX 28 (tip) White/Slate P1-51 Green
TX 28 (ring) Slate/White P1-25 Green
56 RX 28 (tip) Red/Blue P1-103 Green
RX 28 (ring) Blue/Red P1-77 Green
57 TX 29 (tip) Red/Orange P1-52 Green

TX 29 (ring) Orange/Red P1-26 Green
58 RX 29 (tip) Red/Green P1-104 Green
RX 29 (ring) Green/Red P1-78 Green
59 TX 30 (tip) Red/Brown P1-118 Green
TX 30 (ring) Brown/Red P1-117 Green
60 RX 30 (tip) Red/Slate P1-120 Green

RX 30 (ring) Slate/Red P1-119 Green

Pinouts
61 TX 31 (tip) Black/Blue P1-122 Green

TX 31 (ring) Blue/Black P1-121 Green
62 RX 31 (tip) Black/Orange P1-124 Green
RX 31 (ring) Orange/Black P1-123 Green

63 TX 32 (tip) Black/Green P1-128 Green
TX 32 (ring) Green/Black P1-127 Green
64 RX 32 (tip) Black/Brown P1-126 Green
RX 32 (ring) Brown/Black P1-125 Green

No connection P-129
P-130
Voice gateway redundant TDM cable

P1 to channels 1-8, page 328 through Table 82 on page 332 lists the pinouts.
Figure 60: MALC redundant voice gateway cable

1–8
9–16
17–24
32
25–
ma0503
1 26
105 130
130 105
26 1

Table 83: P1 (P2) to channels 1-8
1 TX 1 (tip) White/Blue P1(P2)-106 Blue
TX 1 (ring) Blue/White P1(P2)-105 Blue
2 RX 1 (tip) White/Orange P1(P2)-108 Blue
RX 1 (ring) Orange/White P1(P2)-107 Blue
3 TX 2 (tip) White/Green P1(P2)-110 Blue
TX 2 (ring) Green/White P1(P2)-109 Blue
4 RX 2 (tip) White/Brown P1(P2)-112 Blue

RX 2 (ring) Brown/White P1(P2)-111 Blue
5 TX 3 (tip) White/Slate P1(P2)-114 Blue
TX 3 (ring) Slate/White P1(P2)-113 Blue

6 RX 3 (tip) Red/Blue P1(P2)-116 Blue
RX 3 (ring) Blue/Red P1(P2)-115 Blue
7 TX 4 (tip) Red/Orange P1(P2)-27 Blue

TX 4 (ring) Orange/Red P1(P2)-1 Blue
8 RX 4 (tip) Red/Green P1(P2)-79 Blue
RX 4 (ring) Green/Red P1(P2)-53 Blue
9 TX 5 (tip) Red/Brown P1(P2)-28 Blue
TX 5 (ring) Brown/Red P1(P2)-2 Blue
10 RX 5 (tip) Red/Slate P1(P2)-80 Blue
RX 5 (ring) Slate/Red P1(P2)-54 Blue
11 TX 6 (tip) Black/Blue P1(P2)-29 Blue
TX 6 (ring) Blue/Black P1(P2)-3 Blue
12 RX 6 (tip) Black/Orange P1(P2)-81 Blue
RX 6 (ring) Orange/Black P1(P2)-55 Blue
13 TX 7 (tip) Black/Green P1(P2)-30 Blue

TX 7 (ring) Green/Black P1(P2)-4 Blue
14 RX 7 (tip) Black/Brown P1(P2)-82 Blue
RX 7 (ring) Brown/Black P1(P2)-56 Blue
15 TX 8 (tip) Black/Slate P1(P2)-31 Blue
TX 8 (ring) Slate/Black P1(P2)-5 Blue

Pinouts
Table 83: P1 (P2) to channels 1-8 (Continued)
16 RX 8 (tip) Yellow/Blue P1(P2)-83 Blue

RX 8 (ring) Blue/Yellow P1(P2)-57 Blue
Table 84: P1 (P) to channels 9-16
17 TX 9 (tip) Yellow/Orange P1(P2)-32 Blue

TX 9 (ring) Orange/Yellow P1(P2)-6 Blue
18 RX 9 (tip) Yellow/Green P1(P2)-84 Blue
RX 9 (ring) Green/Yellow P1(P2)-58 Blue
19 TX 10 (tip) Yellow/Brown P1(P2)-33 Blue
TX 10 (ring) Brown/Yellow P1(P2)-7 Blue
20 RX 10 (tip) Yellow/Slate P1(P2)-85 Blue
RX 10 (ring) Slate/Yellow P1(P2)-59 Blue
21 TX 11 (tip) Violet/Blue P1(P2)-34 Blue
TX 11 (ring) Blue/Violet P1(P2)-8 Blue
22 RX 11 (tip) Violet/Orange P1(P2)-86 Blue
RX 11 (ring) Orange/Violet P1(P2)-60 Blue
23 TX 12 (tip) Violet/Green P1(P2)-35 Blue
TX 12 (ring) Green/Violet P1(P2)-9 Blue
24 RX 12 (tip) Violet/Brown P1(P2)-87 Blue
RX 12 (ring) Brown/Violet P1(P2)-61 Blue
25 TX 13 (tip) Violet/Slate P1(P2)-36 Blue

TX 13 (ring) Slate/Violet P1(P2)-10 Blue
26 TX 13 (tip) White/Blue P1(P2)-88 Orange
TX 13 (ring) Blue/White P1(P2)-62 Orange
27 RX 14 (tip) White/Orange P1(P2)-37 Orange
RX 14 (ring) Orange/White P1(P2)-11 Orange
28 TX 14 (tip) White/Green P1(P2)-89 Orange

TX 14 (ring) Green/White P1(P2)-63 Orange

Table 84: P1 (P) to channels 9-16 (Continued)
29 RX 15 (tip) White/Brown P1(P2)-38 Orange

RX 15 (ring) Brown/White P1(P2)-12 Orange
30 TX 15 (tip) White/Slate P1(P2)-90 Orange
TX 15 (ring) Slate/White P1(P2)-64 Orange

31 RX 16 (tip) Red/Blue P1(P2)-39 Orange
RX 16 (ring) Blue/Red P1(P2)-13 Orange
32 TX 16 (tip) Red/Orange P1(P2)-91 Orange
TX 16 (ring) Orange/Red P1(P2)-65 Orange
33 RX 17 (tip) Red/Green P1(P2)-40 Orange
RX 17 (ring) Green/Red P1(P2)-14 Orange

34 TX 17 (tip) Red/Brown P1(P2)-92 Orange
TX 17 (ring) Brown/Red P1(P2)-66 Orange
35 RX 18 (tip) Red/Slate P1(P2)-41 Orange
RX 18 (ring) Slate/Red P1(P2)-15 Orange
36 TX 18 (tip) Black/Blue P1(P2)-93 Orange
TX 18 (ring) Blue/Black P1(P2)-67 Orange

37 RX 19 (tip) Black/Orange P1(P2)-42 Orange
RX 19 (ring) Orange/Black P1(P2)-16 Orange
38 TX 19 (tip) Black/Green P1(P2)-94 Orange

TX 19 (ring) Green/Black P1(P2)-68 Orange
39 RX 20 (tip) Black/Brown P1(P2)-43 Orange
RX 20 (ring) Brown/Black P1(P2)-17 Orange
40 TX 20 (tip) Black/Slate P1(P2)-95 Orange
TX 20 (ring) Slate/Black P1(P2)-69 Orange
41 RX 21 (tip) Yellow/Blue P1(P2)-44 Orange

RX 21 (ring) Blue/Yellow P1(P2)-18 Orange

Pinouts
42 RX 21 (tip) Yellow/Orange P1(P2)-96 Orange

RX 21 (ring) Orange/Yellow P1(P2)-70 Orange
43 TX 22 (tip) Yellow/Green P1(P2)-45 Orange
TX 22 (ring) Green/Yellow P1(P2)-19 Orange

44 RX 22 (tip) Yellow/Brown P1(P2)-97 Orange
RX 22 (ring) Brown/Yellow P1(P2)-71 Orange
45 TX 23 (tip) Yellow/Slate P1(P2)-46 Orange
TX 23 (ring) Slate/Yellow P1(P2)-20 Orange

46 RX 23 (tip) Violet/Blue P1(P2)-98 Orange
RX 23 (ring) Blue/Violet P1(P2)-72 Orange
47 TX 24 (tip) Violet/Orange P1(P2)-47 Orange
TX 24 (ring) Orange/Violet P1(P2)-21 Orange
48 RX 24 (tip) Violet/Green P1(P2)-99 Orange
RX 24 (ring) Green/Violet P1(P2)-73 Orange
49 RX 25 (tip) Violet/Brown P1(P2)-48 Orange
RX 25 (ring) Brown/Violet P1(P2)-22 Orange
50 TX 25 (tip) Violet/Slate P1(P2)-100 Orange
TX 25 (ring) Slate/Violet P1(P2)-74 Orange
51 TX 26 (tip) White/Blue P1(P2)-49 Green
TX 26 (ring) Blue/White P1(P2)-23 Green
52 RX 26 (tip) White/Orange P1(P2)-101 Green
RX 26 (ring) Orange/White P1(P2)-75 Green
53 TX 27 (tip) White/Green P1(P2)-50 Green
TX 27 (ring) Green/White P1(P2)-24 Green
54 RX 27 (tip) White/Brown P1(P2)-102 Green

RX 27 (ring) Brown/White P1(P2)-76 Green

55 TX 28 (tip) White/Slate P1(P2)-51 Green

TX 28 (ring) Slate/White P1(P2)-25 Green
56 RX 28 (tip) Red/Blue P1(P2)-103 Green
RX 28 (ring) Blue/Red P1(P2)-77 Green

57 TX 29 (tip) Red/Orange P1(P2)-52 Green
TX 29 (ring) Orange/Red P1(P2)-26 Green
58 RX 29 (tip) Red/Green P1(P2)-104 Green
RX 29 (ring) Green/Red P1(P2)-78 Green

59 TX 30 (tip) Red/Brown P1(P2)-118 Green
TX 30 (ring) Brown/Red P1(P2)-117 Green
60 RX 30 (tip) Red/Slate P1(P2)-120 Green
RX 30 (ring) Slate/Red P1(P2)-119 Green
61 TX 31 (tip) Black/Blue P1(P2)-122 Green
TX 31 (ring) Blue/Black P1(P2)-121 Green

62 RX 31 (tip) Black/Orange P1(P2)-124 Green
RX 31 (ring) Orange/Black P1(P2)-123 Green
63 TX 32 (tip) Black/Green P1(P2)-128 Green
TX 32 (ring) Green/Black P1(P2)-127 Green
64 RX 32 (tip) Black/Brown P1(P2)-126 Green
RX 32 (ring) Brown/Black P1(P2)-125 Green
Cross P2-130 Black/Slate P-129 Green

connect
between P2-129 Slate/Black P-130 Green
P1 and P2

17
VDSL CARD (VDSL-16)
This chapter describes the MALC VDSL card and explains how to configure
it. It includes:
• Configuring VDSL interfaces, page 342
• VDSL-16 and VDSL-16+Splitter pinouts, page 343
Overview
Very high bit rate DSL (VDSL) transmits high speed data
over short reaches of twisted-pair copper wire. The shorter
the distance, the faster the connection rate.
The VDSL-16 is a single-slot 16-port VDSL subscriber line
card, which provides increased bandwidth (up to 52 Mbps
downstream and 4.223 Mbps upstream over short distances)
to accommodate video applications. All ATM traffic from
the 16 subscriber lines is cross connected to VCLs on the
MALC uplink card. Loop access for metallic test functions
is provided.
The VDSL-16 card can be used with the Zhone Residential
Gateway (ZRG) to provide video, voice, and data
applications. The VDSL card connects to neighborhood
Optical Network Units (ONUs), which connect to the
central office’s main fiber network backbone. This
architecture allows VDSL users to access the maximum
bandwidth available over twisted-pair, copper phone lines.

VDSL Card (VDSL-16)
Table 87: VDSL-16 card specifications
Specification Value
Density 16 ports

interfaces
Line QAM encoding using up to 256-bit constellations

characteristics Reed-Solomon interleaved forward error correction (FEC)
Redundancy None
Nominal line Up to 52 Mbps downstream and 4.223 Mbps upstream

rate
Power 35W nominal
consumption plus
0.3W per active port
48 W maximum
ATM Default VPI/VCI ranges (per port):

VPI: 0 to 1
VCI: 32 to 127
Compliance Asymmetric CO design ITU plan 998 compliant frequency

division duplexing (FDD)
Power 35W nominal

consumption plus
0.3W per active port
48 W maximum
Creating card-profiles for VDSL-16 cards

card-profiles.
VDSL-16 cards on the MALC have the following types and software images:
Table 88: VDSL-16 card type
VDSL-16 5026 malcvdsl.bin

Overview
The following example creates a card-profile for a VDSL-16 card in

shelf 1, slot 3:
sw-file-name: -----------> {}: malcvdsl.bin
upgrade-vers: -----------> {}:
card-group-id: ----------> {0}:
....................
Record created.

a few moments.
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 0
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006

VDSL Card (VDSL-16)
CLEI Code : No CLEI

Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 59
Uptime : 1 minute
arguments:
zSH> slots

__________________________________
1: 1/14 333 MALC MTAC
Configuring VDSL interfaces

The following table summarizes how to configure a VDSL interfaces on the
MALC:
Action Command
Configure the VDSL settings. See update vdsl-config index/vdsl

Configuring VDSL interfaces on Where index is of the form shelf-slot-port-subport or a user-defined
page 342. string.
Configuring VDSL interfaces

1 Update the vdsl-config profile. Make sure the mode parameter is set to
vtu-o on the MALC, and the CPE side (ZRG) is configured as vtu-r. Also
set the maximum constellation (us-max-const) to 64 Mbps on both ends
of the VDSL connection.
zSH> update vdsl-config 1-3-1-0/vdsl
mode: ------------> {vtu-o}: vtu-o for CO equipment; vtu-r for CPE devices
plan: ------------> {plan-998-l}:
us-pbo: ----------> {upstream-power-backoff-enable}:

VDSL-16 and VDSL-16+Splitter pinouts
ds-sym-rate-sel: -> {ds-sym-rate-sel-bit-7}:

ds-min-margin: ---> {24}:
ds-ber-limit: ----> {one-e-minus-05}:
ds-max-rate: -----> {207900}:
ds-max-const: ----> {qam-128}:
ds-rs-frame: -----> {rs-255-239-143}:
us-sym-rate-sel: -> {us-sym-rate-sel-bit-3}:
us-min-margin: ---> {24}:
us-ber-limit: ----> {one-e-minus-05}:
us-max-rate: -----> {70875}:
us-max-const: ----> {qam-128}: qam-64 both ends of connection must match
us-rs-frame: -----> {rs-255-239-16}:
....................
Record updated.
2 Activate the VDSL interface:

zSH> update if-translate 1-3-1-0/vdsl
ifIndex: ----------> {222}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {3}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {vdsl}:
iftype-extension: -> {none}:
ifName: -----------> {1-3-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.
VDSL-16 and VDSL-16+Splitter pinouts

VDSL-16 cards use standard RJ-21X pinouts. Table 89 lists the port pinouts.
Table 89: VDSL-16 card pinouts

VDSL Card (VDSL-16)
Table 89: VDSL-16 card pinouts (Continued)







18
T1/E1 ATM 32 CARD (T1/E1-ATM-32)
This chapter describes the MALC T1/E1-ATM-32 card and explains how to
• T1/E1 32 port TDM cable, page 359

T1/E1 ATM 32 card (T1/E1-ATM-32)
Overview
The MALC T1/E1-ATM-32 card provides 32 T1/E1 UNI or

IMA ports. All ports must be configured as either UNI or
IMA.
Table 90: T1/E1 32 specifications
Density 32 ports
Physical Custom 130-pin amphenol connector

interface A cable is provided that breaks out to 4 non-terminated wire
bundles for connecting to patch panels.

Overview
Table 90: T1/E1 32 specifications (Continued)
ATM support ATM Quality of Service types supported:

supported.
• VPI/VCI ranges:
VPI: 0-7, VCI: 32-63 per UNI interface or IMA group.
These values cannot be changed.
• Number of supported connections:
VCLs: 224 per card
VPLs: 32 per card
Total ATM connections: 256 per card
AAL5 termination:
16 IMA groups are supported, as described in the ATM forum
AF-PHY-0086.001. Note that UNI and IMA mode are not
currently supported on the same card.
Redundancy None
Power 27 watts
consumption
Creating card-profiles for T1/E1-ATM-32 cards


card-profiles.
T1/E1 ATM 32 cards on the MALC have the following types and software
images:
T1/E1-ATM-32 5032 malct1e1atm32.bin
he following example creates a card-profile for a T1/E1-ATM-32 card in

shelf 1, slot 15:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malct1e1atm32.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {0}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: e1 | ds1 | e1-ima |ds1-ima
....................
New record saved.
Note: To change from a T1 to an E1 interface in an existing

card-profile record, first delete the card-profile record, create a
different card-profile record with the desired card-line-type setting,
and then save the new record.

a few moments.

Overview
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 0
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 59
Uptime : 1 minute
arguments:
zSH> slots

__________________________________
1: 1/14 333 MALC MTAC


port card.


Action Command
interfaces on page 350. 9 to 16 (for the TDM Uplink card)
page 353.

• ESF framing
• B8ZS coding
• CSU mode
• HDB3 coding

Parameter Options

Values:
Default: esf for T1
e1 for E1

interface.
for E1.
hdb3 for E1

characters.
loopback-config This parameter is used for loopback testing.

circuitry.
Values:
Default: 0

Values:
enabled
disabled
Default: enabled

Parameter Options

Values:
Default: csu

circuitry.
Values:
Default: csu00

Values:
Default: true

Values:
HEC value.
HEC value.
Default: true

line-type: ----------------------> {esf}:
line-code: ----------------------> {b8zs}:

circuit-id: ---------------------> {ds1}:

signal-mode: --------------------> {none}:
fdl: ----------------------------> {fdlnone}:
ds1-mode: -----------------------> {other}:
ds1-group-number: ---------------> {0}
Record updated.

ifindex: -----> {1}: .
shelf: -------> {1}:
slot: --------> {1}:
port: --------> {1}:
subport: -----> {0}:
type: --------> {ds1}:
ifName: -----------> {1-1-1-0}:
redundancy-param1: -> {0}
....................
Record updated.
active:
1:1:1:0


groups on the MALC:
Action Command



ima-group-profile.

Values:
active.
active.
not active.

Values:
1 to 8
Default: 1

Values:
1 to 8
Default: 1
group.
Values:
Default: ctc


interface.
Values:
0 to 255
Default: 1

is startup.
Values:
m32 32 cells
m64 64 cells
m128 128 cells
m256 256 cells
Default: m128

interface.
Values:
0 to 100
Default: 25

state.
Values:
1 or 2
Default: 2

state.
Values:
1 to 5
Default: 2

state.
Values:
1 to 5
Default: 1
testLinkIfIndex This parameter is used for testing the IMA link.
testPattern This parameter is used for testing the IMA link.
testProcStatus This parameter is used for testing the IMA link.

Overview

• T1/E1-ATM-32
Links IMA group
1-4 1
5-8 2
9 - 12 3
13 - 16 4
Empty 5
Empty 6
Empty 7
Empty 8
17 - 20 9
21 - 24 10
25 - 28 11
29 -32 12
Empty 13
Empty 14
Empty 15
Empty 16



txImaId: ---------> {1}:
betaValue: -------> {2}:
....................
Record updated.
Moving IMA links

standby card:

T1/E1 32 port TDM cable
If Index If Name
--------- ---------------
000736 1-3-1-0
000737 1-3-2-0
000738 1-3-3-0
000739 1-3-4-0

Figure 61 shows the MALC T1/E1 32 port cable. P1 to channels 1-8,
page 359 through Table 95 on page 363 lists the pinouts.
Figure 61: MALC T1/E1 32 port cable
1 TX 1 (tip) White/Blue P1-106 Blue
TX 1 (ring) Blue/White P1-105 Blue
2 RX 1 (tip) White/Orange P1-108 Blue
RX 1 (ring) Orange/White P1-107 Blue
3 TX 2 (tip) White/Green P1-110 Blue
TX 2 (ring) Green/White P1-109 Blue

4 RX 2 (tip) White/Brown P1-112 Blue

RX 2 (ring) Brown/White P1-111 Blue
5 TX 3 (tip) White/Slate P1-114 Blue
TX 3 (ring) Slate/White P1-113 Blue

6 RX 3 (tip) Red/Blue P1-116 Blue
RX 3 (ring) Blue/Red P1-115 Blue
7 TX 4 (tip) Red/Orange P1-27 Blue
TX 4 (ring) Orange/Red P1-1 Blue

8 RX 4 (tip) Red/Green P1-79 Blue
RX 4 (ring) Green/Red P1-53 Blue
9 TX 5 (tip) Red/Brown P1-28 Blue
TX 5 (ring) Brown/Red P1-2 Blue
10 RX 5 (tip) Red/Slate P1-80 Blue
RX 5 (ring) Slate/Red P1-54 Blue

11 TX 6 (tip) Black/Blue P1-29 Blue
TX 6 (ring) Blue/Black P1-3 Blue
12 RX 6 (tip) Black/Orange P1-81 Blue
RX 6 (ring) Orange/Black P1-55 Blue
13 TX 7 (tip) Black/Green P1-30 Blue
TX 7 (ring) Green/Black P1-4 Blue
14 RX 7 (tip) Black/Brown P1-82 Blue
RX 7 (ring) Brown/Black P1-56 Blue
15 TX 8 (tip) Black/Slate P1-31 Blue

TX 8 (ring) Slate/Black P1-5 Blue
16 RX 8 (tip) Yellow/Blue P1-83 Blue
RX 8 (ring) Blue/Yellow P1-57 Blue

17 TX 9 (tip) Yellow/Orange P1-32 Blue
TX 9 (ring) Orange/Yellow P1-6 Blue
18 RX 9 (tip) Yellow/Green P1-84 Blue
RX 9 (ring) Green/Yellow P1-58 Blue
19 TX 10 (tip) Yellow/Brown P1-33 Blue
TX 10 (ring) Brown/Yellow P1-7 Blue
20 RX 10 (tip) Yellow/Slate P1-85 Blue

RX 10 (ring) Slate/Yellow P1-59 Blue
21 TX 11 (tip) Violet/Blue P1-34 Blue
TX 11 (ring) Blue/Violet P1-8 Blue

22 RX 11 (tip) Violet/Orange P1-86 Blue
RX 11 (ring) Orange/Violet P1-60 Blue
23 TX 12 (tip) Violet/Green P1-35 Blue

TX 12 (ring) Green/Violet P1-9 Blue
24 RX 12 (tip) Violet/Brown P1-87 Blue
RX 12 (ring) Brown/Violet P1-61 Blue
25 TX 13 (tip) Violet/Slate P1-36 Blue
TX 13 (ring) Slate/Violet P1-10 Blue
26 TX 13 (tip) White/Blue P1-88 Orange
TX 13 (ring) Blue/White P1-62 Orange
27 RX 14 (tip) White/Orange P1-37 Orange
RX 14 (ring) Orange/White P1-11 Orange
28 TX 14 (tip) White/Green P1-89 Orange
TX 14 (ring) Green/White P1-63 Orange
29 RX 15 (tip) White/Brown P1-38 Orange

RX 15 (ring) Brown/White P1-12 Orange
30 TX 15 (tip) White/Slate P1-90 Orange
TX 15 (ring) Slate/White P1-64 Orange
31 RX 16 (tip) Red/Blue P1-39 Orange
RX 16 (ring) Blue/Red P1-13 Orange

32 TX 16 (tip) Red/Orange P1-91 Orange

TX 16 (ring) Orange/Red P1-65 Orange
33 RX 17 (tip) Red/Green P1-40 Orange

RX 17 (ring) Green/Red P1-14 Orange
34 TX 17 (tip) Red/Brown P1-92 Orange
TX 17 (ring) Brown/Red P1-66 Orange
35 RX 18 (tip) Red/Slate P1-41 Orange
RX 18 (ring) Slate/Red P1-15 Orange
36 TX 18 (tip) Black/Blue P1-93 Orange
TX 18 (ring) Blue/Black P1-67 Orange
37 RX 19 (tip) Black/Orange P1-42 Orange
RX 19 (ring) Orange/Black P1-16 Orange
38 TX 19 (tip) Black/Green P1-94 Orange
TX 19 (ring) Green/Black P1-68 Orange
39 RX 20 (tip) Black/Brown P1-43 Orange
RX 20 (ring) Brown/Black P1-17 Orange
40 TX 20 (tip) Black/Slate P1-95 Orange
TX 20 (ring) Slate/Black P1-69 Orange
41 RX 21 (tip) Yellow/Blue P1-44 Orange

RX 21 (ring) Blue/Yellow P1-18 Orange
42 RX 21 (tip) Yellow/Orange P1-96 Orange
RX 21 (ring) Orange/Yellow P1-70 Orange
43 TX 22 (tip) Yellow/Green P1-45 Orange
TX 22 (ring) Green/Yellow P1-19 Orange
44 RX 22 (tip) Yellow/Brown P1-97 Orange

RX 22 (ring) Brown/Yellow P1-71 Orange

45 TX 23 (tip) Yellow/Slate P1-46 Orange

TX 23 (ring) Slate/Yellow P1-20 Orange
46 RX 23 (tip) Violet/Blue P1-98 Orange
RX 23 (ring) Blue/Violet P1-72 Orange

47 TX 24 (tip) Violet/Orange P1-47 Orange
TX 24 (ring) Orange/Violet P1-21 Orange
48 RX 24 (tip) Violet/Green P1-99 Orange
RX 24 (ring) Green/Violet P1-73 Orange
49 RX 25 (tip) Violet/Brown P1-48 Orange
RX 25 (ring) Brown/Violet P1-22 Orange

50 TX 25 (tip) Violet/Slate P1-100 Orange
TX 25 (ring) Slate/Violet P1-74 Orange
51 TX 26 (tip) White/Blue P1-49 Green
TX 26 (ring) Blue/White P1-23 Green
52 RX 26 (tip) White/Orange P1-101 Green
RX 26 (ring) Orange/White P1-75 Green

53 TX 27 (tip) White/Green P1-50 Green
TX 27 (ring) Green/White P1-24 Green
54 RX 27 (tip) White/Brown P1-102 Green

RX 27 (ring) Brown/White P1-76 Green
55 TX 28 (tip) White/Slate P1-51 Green
TX 28 (ring) Slate/White P1-25 Green
56 RX 28 (tip) Red/Blue P1-103 Green
RX 28 (ring) Blue/Red P1-77 Green
57 TX 29 (tip) Red/Orange P1-52 Green

TX 29 (ring) Orange/Red P1-26 Green

58 RX 29 (tip) Red/Green P1-104 Green

RX 29 (ring) Green/Red P1-78 Green
59 TX 30 (tip) Red/Brown P1-118 Green
TX 30 (ring) Brown/Red P1-117 Green

60 RX 30 (tip) Red/Slate P1-120 Green
RX 30 (ring) Slate/Red P1-119 Green
61 TX 31 (tip) Black/Blue P1-122 Green
TX 31 (ring) Blue/Black P1-121 Green

62 RX 31 (tip) Black/Orange P1-124 Green
RX 31 (ring) Orange/Black P1-123 Green
63 TX 32 (tip) Black/Green P1-128 Green
TX 32 (ring) Green/Black P1-127 Green
64 RX 32 (tip) Black/Brown P1-126 Green
RX 32 (ring) Brown/Black P1-125 Green

No connection P-129
P-130

19
T1/E1 CES 12-PORT CARD
This chapter describes the MALC T1/E1 12 CES card. It includes:

•
•
Overview, page 365
CES card configuration, page 366
• Pinouts, page 368
Overview
Circuit Emulation Service (CES) allows T1/E1 circuits to be

transparently extended across an ATM network or IP routed
network. CES across an ATM network is based on the ATM
Forum standard AF VTOA 0078.0000. Using constant bit
rate (CBR) ATM permanent virtual circuits (PVCs), CES
allows communication between T1/E1 interfaces (such as
T1, E1, E3, and T3). CES over an IP network transports T1/
E1 circuit data over an static IP routed network between
Zhone equipment endpoints and delivers the data to the
destination T1/E1 circuit.
There two types of CES: structured and unstructured. In
unstructured emulation (also known as clear channel
emulation) the entire services bandwidth is emulated and
reproduced at the target port. Structured emulation service
(also called channelized emulation) emulates a point-to-point
fractional T1/E1 (less than a full T1/E1 line). The frame
structure is maintained. Individual streams are visible and are
byte aligned. This allows the T1/E1 trunks using the
structured emulation service to break into multiple DS0
channels towards different destinations.

T1/E1 CES 12-port card
Table 96: T1/E1 CES 12-port card specifications
Size 1 slot
Density 12 ports T1/E1
Standards ITU-T G.704

supported ITU-T G.706
ITU-T G.703 (120 ohm balanced)
ATM Forum standard af.vtoa.0078.0000
Line B8ZS
characteristics HDB3
AMI
D4
ESF
SF
Supported line 1.544 MHz, 2.048 MHz

rates Default ranges: VPI 0-7, VCI 32-63
ATM support AAL1 circuit emulation

function Metallic loopback relay
Redundancy None

plus
0.75 W additional per active port
24 W maximum total.
CES card configuration

This section includes:
• Creating card-profiles for T1/E1 CES 12-port cards on page 366
• Configuring and activating the T1/E1 CES interface on page 367
Creating card-profiles for T1/E1 CES 12-port cards

The following example creates a card-profile for an T1/E1 CES 12-port
card in shelf 1, slot 12:

CES card configuration
sw-file-name: ----------->{}: malct1e1ces12.bin

upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {1}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: e1
card-atm-configuration: -> {vbnrt65rt30}
....................
New record saved.
Configuring and activating the T1/E1 CES interface

The CES circuit frame type can be set in the ds1-profile during interface
configuration or in the cross connect command used to create the connection.
Table 97: Supported frame types
Line type Description Bundle format
e1 ITU-T G.704 without CRC-4 Structured
e1crc ITU-T G.704 with CRC-4 Structured

e1mf G.704 multiframing enabled Structured
e1crcmf G.704 multiframing enabled and crc Structured

enabled
esf Extended SuperFrame DS1 (T1.107) Structured

d4 AT&T D4 format DS1 (T1.107) Structured
e1unframed E1 signal without frame synchronization. Unstructured
ds1unframed T1 signal without frame synchronization. Unstructured
To configure a T1/E1 interface:

1 Update the DS1 profile to specify an unframed line type:
line-type: ----------------------> {e1}: e1unframed
line-code: ----------------------> {hdb3}:
circuit-id: ---------------------> {e1}:
signal-mode: --------------------> {none}:
fdl: ----------------------------> {fdlnone}:


ds1-mode: -----------------------> {csu}:
protocol-emulation: -------------> {network}:
signal-type: --------------------> {loopstart}:
ds1-group-number: ---------------> {0}:
line-power: ---------------------> {disabled}:
....................
Record updated.
2 Activate the interface:

ifIndex: -----------> {321}:
shelf: -------------> {1}:
slot: --------------> {7}:
port: --------------> {1}:
subport: -----------> {0}:
type: --------------> {ds1}:
adminstatus: -------> {down}: up
physical-flag: -----> {true}:
iftype-extension: --> {none}:
ifName: ------------> {1-12-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.
3 Update and activate the rest of the interfaces, as required.
Pinouts
Table 98 describes the T1/E1 CES port pinouts. This card uses a 50 position
female champ connector.
Table 98: T1/E1 CES port pinouts
Port Pair Signal To
1 TX 1 Ring 1
1 TX 1 Tip 26

Pinouts
Table 98: T1/E1 CES port pinouts (Continued)
Port Pair Signal To
2 RX 1 Ring 2
RX 1 Tip 27
3 TX 2 Ring 3
2 TX 2 Tip 28
4 RX 2 Ring 4
RX 2 Tip 29
5 TX 3 Ring 5
3 TX 3 Tip 30
6 RX 3 Ring 6
RX 3 Tip 31
7 TX 4 Ring 7
4 TX 4 Tip 32
8 RX 4 Ring 8
RX 4 Tip 33
9 TX 5 Ring 9
5 TX 5 Tip 34
10 RX 5 Ring 10
RX 5 Tip 35
11 TX 6 Ring 11
6 TX 6 Tip 36
12 RX 6 Ring 12
RX 6 Tip 37
13 TX 7 Ring 13
7 TX 7 Tip 38
14 RX 7 Ring 14
RX 7 Tip 39
15 TX 8 Ring 15
8 TX 8 Tip 40
16 RX 8 Ring 16
RX 8 Tip 41

Table 98: T1/E1 CES port pinouts (Continued)
Port Pair Signal To
17 TX 9 Ring 17
9 TX 9 Tip 42
18 RX 9 Ring 18
RX 9 Tip 43
19 TX 10 Ring 19
10 TX 10 Tip 44
20 RX 10 Ring 20
RX 10 Tip 45
21 TX 11 Ring 21
11 TX 11 Tip 46
22 RX 11 Ring 22
RX 11 Tip 47
23 TX 12 Ring 23
12 TX 12 Tip 48
24 RX 12 Ring 24
RX 12 Tip 49
25 Ground 50
N/A Ground 25

20
UNIVERSAL LINE CARD (ULC-ISDN-12)
This chapter describes the MALC ULC-ISDN-12 card and explains how to
• Viewing ULC card configuration profiles, page 375
• ULC card pinouts, page 376

Universal Line Card (ULC-ISDN-12)
Overview
The Universal Line Card (ULC) provides line termination

for integrated services digital network basic rate interface
(ISDN BRI) over ATM and V5.2 networks. It provides a
U-interface over standard 2-wire local loops. It supports 12
U-interface circuits. Each port carries two B channels and
one D channel.
The ULC card supports ISDN-to-AAL2 and ISDN-to-V5.2
connections. The ULC card must be used with the
appropriate Uplink card for each application.
For ISDN-to-AAL2 configurations, use the ULC card with
an ATM-compatible Uplink card.
For ISDN-to-V5.2 configurations, use the ULC card with
the TDM/ATM Uplink card or the Voice Gateway card.
A ULC with POTS card is also supported. Contact your
Zhone Technologies sales representative for information.
Table 99: ULC-ISDN-12 specifications
Specification Value
Size 1 slot
Density 12 ports:
1 D-channel and 2 B-channels per port

interfaces
ISDN line 144 kbps line rate
characteristics 135 Ohm resistive line impedance
95V @ 45mA loop power
24 AWG 22,000 feet (maximum operational reach)
26 AWG 18,000 feet (maximum operational reach)

Overview
Table 99: ULC-ISDN-12 specifications (Continued)
Specification Value
Redundancy None
DSL line 2B1Q

encoding
Nominal line 80 kbps 5 ppm

rate
Longitudinal 500 Hz to 40 kHz: greater than 55 dB

balance: 40 kHz to 1 MHz: roll-off -20 dB per decade
Input return greater than 20 dB, 10 kHz to 25 kHz

loss roll-off 20 dB per decade to 1 kHz and 250 kHz
Free-run line 80 kbps 32 ppm

rate (Stratum 4)
if timing
reference is lost
Power 1W nominal
consumption plus
6W per active port
Creating card-profiles for ULC cards

card-profiles.
ULC-ISDN-12 cards on the MALC have the following types and software
images:
Table 100: ULC-ISDN-12 card type
ULC-ISDN-12 5025 malculc.bin
The following example creates a card-profile for a ULC card in shelf 1,

slot 5:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malculc.bin

upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:

card-group-id: --------> {0}:
....................
New record saved.

a few moments.
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 0
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 59

Viewing ULC card configuration profiles

Uptime : 1 minute
arguments:
zSH> slots

__________________________________
1: 1/14 333 MALC MTAC
Viewing ULC card configuration profiles

Once the ULC card is enabled, 12 ulc-config profiles are automatically
created, one for each of the 12 physical interfaces on the card.
zSH> list ulc-config
ulc-config 1/5/1
ulc-config 1/5/2
ulc-config 1/5/3
ulc-config 1/5/4
ulc-config 1/5/5
ulc-config 1/5/6
ulc-config 1/5/7
ulc-config 1/5/8
ulc-config 1/5/9
ulc-config 1/5/10
ulc-config 1/5/11
ulc-config 1/5/12
12 entries found.
There is no need to update the ulc-config profile for ULC card. To view the
parameters in the profile, use the show command:
zSH> show ulc-config
ulc-port-type:---> pots | isdn | ebs
ulc-trap-enable:-> enabled | disabled

ulc-port-type Identifies the ULC port provisioning.

There is one entry per ULC port.
Values:
pots
isdn
ebs
Default: isdn
ulc-trap-enable Enables the sending of line-level traps
from the device to SNMP managers.
Values:
enabled
disabled
Default: disabled
ULC card pinouts

The ULC cards use standard 50-pin male Champ connectors. Table 101 lists
the port pinouts for the 12 ISDN ports on the ULC card.
Table 101: ULC card pinouts
13 unused 38 unused
14 unused 39 unused

ULC card pinouts
Table 101: ULC card pinouts (Continued)
15 unused 40 unused
16 unused 41 unused
17 unused 42 unused
18 unused 43 unused
19 unused 44 unused
20 unused 45 unused
21 unused 46 unused
22 unused 47 unused
23 unused 48 unused
24 unused 49 unused
25 unused 50 unused


21
PON CARD (PON-OLT)
This chapter describes the MALC PON card and explains how to configure it.
It includes:
• Configuring a PON interface, page 382
Overview
The PON OLT card is a single-port interface that bridges

copper and fiber media. It supports APON, as specified in
the G.983.1 and G.983.3 specifications. It provides head-end
termination of an optical network with 622 Mbps
downstream and 155 Mbps upstream rates. It supports 32
OLT units when used in conjunction with a splitter.

PON Card (PON-OLT)
Table 102: PON OLT card specifications
Specification Value
Size 1 slot
Density 32 subscribers
Physical SC fiber optic connector

interfaces
Line Transmits voice and data traffic at a 1310nm wavelength

characteristics Receives voice and data traffic at a 1490nm wavelength
Receives video traffic at a 1550 nm wavelength
Redundancy None
Nominal line 622 Mbps downstream and 155 Mbps upstream

rate
ATM support VPI/VCI ranges (per port):
VPI: 0 to 63
VCI: 32 to 255
connections.
Power 24 W nominal
consumption 28 W maximum
Creating card-profiles for PON OLT cards

card-profiles.
PON-OLT 5031 malcolt.bin
he following example creates a card-profile for a PON OLT card in shelf

1, slot 5:

Overview
sw-file-name: -----------> {}: malcolt.bin

upgrade-vers: -----------> {}:
card-group-id: ----------> {0}:
....................
Record created.

a few moments.
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 0
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13

PON Card (PON-OLT)
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 59
Uptime : 1 minute
arguments:
zSH> slots
Configuring a PON interface

This section provides an example of how to configure a Zhone Residential
Gateway (ZRG) to interoperate with a MALC.
Configure the following parameters in the olt-onu-config profile on the
MALC:
onu-serial-number Serial number from the ONU device.
onu-password Password to access the ONU device.
network-ref-clk Network reference clock usage flag.

Values:
true uses the clock source from the upstream
device
false uses the system’s internal clock. Also
known as local timing.
Default: false
onu-hec Header Error Control.

Values:
onuoff
onuRxCorrectionOnly
onuTxGenerationOnly
onuRxAndTx
Default: onuRxAndTx

onu-loopback Loopback mode for device.

Values:
onuNone
onuInward
onuLine
Default: onuLine
onu-overhead-size Overhead size definition field.

Values:
onuOverheadSize3Bytes
Default: onuOverheadSize3Bytes
Configuring PON OLT to ONU connections

1 (On the MALC) Activate the PON OLT physical interface:
zSH> update if-translate 1-14-1-0/pon622
ifIndex: ----------> {203}:
shelf: ------------> {0}:
slot: -------------> {0}:
port: -------------> {0}:
subport: ----------> {0}:
type: -------------> {pon622}:
physical-flag: ----> {false}:
iftype-extension: -> {ponolt}:
ifName: -----------> {1-14-1-0}:
....................
Record updated.
2 (On the MALC) Activate the connection to the ZRG ONU interface,
which is a subport within the PON OLT physical interface.
zSH> update if-translate 1-14-1-1/pon622
ifIndex: ----------> {204}:
shelf: ------------> {1}:
slot: -------------> {14}:
port: -------------> {1}:
subport: ----------> {1}:
type: -------------> {pon622}:
iftype-extension: -> {pononu}:

PON Card (PON-OLT)
ifName: -----------> {1-1-1-1}:

....................
Record updated.
The MALC automatically creates olt-config and 32 olt-onu-config

profiles for each PON OLT card installed. It does not matter which one
you use.
3 (On the MALC) Update the olt-config profile on the MALC to enable
(the default) or disable auto learning of passwords on the connection
between the OLT and ZRG ONU:
Note: If you enable auto-learn in the olt-config profile, you do

not need to enter olt-onu-password in the olt-onu-config profile.
zSH> update olt-config 1-14-1-0/pon622

auto-learn: ------------------> {oltautolearnenable}:
cell-scrambling: -------------> {oltcellscramblingrxandtx}:
bip8: ------------------------> {oltbip8txgenerationonly}:
olt-hec: ---------------------> {olthecrxcorrectiononly}:
hec-rx-bypass: ---------------> {false}:
crc-rx: ----------------------> {true}:
overhead-size: ---------------> {oltponoverhead3bytes}:
delimiter-pattern: -----------> {162}:
delimiter-size: --------------> {8}:
cdr-pattern: -----------------> {192}:
cdr-location: ----------------> {0}:
cdr-active-high: -------------> {false}:
cpe-limit: -------------------> {4}:
lcd-limit: -------------------> {8}:
lcd-alpha: -------------------> {1}:
lcd-delta: -------------------> {2}:
tx-discard-non-matching-vpi: -> {false}:
utopia-discard: --------------> {false}:
sync-bytes-clk-divisor: ------> {1}:
tx-sync-bytes: ---------------> {txsyncbytesdisable}:
olt-loopback: ----------------> {loopbacknone}:
max-pon-distance: ------------> {200}:
....................
Record updated.
4 (On the ZRG) View the onu-config profile on the ZRG, to learn the serial
number of the ZRG ONU device:
zSH> get onu-config 1-1-1-0/pon622
onu-serial-number: -> {6542027}
onu-password: ------> {}
network-ref-clk: ---> {true}
onu-hec: -----------> {onuoff}

onu-loopback: ------> {onunone}

onu-overhead-size: -> {onuoverheadsize3bytes}
5 (On the MALC) After learning the serial number of the ZRG, enter it in
the olt-onu-config profile on the MALC:
zSH> update olt-onu-config 1-14-1-1/pon622
olt-onu-password: ---> {}: not required when autolearn is enabled
olt-onu-serial-num: -> {}: 6542027 The ZRG serial number
olt-onu-churn-key: --> {onuchurnkeydisable}:
line-status-trap-enable: -> {enabled}:
....................
Record updated.
6 (On the MALC) Create traffic containers for the connections between the
OLT and the ZRG ONUs.
OLT traffic containers are similar to ATM traffic descriptors. Traffic
containers set up a bandwidth for a connection between an OLT and
ONUs. All connections that are in the same bandwidth can use the same
traffic container. If they need a different bandwidth, they use a different
traffic container.
Note: The guaranteed-bw and maximum-bw parameter values

in the olt-traf-cont profile must be a multiple of 63 and should be
equal.
zSH> new olt-traf-cont 1

guaranteed-bw: ---> {} 6300
maximum-bw: ------> {} 6300
cbr: -------------> {true}
cbr-compenstate: -> {false}
....................
Record created.
When the line is up, a message similar to the following will be displayed
on the console:
FEB 20 08:12:17: alert : 1/1/1025: alarm_mgr:
01:06:01:02 Critical ONU Up

PON Card (PON-OLT)

22
METALLIC TEST ACCESS CARD (MTAC/RING,
MTAC/RING-2MHZ-CLK AND
MTAC-FC)
This chapter describes the MALC MTAC cards and explains how to configure
it. It includes:
• Connecting the MTAC/Ring card, page 393
• Testing a line, page 393
• Connecting external alarms, page 395
• Connecting an external clock, page 395
• Connecting an external ring source, page 396
• MTAC/Ring and MTAC-FC card pinouts, page 398

Metallic Test Access card (MTAC/RING, MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk and MTAC-FC)
Overview
The MTAC/RING cards (MTAC/RING, MTAC/

Ring-2Mhz-Clk and MTAC-FC) provide metallic test access
for external test systems to verify the local loop conditions,
such as whether the loop will allow a particular service (for
example, POTS or DSL) to operate, or whether the line circuit
connected to the loop is operational.
The MTAC/RING cards also provide:
•Ringing generation.
•Access for an external ringing generator.
•T1 or E1 external network clock source.
•2.048Mhz clock reference (MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk card
only).
•Test equipment access to any line.
•Line testing:
•Look-out testing (toward the loop) for DSL and POTS
interfaces.
Note that the type of tests provided will vary, depending on the
type of card being tested.
• External alarm relay closures (2, form-C)
• External alarm inputs (12, wet or dry, normally open or normally closed)
• Fan control and monitoring (MTAC-FC only)
Note: The MALC supports only one active MTAC/Ring card at a

time and a total of two cards in the system.
Note: The MTAC-FC card is only supported in the MALC 319. This
card must be installed in slot 10.
Figure 62: MTAC-FC card (MALC 319 only)

Overview
Ringing generator
The metallic test access card contains the ringing generator for POTS cards
installed in the MALC. Ringing voltage is supplied to all installed POTS
cards via a backplane bus. Note that only one MTAC/RING card can supply
ringing voltage to the system at a time.
The metallic test access card also contains a ringing voltage detector that
senses the absence of ringing voltage on the card itself or on an external
ringing generator (if one exists). If the ringing voltage detector detects a
problem, another MTAC/Ring card can supply the ringing voltage, or the
MALC can be configured to use another external ringing generator.
External test access
The MTAC/RING cards provide access to external test equipment through an

RJ45 connector for look-in, look-out, and bridging test access.
The test relays can be controlled by the command line interface (CLI) and
Zhone Management System (ZMS). Test relays on the POTS or DSL card can
connect any POTS pair to an RJ45 test access port on the metallic test access
card using the back plane to allow test access to any POTS or DSL line.
Table 104: MTAC/Ring, MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk, MTAC-FC specifications
Size 1 slot
Physical RJ48 test access port to connect to EXTERNAL test head.

interfaces Connects test head to 8 pin MT bus on backplane (supports one
port test simultaneously in system).
Serial control RS232D port available for controlling the MTU.
26 pin D sub connector that supports 12 alarm closures for
detecting various alarm types from collocated equipment.
Supports isolated closure, ground and –48VDC closure (states
and names provisionable in software).
RJ48C accepts DS1 or E1 external clock reference (all versions)
or 2.048Mhz clock reference (MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk card
only), provisionable as system clock source.
Metallic test Look-out testing (toward the loop) for ADSL and POTS
functions interfaces (with the exception of ADSL 32 cards).
Note: The type of tests provided will vary, depending

on the type of card being tested.
Ring External ring generator voltage connector. Internal ring voltage

generation sine wave generator also provided for small scale deployments
(power ranges based on load from 15 REN total @ 86VRMS,
45 REN @ 40VRMS).

Table 104: MTAC/Ring, MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk, MTAC-FC specifications (Contin-
Redundancy 1+1 card redundancy

Clocking The clocking reference on the MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk card
complies with ITU-T (CTR12) G.703 standard.
Power 8 W nominal
consumption 38 W maximum at full ringing load
The MTAC-FC card is required to be installed in the
MALC 319 chassis. The power consumption for the MTAC-FC
card and the chassis are 31 watts maximum with no ringing, 45
watts maximum at full ringing load.
Creating card-profiles for MTAC/Ring cards
Caution: Each MTAC/Ring card in a redundant pair must be

configured identically; the cards do not share state or configuration
information. In addition, you must manually keep the configuration
of the active and standby cards in sync.
card-profiles.
MTAC cards have the following types and software images:

Table 105: MTAC card types
MTAC/RING 5003 malcmtac.bin
MTAC-FC 5012 malcmtacfc.bin
The card-profiles for MTAC/Ring cards require that the card-line-type

(which specifies the external clock source type) be specified.
To configure a redundant MTAC/Ring card, create a second card-profile for
the redundant card.
To enable an MTAC/Ring card:

sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcmtac.bin

Overview

upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {2}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: ds1 | e1 used for the external clock port
....................
New record saved.
Creating card-profiles for MTAC-FC cards
Caution: Each MTAC-FC card in a redundant pair must be

configured identically; the cards do not share state or configuration
information. In addition, you must manually keep the configuration
of the active and standby cards in sync.
The card-profiles for MTAC-FC cards require that the card-line-type (which
specifies the external clock source type) be specified.
To configure a redundant MTAC-FC card, create a second card-profile for
the redundant card.
To enable an MTAC-FC card:
sw-file-name: ---------> {}: malcmtacfc.bin
upgrade-vers: ---------> {}:
card-group-id: --------> {2}:
card-line-type: -------> {unknowntype}: ds1 | e1 used for the external clock port
....................
New record saved.


a few moments.
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 0
zSH> slots 13
Type : MALC ADSL
Card Version : 1
EEPROM Version : 2
Serial # : 110006
CLEI Code : No CLEI
Shelf : 1
Slot : 13
Mode : FUNCTIONAL
Longest hbeat : 59
Uptime : 1 minute
arguments:
zSH> slots

Connecting the MTAC/Ring card

__________________________________
1: 1/14 333 MALC MTAC
Connecting the MTAC/Ring card

Before configuring the MTAC/Ring card, connect the card to the external test
access port. Figure 63 shows the connectors on the MTAC/Ring card.
Figure 63: External test access
External ring generator
External alarm connectors
Test access
External test access control
BITS clock access
Testing a line
The MALC creates mtac-profiles for each card installed in the system for
manually changing test modes. The MALC also enables connecting a
third-party device to the MALC MTAC card to set test relays. After
connecting the testing device, use the mtac-linetest command to set the relay
options. The default baud rate is 9600 bps. (This can be changed by
modifying the rs232-profile.)

The following command example sets and releases the relay:

zSH> mtac-linetest 1/8/48 lookout
Successful - In TestMode
zSH> mtac-linetest 1/8/48 release

Successful - Return to operational state
The following table describes the supported parameters in the mtac-profile.
ifIndex Specifies the ifindex of the physical line to be tested. If

no line is being tested, this value is 0.
Values:
A physical interface on the system. In the format
shelf/slot/port/subport/type
Default: 0
This parameter cannot be modified while a test is in
progress.
The ability of a physical line to support a metallic test
may vary depending on the cards installed and the
external test equipment.
test_mode Specifies metallic test mode for a given line. The test
mode can be changed only if the ifIndex parameter is
set to a nonzero value.
Values:
mtacModeBridge The subscriber line is metallically
connected to the MTAC test access port while the
subscriber is in service. To avoid service interruption,
the test head must be in high impedance (bridge) mode.
mtacModeLookIn The subscriber line is
disconnected and the service port is metallically routed
to the MTAC test access port. This allows the testing of
MALC service port using a external test head or where
the test head represents the subscriber terminal.
mtacModeLookOut The MALC service port is
disconnected and the subscriber line is metallically
routed to the MTAC test access port. This allows the
testing of line with or without a subscriber terminal.
mtacModeNone No MTAC test is in progress.
Default: mtacModeNone
The following example enables an external test device to access to the ADSL
interface on shelf 1, slot 3. port 1:
zSH> update mtac-profile 1
ifIndex: ---> {0/0/0/0/0} 1/3/1/0/adsl

Connecting external alarms
test_mode: -> {mtacmodenone} mtacmodelookout

....................
Record updated.
To stop access to the interface, set the mtac-profile back to the defaults:
zSH> update mtac-profile 1
ifIndex: ---> {1/3/1/0/adsl} 0/0/0/0/0
test_mode: -> {mtacmodelookin} mtacmodenone
....................
Record updated.
Note: The mtac-profile must be set back to its defaults before a line
can be specified for test access.
Connecting external alarms

The MTAC/Ring card has a 26 pin connector that provides alarm relay
contacts for up to 12 external devices. When an alarm condition occurs on the
external device, the MALC sends a trap. Each pair of pins can be assigned to a
different alarm. Use the num2str-profile to assign a description to an alarm
relay. The description is included in traps and log messages.
The num2str-profile uses an index in the form:
shelf/slot/282/alarm-contact
The following example adds a description to the first alarm contact of an
MTAC/Ring card in shelf 12:
zSH> update num2str-profile 1/12/282/1
name: -> {Relay 1}: cabinet open
....................
Record updated.
Connecting an external clock

The MALC supports the following external clock sources:
• BITs clock (requires the MTAC/Ring card)
• 2.048 Mhz external clock (requires the MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk card)
Connecting a BITs clock to the MTAC/Ring card

The BITs clock on the MTAC/Ring card appears to the system as a T1
interface. To connect the clock source:

1 Connect the clock cable to the MTAC/Ring RJ-45 port labeled Clock.
2 Configure the system to use the clock, as explained in System clocking on
page 204.
Connecting a 2Mhz clock to the MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk card

The BITs clock on the MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk card uses pins 6 and 8 for
ground and pin 7 for the clock reference. To connect the clock source:
1 Connect the clock cable to the MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk RJ-45 port labeled
Clock.
2 Change the line-type in the ds1-profile for the MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk
card as in the following example:
line-type: ----------------------> {e1crc}: other
line-code: ----------------------> {b8zs}:
circuit-id: ---------------------> {ds1}:
signal-mode: --------------------> {none}:
fdl: ----------------------------> {fdlnone}:
ds1-mode: -----------------------> {csu}:
ds1-group-number: ---------------> {0}
....................
Record updated.
3 Configure the system to use the clock, as explained in System clocking on

page 204.
Connecting an external ring source

The MTAC/Ring card provides support for an external ring source to provide
ringing voltage for the system.

Connecting an external ring source
Caution: When connecting the external ring source, observe the

following:
If the external ring generator is non-isolated, connect the top pin to
the ringing voltage using a minimum 22 AWG wire, and leave the
bottom pin unconnected. See Figure 64 on page 397.
If the external ring generator is isolated, connect the top pin to the
ringing voltage using a minimum 22 AWG wire and the bottom pin to
-48V on the ring source. See Figure 65 on page 397.
Figure 64: Connecting a non-isolated ring source
Figure 65: Connecting an isolated ring source
After connecting the ring source, update the system profile to specify an
external ring source:

syscontact: ----------> {Zhone Global Services and Support 7001 Oakport Road Oa
kland Ca. (877) Zhone20 (946-6320) Fax (510)777-7113 support@zhone.com}:
sysname: -------------> {Zhone Malc}:
setserialno: ---------> {0}:
zmsexists: -----------> {false}:
zmsipaddress: --------> {0.0.0.0}:
configsyncfilename: --> {}:
configsyncstatus: ----> {syncinitializing}:
configsyncuser: ------> {}:
configsyncpasswd: ----> {}:
numshelves: ----------> {1}:
numcards: ------------> {3}:
ipaddress: -----------> {0.0.0.0}:
primaryclocksource: --> {0/0/0/0/0}:
ringsource: ----------> {internalringsourcelabel}: externalringsourcelabel
....................
Record updated.
MTAC/Ring and MTAC-FC card pinouts

This section lists the pinouts for the following interfaces on the MTAC/Ring
and MTAC-FC (MALC 319 only) card:
• External ring generator
• External alarm pinouts
• External test access
• External test control
• External clock pinouts (MTAC/Ring card)
• External clock pinouts (MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk card)
External ring generator
Table 106 lists the pinouts for the external ring generator.

Table 106: External ring generator pinouts
Pin Function
1 Power
2 Common
External alarm pinouts
The MTAC/Ring and the MTAC/Ring-FC cards provide a 26-pin connector

for access to external alarms.
The MTAC/Ring card has 16-volt inputs that require external current-limiting
resistors (4700 ohm, 0.5 watt) for 48-volt operation. The MTAC-FC accepts
48-volt inputs directly. All alarm inputs are metallically isolated using
optocouplers.
Figure 66: MTAC/Ring card external alarm connector pinouts
Figure 67: MTAC/Ring-FC card external alarm connector pinouts

Table 107 lists the pinouts for the 26-pin connector for access to external
alarms.
Table 107: MTAC/Ring card external alarm connector pinouts
External alarm Pin Function
N/A 1 -48V supply for external contacts
1 2 Input (+)
3 Input (-)
2 4 Input (+)
5 Input (-)
3 6 Input (+)
7 Input (-)
4 8 Input (+)
9 Input (-)
5 10 Input (+)
11 Input (-)
6 12 Input (+)
13 Input (-)
7 14 Input (+)
15 Input (-)
8 16 Input (+)
17 Input (-)
9 18 Input (+)
19 Input (-)
10 20 Input (+)
21 Input (-)
11 22 Input (+)
23 Input (-)
12 24 Input (+)
25 Input (-)
N/A 26 48V return (+)

External test access
Table 108 lists the pinouts for the MTAC/Ring card external test access port.
Table 108: MTAC/Ring card external test access port
Pin Function
1 Test in tip 1
2 Test in ring 1
3 Test out tip 1
4 Test out ring 1
5 Test in tip 2
6 Test in ring 2
7 Test out tip 2
8 Test out ring 2
External test control
Table 109 lists the pinouts for the MTAC/Ring card external test RS232
control port.
Table 109: MTAC/Ring card external test control port pinouts
Pin Function
1 DCE Ready, Ring Indicator

(DSR/RI)
2 Received Line Signal Detector (DCD)
3 DTE Ready (DTR)
4 Signal Ground (SGND)
5 Received Data (RD)
6 Transmitted Data (TD)
7 Clear To Send (CTS)
8 Request To Send (RTS)
External clock pinouts (MTAC/Ring card)
Table 111 lists the pinouts for the MTAC/Ring card clock port.

Table 110: MTAC/Ring card external clock pinouts
Pin Function
1 Rx ring
2 Rx tip
3 Not used
4 Tx ring
5 Tx tip
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
External clock pinouts (MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk card)
Table 111 lists the pinouts for the MTAC/Ring-2MHZ-CLK card clock port.
Table 111: MTAC/Ring card external clock pinouts
Pin Function
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 GND
7 Clock reference
8 GND

INDEX
Numerics ADSL+POTS-32A-2S card

specifications 221
32-port ADSL card ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-2S card
description 219 specifications 223
32-port ADSL to dual-50-pin cable ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S card
cable description 267 specifications 225
pinouts 267 ADSL-24 slot card
32-port ADSL+POTS card specifications 216
description 221 ADSL-32A card
32-port ADSL+Splitter card specifications 219
description 223 air filter, replacing 65
32-port ADSL+Splitter-UK card airflow, system requirements for 38
description 225 alarm cables and contacts
guidelines 75
A specifications 75
alarms 400
acronyms, described 13 external on MTAC/Ring cards 399
activating slot cards external on MTAC/Ring cards, voltage to
32-port ADSL+POTS card 234 trigger 399
32-port ADSL+Spiltter cards 234 APS
32-port ADSL+Spiltter-UK cards 235 configuration 139, 144, 164
ADSL Annex A cards 235 connecting redundant cable 155
ADSL cards 233, 366 ATM
description 193 ATM to TDM interworking overview 22
G.SHDSL cards 290 Circuit Emulation Service (CES) 365
POTS card 233, 236, 237, 315, 316 IMA groups
slot card installation 238, 291, 316, 341, 348, guidelines for 115, 185, 357
374, 381, 392 IMA groups, configuring 112, 182, 354
ULC cards 373 IMA links, moving to another group 116, 186,
ADSL 358
ADSL S=1/2 248 overview of support 21
configuring tone ranges 242 ATM cell termination connection
downstream interface 244 adding IP route to remote LAN 86
upstream interface 245 configuration 86
voice splitters and 216 creating ATM VCL 86
ADSL 2 and ADSL 2+ creating IP interface 87
configuring 252 defining ATM traffic descriptor 86
support 252 verifying IP interface 86
ADSL 48 port card ATM management connection
configuring 235 creating IP interface 87
ADSL interfaces ATM OC3-c interfaces
verifying the interface 247, 255 configuration 139, 155, 159
ADSL+POTS-24 slot card disabling SONET interface 142, 158
specifications 218 ATM traffic descriptor, definition of 86
ATM/TDM Uplink, splitting out using patch panel

Index
74 chassis
automatic baud rate detection dedicated ground 36
SDSL 292 dimensions 39
environmental specifications 39
B fans 39
grounding and isolation 42
backplane pins, installation of 51, 52 maximum temperature 38
battery, safety precautions for 35 number per rack 39
operating altitude 39
C operating humidity 39
operating temperature 39
cables rack installation 47, 48
cleaning fiber optic 79 storage altitude 39
DS3/E3 redundant 130, 133 storage humidity 39
installing cable management bracket 70 storage temperature 39
management bracket installation 70 unpacking 45
cables and connectors weight 39
32-port ADSL to dual-50-pin cable 267 weight distribution 38
8-port T1/E1 to dual 50-pin 118, 120 chassis dimensions 40
alarm cables and contacts 75 circuit breaker, specifications 42
ATM/TDM Uplink lines split out with patch Circuit Emulation Service (CES) 365
panels 74 cleaning components 79
cabling guidelines 67 clocking 204
NEC article 800 67 BITS clock ds1-profile on MTAC/Ring card
power lines 67 204
connecting OC3-c optical cables 68 BITS clock on MTAC/Ring card 205
covers 67 configuring system in system profile 209
description 73 eligible and non-eligible sources 210
DS3/E3 cable 133 external clock on MTAC/Ring 395
FCC regulations 67 for SDSL interfaces 296
ground minimum 59 manually changing system clock 209
non-redundant TDM uplink cable 190 revertive 209
OC3-c/STM1 cables 68 specifying DS3/E3 207
pinouts 77 specifying OC3-c/STM1 208
ratings 41 specifying T1/E1 206
redundant TDM uplink cable 187 viewing system 210
rules 41 commands
shielded 67 dslstat 303
specifications 73 get 139, 155, 159
using ducts 38 ifxlate 87
cards showlinestatus 297
MALC t1/E1 12 CES 365 common return 41
types 232, 290, 340, 348, 373, 380, 390 compliance, specifications supported 43
Uplink types 197 configuration 159
VG-T1/E1-32-2S 28, 323 ATM cell termination connection 86
viewing active redundant 292, 342, 349, 375, ATM OC3-c interfaces 139, 155, 159
393 CLI disabled 88
CES 365 local management channel 83
structured and unstructured 365 logging in 83
logging out 83

SDSL 296 specifying interface type 293
SDSL/SHDSL interface 292, 297 verifying the interface 297
SHDSL interface 297
specifying DSL interface 293 E
verifying interfaces 247, 255, 297, 303
configuring ATM data connection E1 interface
ATM cell termination connection 86 defaults 108, 179, 350
configuring management interface E1, over ATM or IP circuit 365
accessing the serial port 83 electrostatic discharge, see ESD
local management channel 83 environmental requirements
logging in and out 83 precautions 39
configuring physical interfaces specifications 39
ATM OC3-c interfaces 139, 155, 159 ESD
disabling SONET interface 142, 158 preventing 37
SDSL 296 slot cards 37, 51
SDSL/SHDSL interfaces 292, 297 Ethernet 159
SHDSL interfaces 297 configuring
specifying DSL interface 293 Gigabit Ethernet, configuring 158
verifying interfaces 247, 255, 297, 303 Ethernet interface
connecting OC3-c optical cables 68 configuration 84
connecting OC3-c/STM1 cables 68 creating a default route 85
connecting power creating a route from management PVC to 87
power supplies 57 IP interface 84
procedure 57 route show command 85
terminal block 57 verifying 85
craft interface 83 verifying the route 85
creating ATM VCL, description of 86
creating IP interface F
adding route to remote LAN 86
description 87 feature overview 20
ifxlate 87 features
specifying VPI/VCI pair 87 new in this release 11
verifying the interface 87 fiber
creating IP management interface cleaning cables 79
description 87 flash cards
cutoff requirements 41 card sizes in redundant pair 193, 326
functionality, feature overview 20
D FXS
adding gain and loss 257, 317
DC power sources 41
DS3/E3 G
6 inch cable and 130, 133
DS3/E3 Uplink card G.SHDSL-24 slot card
cabling description 133 specifications 286, 288
DSL gain, adding 257, 317
ADSL S=1/2 248 Gigabit Ethernet
fixed bit rate settings and training rates 293 configuration 159
DSL interfaces differences on high performance card 159
SDSL configuration 296 GigE-2 card

Index
line type 94 interfaces

grounding line speeds for DSL interfaces with fixed bit
acceptable conductors 37 rates 293
cable gauge 59 specifying type of MTAC/Ring card 390, 391
conductor requirements 55 Inverse Multiplexing over ATM, See IMA
dedicated 36 IP
power 37 addresses for redundant Uplink cards 84
specifications for 55 Circuit Emulation Service (CES) 365
system 56 ISDN
torque applied to connectors 60, 62 overview 25
two-wire power supply 42
using power supply connection 39 L
groupSymmetry parameter 113, 183, 355
laser beam, safety precautions for 35
I LEDs
description 63, 64
ifindex parameter 394 reading 61
IMA redundancy 64
group guidelines 115, 185, 357 system described 63
groupSymmetry 113, 183, 355 line testing, MTAC 393
links, moving 116, 186, 358 line-type
minNumTxLinks 113, 183, 355 GigE-2 card 94
parameters 113, 183, 355 local management channel 83
IMA groups logging
configuring 112, 182, 354 enabling/disabling for session 84
installation enabling/disabling over the serial craft port 84
cable management bracket 70 logging in and out
connecting power 57 description 83
grounding conductors 55 logout command 83
installing slot cards 50 timeout command 83
LEDs 61 loss, adding 257, 317
mounting brackets 46
rack installation 47, 48 M
removing slot cards 53, 54
unpacking the system 45 maintenance
installation precautions 38 cleaning toolkit 81
airflow 38 replacing air filter 65
cables and connectors 38 management
cabling ducts 38 creating route from management PVC to
chassis weight 38 Ethernet 87
environmental requirements 39 for dual non-redundant Uplinks 204
grounding 39 maximum temperature, precautions and 38
maximum temperature 38 metallic cables
ventilation 38 alarms 73
weight distribution 38 craft 73
installing slot cards Ethernet 73
backplane pins 51, 52 G.SHDSL 73
description 50 specifications 73
procedure 51, 52 minNumTxLinks parameter 113, 183, 355

modems POTS cards
DSL training rates 293 support for packetized voice 29
mounting brackets types 314
chassis 46 POTS-24 slot card
installation procedure 46 specifications 312
MTAC/Ring card POTS-48 slot card
BITS clock on 204 specifications 314
configuring redundancy 390, 391 power
external alarm contacts 400 circuit breaker 42
external clock reference 401, 402 using jumper for single supply 59
ifindex 394 using supply for grounding 39
parameters 394 power connections 41
specifications 389 power feeds 41, 42
specifying line type for 390, 391 power specifications
test_mode 394 cable ratings 41
MTAC/Ring external contacts 400 cables and connectors 41
common return 41
N connections 41
cutoff requirements 41
non-redundant TDM uplink cable DC power 42
cable description 190 DC power sources 41
description 42
O power feeds 41, 42
rated current 42
OC3-c/STM1 rated power 42
APS 144, 164 system 41
attenuation 139, 157 preparing for installation
overview 31 grounding and isolation 42
installation precautions 38
P safety precautions 35
selecting the system location 38
tools you need 37
packet voice
profiles
configuring POTS card for 316
ulc-config 375
parameters
IMA 113, 183, 355
MTAC/Ring card 394 R
pinouts
external alarm 399 rack installation
pinouts, assignments for 77 chassis 47, 48
PON procedure 47, 48
traffic containers 385 rated current 42
POTS rated power 42
adding gain and loss 257, 317 redundancy 31
configuring card for packet voice 316 configuring Uplink 193
configuring card for TDM voice 315 connecting APS cable 155
POTS card DS3/E3 cables 130, 133
24 port card overview 312 flash card sizes 193, 326
48 port card overview 313 IP addresses and 84
600 ohm and 900 ohm 312 LEDs 64

Index
MTAC/Ring 390, 391 types supported 18

viewing active cards 292, 342, 349, 375, 393 Uplink-DS3/E3 specifications 126
viewing status information about 200 Uplink-OC3-c/STM1 specifications 137, 148
redundant TDM uplink cable Uplink-T1/E1 specifications 104
cable description 187 Uplink-TDM/ATM specifications 174
removing slot cards, procedure for 53, 54 Small Form Factor Pluggables 99
SONET
S disabling interface 142, 158
specifications
safety chassis dimensions 40
standards 35 environmental 39
safety precautions system cables 73
battery 35 standards, support for IP 23
description 36 storing slot cards 50
laser beam 35 system 204
SDSL activating slot cards 193
clocking from network 296 cables and connectors 67
SDSL/HDSL2 cards clocking 204
configuration 296 configuring management interface 83
SDSL/SHDSL interfaces environmental dimensions
configuration 292, 297 chassis 39
selecting the system location 38 weight 39
SFP 99 Ethernet interface 84
SHDSL feature overview 20
connecting LP card to Raptor 100 308 input power 41
SHDSL interfaces maximum temperature 38
configuration 297 metallic cables 73
verifying the interface 303 profile
slot cards updating 88
activating 193 system profile 88
ADSL+POTS-24 specifications 218 unpacking 45
ADSL+POTS-32A-2S specifications 221 Uplink cards 84
ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-2S specifications system environmental dimensions
223 chassis per rack 39
ADSL+SPLTR-ANXA-32A-UK-2S fans 39
specifications 225 operating altitude 39
ADSL-24 specifications 216 operating humidity 39
ADSL-32A specifications 219 operating temperature 39
ESD 51 storage altitude 39
G.SHDSL-24 specifications 286, 288 storage humidity 39
installation 50 storage temperature 39
verifying 238, 291, 316, 341, 348, 374, system input power 41
381, 392 system profile
MTAC/Ring specifications 389 clocking and 209
POTS-24 specifications 312
POTS-48 specifications 314 T
redundancy 31
removing 53, 54 T1 interface
storing 50 defaults 108, 179, 350

T1, over ATM or IP circuit 365 V
T1/E1 Uplink card
cable description 118, 120 V5.2
TDM voice overview 25
configuring POTS card for 315 ventilation, requirements for 38
temperature, maximum 38 voice
terminal interface, settings for 83 packetinzed voice support on POTS cards 29
test_mode parameter 394 POTS 24 card 312
tone ranges, on ADSL card 242 POTS 48 card 313
tools for installation 37 voice gateway 28, 323
types, listing of cards 232, 290, 340, 348, 373, 380, voice gateway
390 adding 325
types, listing of POTS cards 314 cable pinouts 327
types, listing of Uplink cards 197 overview 28, 323
redundant card 326
U voice splitters, ADSL card and 216
VOIP
ULC card support on POTS cards 29
hardware overview 372
pinouts 376 Z
specifications 372
viewing ulc-config profiles 375 ZMS
ulc-config profiles 375 CLI configuration disabled 88
Uplink 2-GE card
specifications 92
Uplink card
redundancy and IP addresses 84
Uplink cards
configuration 84
dual, non-redundant 200
dual, non-redundant and management 204
E1 defaults 108, 179, 350
redundancy configuration 193
T1 defaults 108, 179, 350
types supported 18
Uplink-DS3/E3 slot card
specifications 126
Uplink-OC3-c/STM1 slot card
specifications 137, 148
Uplinks
types supported 15
Uplink-T1/E1 slot card
specifications 104
Uplink-TDM/ATM slot card
specifications 174
Upljnk cards
flash card sizes in redundant pair 193, 326

Index

Malc 1 11 2 HwInstall

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Malc 1 11 2 HwInstall

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MALC Hardware Installation Guide

MALC 723, MALC 719, and MALC 319

For software version 1.11.2

2 MALC Hardware Installation Guide

What’s new in this release .....................................................................................11

Chapter 1 MALC ..........................................................................................................................15

MALC Hardware Installation Guide 3

POTS voice .............................................................................................................26

Chapter 2 Preparing for installation ...................................................................................35

Chapter 3 Installing the MALC ..............................................................................................45

4 MALC Hardware Installation Guide

Chapter 5 Managing the MALC .............................................................................................83

Chapter 6 Gigabit Ethernet card (UPLINK-2-GE) ...........................................................91

Chapter 7 T1/E1 Uplink card (Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/IP-8) ..............................................103

MALC Hardware Installation Guide 5

Chapter 8 DS3/E3 Uplink card (Uplink-DS3/E3-ATM/IP) ...........................................125

Chapter 9 OC-3C/STM1 Uplink Card (Uplink-OC3C/STM1-ATM/IP) .....................135

Chapter 10 OC-12c/STM4/GigE cards .................................................................................147

Chapter 11 TDM/ATM Uplink card (Uplink-T1/E1-ATM/TDM/IP) ..............................173

Chapter 12 System Configuration ........................................................................................193

6 MALC Hardware Installation Guide

Chapter 13 ADSL cards ............................................................................................................213

Chapter 14 SHDSL cards .........................................................................................................285

MALC Hardware Installation Guide 7

Configuration restrictions .....................................................................................293

Chapter 15 POTS cards ............................................................................................................311

Chapter 16 Voice Gateway Card (VG-T1/E1-32-2S) ......................................................323

Chapter 17 VDSL Card (VDSL-16) ........................................................................................339

Chapter 18 T1/E1 ATM 32 card (T1/E1-ATM-32) .............................................................345

8 MALC Hardware Installation Guide

Chapter 20 Universal Line Card (ULC-ISDN-12) .............................................................371

Chapter 21 PON Card (PON-OLT) .........................................................................................379

Chapter 22 Metallic Test Access card (MTAC/RING, MTAC/Ring-2Mhz-Clk and

MALC Hardware Installation Guide 9

10 MALC Hardware Installation Guide

This guide is intended for use by installation technicians, system

What’s new in this release

Style and notation conventions

MALC Hardware Installation Guide 11

Caution: A caution alerts users to conditions or actions that could

Note: A note provides important supplemental or amplified

Tip: A tip provides additional information that enables users to more

WARNING! A warning alerts users to conditions or actions that

WARNING! A warning with this icon alerts users to conditions or

Bold Used for names of buttons, dialog boxes, icons, menus,

12 MALC Hardware Installation Guide

Table 1: Acronyms and their descriptions

ADSL Asymmetrical digital subscriber line

ARP Address resolution protocol

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

BAN Broadband Access Node

CID Channel identifier

DSL Digital subscriber line

SHDSL Symmetric high-bit-rate digital subscriber line

IAD Integrated access device

MALC Multi-access line concentrator

MIB Management information bases

MTAC Metallic Test Access Card

PBX Private branch exchange

POTS Plain old telephone service

RIP Routing Information Protocol

SDSL Symmetric digital subscriber line